2017 M Lancer

Lancer
/ 2017 OWNER’S MANUAL

Lancer
2017 / OWNER’S MANUAL
© Copyright 2016 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.

BK0237700US.book 1 ページ２０１６年４月１５日　金曜日　午前１１時２８分
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)
1 Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

N00100202720
Instrument cluster P.5-90 Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter

Multi-information meter switch P.5-93 (if so equipped) P.5-64
Combination headlights and dimmer

switch P.5-127
Turn signal lever P.5-133 Wiper and washer switch
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-134
P.5-134
Cruise control switches (if so
equipped) P.5-80
Steering wheel audio remote
control switches (if so equipped)
P.7-27
Ignition switch P.5-52
Headlight leveling switch
(if so equipped) P.5-132 Supplemental restraint system - air-
Active stability control (ASC) bag (for driver’s seat) P.4-21
OFF switch (if so equipped) Horn switch P.5-139
P.5-77
Fuses P.9-25 Steering wheel tilt lock lever

P.5-49
Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag

P.4-21
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) P.5-139
Engine hood release lever P.9-3
1-1 Overview
Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls 1

N00100202733
Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front

passenger’s seat) P.4-21
Gearshift or selector lever P.5-57, 5-59
Vents P.7-2
Glove compartment
P.5-167
Parking brake lever Center console box P.5-167

P.5-48
Trunk lid release lever Drive mode-selector (if so equipped) P.5-68
P.5-39
Fuel tank filler door
release lever Cup holder (for front seats) P.5-168
P.3-3
Heated seat switch (if so equipped) P.4-4
12 V power outlet (if so equipped) Floor console box (if so equipped) P.5-167
P.5-163 Tissue holder (if so equipped) P.5-167
Overview 1-2
Center panel
1 Center panel
N00100701265
Audio (if so equipped) P.7-15

DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)
Refer to the separate owner’s manual
Hazard warning flasher switch Front passenger seat belt warn-

P.5-133 ing light P.4-11
Electric rear window

defogger switch
Passenger’s airbag off P.5-138
indicator P.4-25
Air conditioning
P.7-4, 7-9
USB input terminal P.5-160
12 V power outlet P.5-163
1-3 Overview
Interior
Interior 1
N00100302444
Electric remote-con- Dome light (Front)/Reading lights P.5-164,

trolled outside mirror 9-32, 9-40 Sunroof switch (if so
Window lock switch P.5-45
switch P.5-51 equipped) P.5-46
Power door lock switch

Power window switches
P.5-37
P.5-43
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface microphone (if so equipped) P.5-139
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor Inside rearview mirror

(for front seats) P.4-11 P.5-50
Seat belts P.4-8
Sun visors P.5-163

Vanity mirror P.5-163
Bottle holder (for front seat) P.5-168
Front seats P.4-3
Supplemental restraint system - side airbag

(for front seats, if so equipped) P.4-31
Head restraints P.4-6
Overview 1-4
Interior
1
Supplemental restraint system - curtain airbag (if so equipped) P.4-32
Coat hook (if so equipped) P.5-169

Dome light (Rear, if so equipped) P.5-165, 9-32, 9-41
Assist grip P.5-168
Rear seat P.4-5
Tether anchors for child restraint system

Cup holder (for rear seat, if so equipped) P.5-168
P.4-16
Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-6
1-5 Overview
Trunk area
Trunk area 1
N00100501537
Trunk area light P.9-32, 9-41 Inside emergency trunk lid release lever
P.5-40 Spare tire P.8-7
Jack P.8-5
Tools P.8-5
Overview 1-6
Outside (Front)
1 Outside (Front)
N00100602678
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-51

Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-46 Side turn signal lights (if so equipped)
Windshield wiper and washer P.5-133, 9-30
P.5-134
Fuel tank filler
Engine compartment P.9-5 P.3-3
Engine hood P.9-3 Locking and unlocking P.5-34
Keyless entry system
(if so equipped) P.5-7
F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand
Advanced Security Transmitter)
(if so equipped) P.5-12
Side turn signal lights (if so equipped)

P.5-133, 9-30
Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-134, 9-30, 9-36
[Except for vehicles with high intensity discharge headlights type] [For vehicles with high intensity discharge headlights type]
Front turn signal lights Headlights, low beam

Front turn signal lights
P.5-133, 9-30, 9-35 P.5-127, 9-30, 9-32
P.5-133, 9-30, 9-35 Headlights, low/high beam
Daytime running lights
(if so equipped) P.9-30 P.5-127, 9-30, 9-34
Front side-marker lights P.5-127, 9-30, 9-34
Parking lights (if so equipped) Front side-marker lights
P.5-127, 9-30, 9-34 P.5-127, 9-30, 9-35
Daytime running lights Daytime running lights P.9-30
(if so equipped) P.9-30 Parking lights P.5-127, 9-30
Headlights, high beam Parking lights (if so equipped)
P.5-127, 9-30, 9-33 P.5-127, 9-30
1-7 Overview
Outside (Rear)
Outside (Rear) 1
N00100602593
Antenna P.7-51 Tire inflation pressure P.9-17

Changing tires P.8-6
Tire rotation P.9-19
Wheel covers (if so equipped) P.8-11
High-mounted stop light P.9-30 Tire chains P.9-20
Tire pressure monitoring system P.5-84
Trunk lid P.5-39
Rear-view camera
(if so equipped)
P.5-88
Trunk lid OPEN switch

(if so equipped) P.5-14 Rear side-marker lights P.5-127, 9-30, 9-38
License plate lights

P.5-127, 9-30, 9-39 Rear turn-signal lights P.5-133, 9-30, 9-38
Back-up lights
P.9-30, 9-38
Tail and stop lights P.5-127, 9-30, 9-38
Tail lights P.5-127, 9-30, 9-38
Overview 1-8
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200702191
NOTE
 For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display, refer to “Multi-information display indicators” on page 5-91.
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON”.
Warning light Do this Ref. page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your P.5-125
choice for assistance.
Charging system warning light
 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is
fully released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, stop and check the
or brake fluid level. P.5-124
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid
Brake warning light hard braking and high speeds, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.
 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have
the engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
or repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not driv-
able, contact emergency roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehi- P.5-124
Engine malfunction indicator cles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local towing company for assis-
light”) tance.
Quick index 2-1


Warning light Do this Ref. page
 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning
2 and only the ordinary braking system is functioning.
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.
P.5-74,
Test the system as described on page 5-75.
5-75
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recom-
Anti-lock braking system warning light mend that you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked P.4-13,
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 4-26
SRS warning light

 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the
proper inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few
minutes of driving.
P.5-84
 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the sys-
Tire pressure monitoring system warning light tem returns to normal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light
does not go off, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
2-2 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200901994
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Cannot turn the key. When using a key to start the engine
(When using a key to start the Will not turn from “LOCK” to “ACC”.
engine) Turn the key while turning the steering wheel in either direction.
Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”.

Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT): P.5-53
Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Place the key at the “ACC” position. Push the key in and turn it.
(When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start

When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the engine
the engine)
Will not turn from “LOCK (PUSH OFF)” to “ACC”.
Push the ignition switch again, turn the steering wheel in both directions and then turn
the ignition switch.
Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”. P.5-12
Vehicles with CVT:
Check whether the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Place the ignition switch at the “ACC” position. Push the ignition switch in and turn it.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not operate.

(for vehicles equipped with the Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the doors and start the engine. P.5-22
F.A.S.T.-key)
Cannot shift the selector lever from
Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
the “P” (PARK) position. (for vehi- P.5-59
Check that the ignition key or ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
cles equipped with CVT)
Quick index 2-3


Problem Do this Ref. Page
The windows are fogged up.
2
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position. P.

2. Turn on the blower. 7-8, 7-13
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P.8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-12
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
2-4 Quick index


Problem Do this Ref. page
The engine coolant temperature dis-
play “ ” in the multi-information
2
display is flashing.
Steam comes out of the engine com-
partment.
Type 1
The engine is overheated.

P.8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Type 2
1. Slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving again. For
vehicle equipped with the Electronically controlled 4WD system, set the drive mode-
If your vehicle becomes stuck in selector to the “4WD AUTO” or “4WD LOCK” position and then slowly press down
P.8-14
sand, mud or snow on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving.
2. If there is nothing to stop your tires from slipping, rock your vehicle back and forth to
free it.
WARNING
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.
Quick index 2-5


Problem Do this Ref. page
The brakes are not functioning prop-
2 erly after driving through water.
Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P.6-5
The CVT makes no engine speed to

vehicle speed ratio change when There may be a problem in the CVT.
accelerating. The initial movement of If the or warning lights on the multi-information display will not turn off, or if P.5-67
the vehicle is slow when the vehicle they are coming on frequently, please have the vehicle checked at your nearest Mitsubi-
starts moving. shi Motors dealer.
(for vehicles with CVT)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P.8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
2-6 Quick index

General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts .....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-6
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector fouling and is at least as high as that recommended for
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent unleaded gasoline.
N00301001948
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop-
Methanol
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel filler erly.
tube especially designed to accept only a
small diameter unleaded gasoline dispensing Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
nozzle.
Octane requirement taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
type of alcohol could adversely affect the
Your vehicle is designed to operate on vehicle’s performance and damage critical
WARNING unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2], or 91 RON.
sive. You could be burned, seriously
injured or killed when handling it. When- MON: Motor Octane Number Reformulated gasoline
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the
RON: Research Octane Number
engine and keep flames, sparks, and
Many areas of the country require the use of
smoking materials away from the vehicle.
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- Oxygenated gasoline lated Gasoline”.
door areas.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
Gasoline sold at some service stations con- and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although
CAUTION the oxygenates may not be identified by those
emissions and improve air quality.
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-
names. Oxygenates are required in some ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso-
areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in erly blended reformulated gasoline has no
line is illegal, and will void your warranty your vehicle. adverse effect on vehicle performance or the
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, durability of the engine and fuel system.
and oxygen sensors.
Ethanol (Gasohol)
A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-

Gasoline detergent additives hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
in your vehicle, provided the octane number
In the United States, fuel suppliers are
required by law to add detergents to their gas-
3-2 General information
Filling the fuel tank

Motors dealer may suggest you try using a
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl different, lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gas- Filling the fuel tank
manganese tricarbonyl) oline to determine whether the problem is N00301100900
fuel-related.
WARNING
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
3
additive that is blended into some gasolines NOTE sive. You could be burned, seriously
to increase the octane number.  Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems injured or killed when handling it. When
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends such as poor starting, stalling during idling, refueling your vehicle, always turn the
using gasolines without MMT. abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera- engine off and keep away from flames,
Use of gasolines blended with MMT may tion. If you experience any of these prob- sparks, and smoking materials. Always
adversely affect performance, and cause the lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
malfunction indicator on your instrument If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER- areas.
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an VICE ENGINE SOON” or “CHECK  Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a ENGINE”) flashes, have the vehicle get rid of your body’s static electricity by
inspected as soon as possible by the nearest touching a metal part of the car or fuel
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a pump. Any static electricity on your body
repair facility of your choice. could create a spark that ignites fuel
Sulfur in gasoline  Repeatedly driving short distances at low vapor.
speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel  Perform the whole refueling process
system and engine, resulting in poor starting (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- and poor acceleration. If these problems ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not
isfy California’s low-emission regulations occur, you are advised to add a detergent let any other person come near the fuel
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline. additive to the gasoline when you refuel the tank filler. If you allowed a person to help
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other vehicle. The additive will remove the depos- you and that person was carrying static
than California is allowed to have a higher its, thereby returning the engine to a normal electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con- Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an until refueling is finished. If you moved
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi- unsuitable additive could make the engine away and did something else (for example,
cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or malfunction. For details, please contact the sitting on a seat) part-way through the
nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. refueling process, you could pick up a
“CHECK ENGINE”) to come on. Illumina-
tion of this indicator while you are using fresh charge of static electricity.
high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily  Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
contains toxic substances.
mean the vehicle’s emission-control system is
malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi
General information 3-3
Filling the fuel tank

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
WARNING turning the cap counterclockwise.
 Keep the doors and windows closed while
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
3
Fuel tank capacity
Front-wheel drive vehicles: 15.5 gal (59.0 L)

All-wheel drive vehicles: 14.5 gal (55.0 L)
Refueling 5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly

A- Remove on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. B- Close zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear zle in the tank port as far as it will go.
driver side of your vehicle.
The fuel tank filler door can be opened WARNING CAUTION
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank  Since the fuel system may be under pres-  Your vehicle can only be operated using
filler door release lever located at the left sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-
side of the driver’s seat. slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac- lytic converter damage will result if leaded
uum that might have built up in the fuel gasoline is used.
tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops 6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do
before removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel not attempt to add more fuel.
may spray out, injuring you or others.
CAUTION
4. While filling with fuel, store the cap in the  To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
cap holder located on the inside of the fuel “top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could
tank filler door. discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it
off with a soft cloth.

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap  Modification of any onboard com-
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking Modifications to and racing puter/control module, including repro-
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank of your vehicle gramming, or replacing/adding chips to
filler door closed. N00301600048 any onboard computer/control module
This vehicle should not be modified with 3
WARNING non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Mit-
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-
 Make sure the fuel cap is securely closed. ual for further details regarding warranty cov-
subishi Motors designs and manufactures
If the fuel cap is loose, fuel could leak, erage.
high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
resulting in a fire.
safety and durability. Modifications using
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may Installation of accessories
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-
CAUTION ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-
N00301701235
 If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, ble state and/or federal regulations. CAUTION
use only the cap specified for your model
 Before any electrical or electronic accesso-
vehicle. DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB- ries are installed, consult an authorized
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA- Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR  Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis
NOTE VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED connector (data link connector) for checking
 If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while and servicing the electronic control system.
UNDER WARRANTY.
driving, the engine malfunction indicator Mitsubishi Motors does not recommend con-
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check necting a device other than the Scan Tool for
Examples of modifications to your vehicle
engine light”) may come on when the inspections and service to this connector
that can cause damage or performance prob-
onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs because an unexpected problem could result.
a self check. lems include the following:
In addition, malfunctions caused by connect-
Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until ing a device other than the Scan Tool may
you hear clicking sounds.
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
not be covered under warranty.
The indicator will go off after driving several parts
times. If the indicator does not go off, con-  Failure to use required fuel and fluids
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels  The installation of accessories, optional
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust, parts, etc., should only be carried out
soon as possible. emission, suspension, engine, drive train within the limits prescribed by law in the
or electrical wiring systems driving area and in accordance with the
guidelines and warnings contained within
the documents accompanying this vehicle.
General information 3-5

Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts

Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-
Important point! Mitsubishi Motors genuine
sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
 Improper installation of electrical parts parts
could cause fire. Refer to the “Modifica- Due to the large number of accessory and N00301400105
3 tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel replacement parts provided by different man-

ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos- Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
systems” section within this owner’s man- designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
ual. sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer to check whether the attachment or dards of performance, and are recommended
 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
the vehicle without an external antenna installation of non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-
ine parts will affect the driving safety of your able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
may cause electrical system interference, a wide variety of accessories to personalize
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- Mitsubishi-vehicle.
your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi vehicle
tion. has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors autho-
 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec- Modification/alterations to the rized accessories to choose from to tailor your
ifications must not be used.
electrical or fuel systems new vehicle to your own personal preference.
Refer to the “Specifications” section for Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s Parts Man-
N00301800040
information regarding wheel and tire ager has information on various audio sys-
sizes. Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is tems, protection items, as well as interior and
important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi exterior accessories available for your spe-
WARNING Motors dealer before installation of any cific model.
 If you choose to use a cellular phone while accessory which may involve modification of
driving, you must not allow that usage to
distract you in the safe operation of your
the electrical or fuel systems. California Perchlorate
vehicle. Anything, including cellular Materials Requirements
phone usage, that distracts you from the CAUTION N00300100017
safe operation of your vehicle increases  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Certain components of this vehicle, such as
your risk of an accident. Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
Refer to and follow all state and local laws sory fitment or modification. airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
in your area regarding cellular phone If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
usage while driving. improper installation methods are used (pro- materials.
tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic Special handling may apply. For additional
devices may be adversely affected, resulting information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident. waste/perchlorate.

Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-3
Rear seats .........................................................................................4-5
Head restraints .................................................................................4-6
Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-8
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-12
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-12
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-13
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-20
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-21
Seats
Seats
N00408400479
 Arm rest (if so equipped)  P.4-6 gers. The seats, head restraints, and door
1 - Front seats locks also are safety equipment, which must
be used correctly.
 To adjust the seat forward or backward  Seats and restraint systems
P.4-3 N00401601248 Always check the following before you drive:
 To adjust the seatback  P.4-4
Your vehicle has seat belts and other features
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s side  That everyone in your vehicle is properly
that help protect you and your passengers in
only, if so equipped)  P.4-4 wearing their seat belt.
an accident.
 Heated seats (if so equipped)  P.4-4  That infants and small children are prop-
Seat belts are the most important safety
device. When worn properly, seat belts can erly secured in appropriate child restraint
2 - Rear seats reduce the chance of serious injury or death systems in the rear seat.
in various types of crashes. For added protec-  That all doors are fully closed and locked.
 Folding the seatbacks forward (if so tion during a severe frontal collision, your  That seatbacks are upright, with head
equipped)  P.4-5 vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System restraints properly adjusted.
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen-
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

Front seats
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
death in all motor vehicle accidents. You can
WARNING CAUTION
 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while  When sliding the seats, be careful not to
help reduce the risk of injury or death, how-
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con- catch your hand or leg.
ever, by following the instructions in this
trol and result in an accident.  When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
manual.
 After adjusting the seat, make sure that pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
WARNING
the seat is securely locked into position.
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
gers.
4
 Do not place objects under the seats. This injury or death during deployment of the
could prevent the seat from locking driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
To adjust the seat forward or
securely, and it could lead to an accident. seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far backward
It may also cause damage to the seat or back as possible while maintaining a posi- N00401901355
other parts. tion that still enables you to fully apply the
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
and safely operate the vehicle.
seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
 To reduce the risk to the front passenger
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
Front seats of serious injury or death during deploy- seat in place.
N00401801442 ment of the passenger’s airbag, always
Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi- properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
ble while maintaining a position that still front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily ble.
control the steering wheel and safely operate  Always place children 12 years old and
under in the rear seat and use appropriate
the vehicle.
child restraint systems.
CAUTION
 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
 Do not place a cushion or the like between WARNING
your back and the seatback while driving.  To make sure that the seat is securely
The effectiveness of the head restraints will locked, try to move it forward or back-
be reduced in the event of an accident. ward without using the adjusting lever.
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Front seats
To adjust the seatback WARNING

N00402001409  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, death in the event of an accident or sud-
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then
the upright position while the vehicle is in
lean backward to a comfortable position and
motion.
4 release the lever. The seatback will lock in Seat belt performance during an accident
place. can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against 1- Raise
the body during an accident, there is 2- Lower
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
Heated seats (if so equipped)
N00435601447
To adjust the seat height
The heated seats can be operated when the
(Driver’s side only, if so ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
equipped)
CAUTION N00402100184
 The reclining mechanism used in the seat- Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower
back is spring loaded, and will cause the the seat.
seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
back or hold the seatback with your hand to
control its return motion.
1(HI)- Heater high (for quick heating)

2- Heater off
Rear seats
3(LO)- Heater low (to keep the seat warm)
CAUTION
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while  When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
the heater is on. kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
solvents; doing so can cause damage not
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
WARNING heater.
 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
4
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill- seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use, attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
fatigue or other physical conditions or off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns tioning during use.
when using the heated seat even at low
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns, WARNING
people with such conditions must use care Rear seats  Do not allow anyone to ride in the luggage
when using the heated seat. N00402501260
compartment while the vehicle is in
motion. People who are not properly
Folding the seatbacks forward seated and restrained can be seriously
CAUTION injured or killed in an accident.
(if so equipped)
 Switch off the seat heaters when not in use.  After returning the rear seatbacks to their
N00402900195
Operate the heaters at high for quick heating. upright positions, make sure that the seat-
After the seat has become warm, set the backs lock in place and are firmly secured.
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to
heater to low to keep it warm. Slight varia- Also check to be sure that the rear seat
tions in the seat temperature may be felt
provide additional luggage compartment belts are in front of the seatbacks, and not
while using the heated seats. This is caused space. caught behind the seatbacks.
by the operation of the heater’s internal ther- Push the left and/or right release buttons (A),
mostat and does not indicate a malfunction. and fold the rear seatbacks forward. Confirm
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or that the seatback locks securely when it is CAUTION
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects returned.  In the cargo area, do not load the luggage
into the seat. higher than the top of the seats and make
 Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other sure that the luggage is firmly secured.
insulating material on the seat while using Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele- ing the passenger compartment during sud-
ment to overheat. den braking can result in a serious accident
and injury.

Head restraints
NOTE Head restraints WARNING

 If the seatbacks are returned using too much N00404301611  In order to minimize the risk of a neck
force, this may cause the center seat belt to injury due to a rear impact, the head
Padded head restraints for the seats can
lock up. If the seat belt locks up, pull the seat restraint must be adjusted to the proper
belt once with force and let it retract all the
reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your position before vehicle operation. For the
way. vehicle is hit from the rear. driver and front passenger, the seatbacks
4 The head restraints are equipped in the illus- must be adjusted to the upright position
trated position. before adjusting the head restraints. The
To maximize the effectiveness of your head driver should never adjust the seat while
Arm rest (if so equipped) restraint, adjust the head restraint to the the vehicle is in motion.
N00403000294
proper position. For the driver and front pas-  Driving without the head restraints in
Tilt the arm rest down for use as shown. senger, adjust the seatbacks to the upright place can cause you and your passengers
position before adjusting the head restraints. serious injury or death in an accident. To
The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to
Sit back against the seatback with your head reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
“Cup holder” on page 5-168.) always make sure the head restraints are
close to the head restraint.
installed and properly positioned when
the seat is occupied.
 Never place a cushion or similar device on
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
Adjustment of the head

restraint height
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,

adjust the head restraint height so that the
center of the restraint is at your eye level
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their eye level when seated

Head restraints
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
position.
CAUTION
 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
 To raise the restraint, pull it straight up. as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
 To lower the restraint, push down on it head restraint up to make sure that it is
locked in place and will not come out of the
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
seatback.
direction shown by the arrow. 4
 After adjusting the height, push down on
the restraint to make sure it is locked in
position.
WARNING
 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of an accident, the head
restraints must be properly installed and
positioned to proper height before vehicle
operation.
To install CAUTION
 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
fers according to the seat. Always use the
First check that the head restraint is facing in correct head restraint provided for the seat
the right direction as shown in the previous
To remove and do not install the head restraint in the
illustration, and then insert it into the seat- wrong direction.
back. Push the head restraint down while
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
shown by the arrows. Then pull the head locks into place.
restraint up and out of the seatback.

Seat belts
WARNING WARNING
 Always place the shoulder belt over your  Children 12 years old and under should
shoulder and across your chest. Never put always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
it behind you or under your arm. erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible serious injury or death in an accident,
especially due to a deploying front passen-
4 across your hips, not around your waist.
 Never modify or alter the seat belts in ger airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-
your vehicle. tems” on page 4-13 for additional
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious information.
injury or death during deployment of the  Any child who is too small to properly
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the wear a seat belt must be properly
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far restrained in an appropriate child
back as possible while maintaining a posi- restraint system. Children 12 years old
Seat belts tion that still enables you to fully apply the and under should be seated only in the
N00406000439 pedals, easily control the steering wheel, rear seat to reduce their risk of serious
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help and safely operate the vehicle. injury or death in an accident, especially
 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen- from the deployment of a front passenger
reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-
ger of serious injury or death from a airbag.
senger in the event of an accident. Always
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
use the provided seat belts. child safety seat and positioned in the rear
always wears the seat belt properly,
Carefully review the following information seat.
remains seated all the way back and
for proper seat belt usage. upright in their seat, and moves the seat as  In the event of an accident, all seat belt
far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- assemblies, including retractors and
WARNING tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on attachment hardware, should be inspected
page 4-21 for additional information. by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 To help reduce the risk of injury or death
 Never hold an infant or child in your arms dealer to determine whether replacement
in an accident, seat belts and child
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle is necessary.
restraint systems must always be used.
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page even when you are wearing your seat belt.
Never place any part of the seat belt you
4-13 for additional information.
are wearing around an infant or child.
Seat belt instructions
 Never use one seat belt for more than one N00406201526
person. Failure to follow these simple instructions
creates a risk of serious injury or death to All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
 Never carry more people in your vehicle
than there are seat belts.
your child in the event of an accident or uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
sudden stop. an emergency locking retractor.
 Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.

Seat belts
This system is designed to provide both com-
fort and safety. It permits full extension and
automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
retractor in the event of a sudden change in
the vehicle’s motion. 4
NOTE
 For instructions on installing a child restraint
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a
child restraint system using the seat belt” on 3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
page 4-18.
WARNING the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull
death in the event of an accident or sud-
1. Occupants should always sit back in their up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
seats with their backs against the upright the upright position while the vehicle is in locked securely in the buckle.
seatback. To reduce the risk of serious motion.
injury or death during deployment of the Seat belt performance during an accident
airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
as possible while maintaining a position are reclined. The more a seatback is
that still enables you to fully apply the reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
and safely operate the vehicle. The front
the body during an accident, there is
passenger seat should also be moved as increased risk you will slide under the belt
far back as possible. Refer to “Supple- and receive serious injury or death.
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag”
on page 4-21. Also refer to “To adjust the
2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the
seat forward or backward” on page 4-3.
webbing so that it easily pulls across your
body.

Seat belts
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled  With the exception of the seat belt for the  If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty,
out, pull it once with force and let it retract driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi- the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat
all the way. tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock- belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again. ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the mild soap or detergent solution.
seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-
4 tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
4. The lap part of the belt must always be
installation function (see page 4-18).
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull When the ALR function has been activated,
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
take up any slack in the lap belt. let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.
WARNING
 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
is worn as low as possible across the hips, Driver’s seat belt
not around the waist. Failure to follow this reminder/warning light and
instruction will increase the risk of serious
injury or death in the event of an accident. display
 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not N00418400300
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may Warning light

adversely affect seat belt performance.
5. To release the belt, press the button on the

buckle and allow the belt to retract.
Warning display type 1
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it
out and check for kinks or twists in the
webbing. Then make sure it remains
untwisted as it retracts.

Seat belts
Warning display type 2 When the key is turned to the “ON” position,
WARNING this indicator normally comes on and goes off
 In order to reduce the risk of serious
a few seconds later.
injury or death in an accident, always
The light comes on when a person sits on the
wear your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she front passenger seat but does not fasten the
is also seated and wearing a seat belt. seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
Children should additionally be restrained sequently fastened. 4
A tone and warning light are used to remind
in a secure child restraint system.
the driver to fasten the seat belt.
If the ignition switch is set to the “ON” posi- WARNING
tion without the driver’s seat belt being fas-  Do not install any accessory or sticker that
tened, a warning light will come on and a
NOTE makes the light difficult to see.
 At the same time, “FASTEN SEAT BELT”
tone will sound for approximately 6 seconds
will be displayed on the information screen
to remind you to fasten your seat belt. in the multi-information display.
If you then drive with the seat belt unfastened Adjustable seat belt shoulder
for longer than a minute from when the igni- anchor (front seats)
tion switch was turned on, the warning light
will come on and blink repeatedly and the
Front passenger seat belt warn- N00406300315
ing light To move the anchor down, press the lock

tone will sound intermittently.
knob (A) and slide the anchor down to the
The warning light and the tone will stop after N00418300165
desired position.
approximately 90 seconds. The front passenger seat belt warning light is To move the anchor up, slide the anchor up to
If you then repeatedly stop and start your located in the instrument panel. the desired position.
vehicle with the seat belt unfastened, the
warning light/display and tone will remind
you to fasten your seat belt every time the
vehicle starts moving. You will also be
reminded to fasten your seat belt in this way
when you remove your seat belt while driv-
ing. The warning light and the tone go off
when the seat belt is fastened.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

obtained. The extender may be used for either or killed in an accident if they do not wear
Anchor down Anchor up of the front seats. seat belts.
WARNING
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
4 death to pregnant women and unborn
children in an accident, pregnant women
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.
WARNING
 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so
that the shoulder belt is positioned across
WARNING Seat belt pre-tensioner and
the center of your shoulder without touch-
ing your neck. The shoulder belt should  The extender should only be used if the force limiter systems
not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail- existing belt is not long enough. Anyone N00417700609
ure to follow this instruction can adversely who can use the standard seat belt should The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
affect seat belt performance and increase not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
the risk of serious injury or death in the extender can adversely affect seat belt
system.
event of an accident. performance in an accident.
 Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when  When not required, the extender must be
the vehicle is not in motion. removed and stowed. Pre-tensioner system
 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
position after adjusting it.
The driver and front passenger seat belts are
Seat belt use during preg- equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
Seat belt extender nancy tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side

N00406800121
collision, the pre-tensioner system operates
N00406701215
simultaneously with the deployment of the
When your seat belt, even fully extended, is Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-
front airbags or side airbags and curtain air-
not long enough, a seat belt extender must be nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant
bags.
women are more likely to be seriously injured

Child restraint systems

The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within 4- Airbag control unit
the seat belt retractors (A). When activated, 5- Side impact sensors
WARNING
 The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness designed to work only once. After the seat
webbing and increase seat belt performance.
of the electronic parts of the system whenever belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
they will not work again. They must
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
promptly be replaced and the entire seat
“START” position. These include all of the
belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an 4
items listed above and all related wiring. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The pre-tensioner seat belt system will oper-
ate only when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” or “START” position.
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,
SRS warning
N00408700094
some smoke is released and a loud noise will
be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care This warning tells you if there is a problem
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it, involving the SRS airbags and the pre-ten-
as it may cause some temporary irritation to sioner seat belts. Refer to “SRS warning” on
people with respiratory problems. page 4-26.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes
the following components: The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a
moderate-to-severe frontal or side impact, Force limiter system
even if the seat belt is not being worn. The N00408900113
seat belt pre-tensioners may not activate in
In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
certain types of collisions, even though the
limiter system will help reduce the force
vehicle may appear to be severely damaged.
applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
Such non-activation does not mean some-
thing is wrong with the seat belt pre-tensioner
system, but rather that the collision forces Child restraint systems
were not severe enough or not of the type to N00407101766
activate the system. When transporting infants or small children
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
1- SRS warning light system must always be used. This is required
2- Front impact sensors by law in the U.S. and Canada.
3- Seat belt pre-tensioners


Child restraint systems specifically designed  Children older than 1 year of age and who
for infants and small children are offered by weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who
WARNING
 Any child who is too large to use a child
several manufacturers. Choose only a child are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must
restraint system should ride in the rear
restraint system with a label certifying that it be in a forward-facing restraint used only
seat and wear the lap and shoulder belt
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety in the rear seat. properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle  Children who weigh more than 40 pounds tioned over the shoulder and across the
4 Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches chest, not across their neck, and with the
Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac- (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,
turer’s statement of compliance on the box use a suitable child seat or a booster seat not across their stomach. If necessary, a
and child restraint system itself. in the rear seat until the vehicle’s booster seat should be used to help achieve
lap/shoulder belt fits them properly. a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster
The child restraint system should be appropri- seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use
ate for your child’s weight and height, and a booster seat that is certified as comply-
should properly fit your vehicle’s seat. WARNING ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
For detail information, refer to the instruction  All children must be seated in the rear Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-
seat, and properly restrained. tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
manual accompanying the child restraint sys-
Accident statistics show that children of tions.
tem.
all sizes and ages are safer when properly  Never hold an infant or child in your arms
restrained in the rear seat, rather than in or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,
Guidelines for child restraint the front seat. even when you are wearing your seat belt.
Never place any part of the seat belt you
system selection are wearing around an infant or child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions
All children should be properly restrained in creates a risk of serious injury or death to
a restraint device that offers the maximum your child in the event of an accident or
protection for their size and age. sudden stop.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial
requirements for child size and age that may
vary from the recommendations listed below.
 Children less than 1 year old and who

weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST
ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that
MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.

Airbag WARNING
 It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event 4
of an accident.
 When installing a child restraint system,
follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer and follow the directions in
this manual. Failure to do so can result in
WARNING WARNING serious injury or death to your child in an
 Your vehicle is also equipped with a front  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT accident or sudden stop.
passenger airbag. SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat  After installation, push and pull the child
Never put REAR-FACING CHILD whenever possible. If they must be used in restraint system back and forth, and side
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT the front passenger seat, move the seat to to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- the most rearward position and make sure the child restraint system is not installed
senger seat. This places the infant too the child stays in the child restraint sys- securely, it may cause injury to the child
close to the passenger airbag. During tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow or other occupants in the event of an acci-
deployment of the airbag, the infant can these instructions could result in serious dent or sudden stop.
be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing injury or death to the child.  When not in use, keep your child restraint
child restraint systems or infant restraint system secured with the seat belt, or
systems must only be used in the rear seat. remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.

NOTE Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations

 Before purchasing a child restraint system, tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418900129
try installing it in the rear seat to make sure Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the
there is a good fit. Because of the location of Anchors and Tethers for chil-
rear shelf, located behind the top of your rear
the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat dren) system seat. These are for securing a child restraint
cushion, it may be difficult to securely install
4 some manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
N00418800131
system tether strap to each of the 3 rear seat-
If the child restraint system can be pulled
ing positions in your vehicle.
forward or to either side easily on the seat
Lower anchor locations
cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint The outboard seating positions in the rear seat
system. of your vehicle are equipped with lower
Depending on the seating position in the anchors for attaching child restraint systems
vehicle and the child restraint system that compatible with the LATCH system.
you have, the child restraint system can be
attached using one of the following two
methods:
• To the lower anchorage in the rear seat
ONLY if the child restraint system is com-
patible with the LATCH system (See page
4-16).
• To the seat belt (See page 4-18).
NOTE
 The symbols on the seatback show the loca-
tion of the lower anchor points.


2. Push the anchor connectors (A) on the
Examples of child restraint sys- NOTE
child restraint system into the slits (B) in
tems compatible with the LATCH accordance with the instructions provided  In order to secure a child restraint system
system compatible with the LATCH system, use the
by the child restraint system manufac-
lower anchor points in the outboard positions
N00419000185 turer. Remember, the lower anchors (E) of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the
provided with your vehicle are designed vehicle’s seat belt. The vehicle’s seat belt,
to secure suitable child restraint systems however, MUST be used to secure a child 4
compatible with the LATCH system in the restraint system in the center position of the
rear seat only. rear seat.
WARNING
 If there is any foreign material in or
around the lower anchors, remove it
before installing the child restraint sys-
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
A- Rear-facing child restraint system from, not looped through or otherwise
B- Front-facing child restraint system interfering with, the child restraint sys-
C- Child restraint system lower anchor tem. If foreign matter is not removed
connectors and/or the seat belt interferes with the
D- Tether strap (These are only examples.) A- Connector D- Vehicle seat cush- child restraint system, the child restraint
ion system will not be secured properly, could
detach and move forward in the event of
B- Slit E- Lower anchor
Using the LATCH system sudden braking or an accident, and could
C- Vehicle seatback result in injury to the child or other vehi-
N00419100157
cle occupants.
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
remove the head restraint from the loca-
the seat where the child restraint system is
tion where you wish to install the child installed.
restraint system.
3. Open the cover for the tether anchor by
pulling it back with your hand as illus-
trated below (3).


4. Latch the tether strap hook (F) of the child
restraint system to the anchor (G) as illus-
Installing a child restraint sys- WARNING
trated below (4) and tighten the top tether tem using the seat belt (with  When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
strap so it is securely fastened. emergency/automatic locking retractor has been switched to the ALR
mechanism) child restraint installation function. The
ALR function will keep the child restraint
4 N00407301508
system tightly secured to the seat.
With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
Failure to convert the retractor to the
in all other seating positions can be converted ALR function may allow the child
from normal Emergency Locking Retractor restraint system to move forward during
(ELR) mode to Automatic Locking Retractor sudden braking or an accident, resulting
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull in serious injury or death to the child or
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the other occupants.
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
installation function. Always use the ALR
child restraint installation function when you Installation
5. Push and pull the child restraint system in install a child restraint system using the seat
belt. 1. Place the child restraint system on the seat
all directions to be sure it is firmly
where you wish to install it.
secured.
Children 12 years old and under should To help assure proper fitting of the child
always be restrained in the rear seat, when- restraint system, always remove the head
WARNING ever possible, although the front passenger restraint.
 Child restraint system tether anchors are seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode. 2. Route the seat belt through the child
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
restraint system according to the instruc-
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for tions provided by the child restraint sys-
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for tem manufacturer. Then insert the seat
attaching other items or equipment to the belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
vehicle. you hear a “click” when you insert the
latch plate into the buckle.


4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If 6. Open the cover from the tether anchor
the belt is in the ALR function, you will installation point by pulling it back with
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing your hand as illustrated below (6).
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR 7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the
function has not been activated and you child restraint system to the tether anchor
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4. (B) as illustrated below (7) and tighten the
5. After confirming that the belt is locked, top tether strap so it is securely fastened. 4
grab the shoulder part of the belt near the
buckle and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt allowing the
slack to feed into the retractor. Remember,
3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal- if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder restraint system will not be secure. It may
part of the belt all the way out of the help to put your weight on the child
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt restraint system and/or push on its seat-
feed back into the retractor. back while pulling up on the belt (see
illustration).
WARNING
 Child restraint system tether anchors are
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
If your child restraint system requires the use

of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in
accordance with the following procedures.

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

8. Before putting your child in the restraint, Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- The entire seat belt assembly should be
push and pull the restraint in all directions tions. replaced if the webbing shows any obvious
to be sure it is firmly secured. Do this cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec-
before each use. If the child restraint sys- WARNING tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or
tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1  Any child who is too small to properly
severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-
through 7. ditions indicate a weakening of the belt,
4 9. To remove a child restraint system from
wear a seat belt must be properly
restrained in an appropriate child which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-
the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode, restraint system, to reduce their risk of mance in an accident.
remove the child from the restraint. serious injury or death in an accident.
Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt  A child should never be left unattended in, WARNING
from the restraint and let the belt fully or unsupervised, around your vehicle.
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any
retract. When you leave the vehicle always take
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work
10. Reinstall the head restraint. the child out as well.
should be done by an authorized
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-6.  Children can die from heat stroke if left or
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
hot days. perform the work could reduce the effec-
Children who have outgrown  Keep your vehicle locked and the trunk lid tiveness of the belts and could result in a
child restraint systems closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle serious injury or death in an accident.
keys away from children.
N00407601644  Do not insert any foreign objects (pieces of
 Never allow children to play in the trunk plastic, paper clips, buttons, etc.) in the
Children who have outgrown a child restraint of your vehicle. buckle or retractor mechanism. In addi-
system should be seated in the rear seat and
tion, do not modify, remove, or install the
wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses seat belt. Otherwise, the seat belt may not
their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses
their stomach, a commercially available
Maintenance and inspection be able to provide adequate protection in a
collision or other situation.
booster seat must be used, to raise the child so of seat belts
that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder N00407001387
and the lap belt remains positioned low Regularly check your seat belt buckles and
across their hips. The booster seat should fit their release mechanisms for positive engage-
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying ment and release of the latch plate. Check the
compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle retractors for automatic locking when in the
Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Automatic Locking Retractor function.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

and provide increased overall body protection
WARNING in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-
WARNING
 The seat belt webbing may be cleaned • Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-
sions.
with mild soap or detergent solution. Do sengers properly positioned. This
not use an organic solvent. Allow the belts The SRS side airbags (if so equipped) and the reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,
to dry in the shade. Do not allow them to and reduces the risk of serious injuries or
curtain airbags (if so equipped) are also
retract until completely dry. Do not death when the airbags inflate.
attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts. The
designed to supplement the seat belts. The During sudden braking just before a col- 4
color may rub off and the webbing SRS side airbags provide the driver and front lision, an unrestrained or improperly
strength may be affected. passenger with protection against chest inju- restrained driver or passengers can move
ries by deploying the bag on the side forward into direct contact with, or
impacted in moderate to severe side impact within close proximity to, the airbag
Supplemental Restraint Sys- collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide when it begins to inflate.
tem (SRS) - airbag the driver and passengers on the front seat The beginning stage of airbag inflation is
and rear outboard seat with protection against the most forceful and can cause serious
N00407701805
head injuries by deploying a bag on the side injuries or death if the occupant comes in
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental contact with the airbag at this time.
impacted in moderate to severe side impact
Restraint System (SRS), which includes air- • Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in
collisions.
bags for the driver and passengers. rollovers, rear impact collisions, and in
lower-speed frontal collisions, because
The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use
The SRS front airbags are designed to supple- the airbags are not designed to inflate in
of the seat belts. For maximum protection in
ment the primary protection of the driver and those situations.
all types of accidents, seat belts must
front passenger seat belt systems by provid- • Seat belts reduce the risk of being
ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or
ing those occupants with protection against thrown from your vehicle in a collision or
rides in this vehicle (with infants and small rollover.
head and chest injuries in certain moderate to
children in an appropriate child restraint sys-  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-
severe frontal collisions.
tem in the rear seat, and older children buck- ERLY SEATED.
The SRS front airbags, together with sensors
led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint • A driver or front passenger sitting too
at the front of the vehicle and sensors
systems” on page 4-13. close to the steering wheel or instrument
attached to the front seats, form an advanced
panel during airbag deployment can be
airbag system.
seriously injured or killed.
WARNING
The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS
supplement the primary protection of the WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY
driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.
forward movement of the driver’s lower legs
WARNING
• Airbags inflate very quickly and with
great force. If the driver and front pas-
senger are not properly seated and
restrained, the airbag may not provide
the proper protection and can cause seri-
4 ous injuries or death when it inflates.
• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
injury or death due to a deploying
driver’s airbag, always properly wear
your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
as far back as possible, maintaining a
position that still allows the driver to WARNING WARNING
have good control of the steering wheel,  Infants and small children should never  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD
brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con- ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT
trols. instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-
• To reduce the risk to the front passenger held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too
of serious injury or death from a deploy- can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passenger airbag. During
ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the accident, especially when the airbags deployment of the airbag, the infant can
passenger always wears the seat belt inflate. Infants and children should be be seriously injured or killed.
properly, remains seated upright and all properly seated in the rear seat in an Rear-facing child restraint systems or
the way back in the seat, and positions appropriate child restraint system. Refer infant restraint systems must only be used
the seat as far back as possible. to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-13. in the rear seat.
• Seat all infants and children in the rear
seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
ate child restraint system.
 Airbags inflate very quickly and with
great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
the instrument panel, or lean your head or
chest close to the steering wheel or the
instrument panel.
 Do not put your feet or legs on or against
the instrument panel.


8- Passenger’s seat weight sensors
Airbag WARNING 9- Airbag control unit
 Older children should be seated in the
rear seat with their seat belt properly
worn, and with an appropriate booster
seat if needed.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems” on page 4-20. 4
How the Supplemental

Restraint System works
WARNING N00407801590
 FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT The SRS includes the following components:

10- Side airbag modules
SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
whenever possible. If they must be used in 11- Curtain airbag modules
the front passenger seat, move the seat to 12- Side impact sensors
the most rearward position and make sure
the child stays in the child restraint sys- The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
of the electronic parts of the system whenever
these instructions could result in serious
injury or death to the child.
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position. These include all of the
items listed above and all related wiring.
The airbags will operate only when the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” or “START” posi-
1- Driver’s airbag tion.
2- SRS warning light
3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator When the impact sensors detect a front or
4- Passenger’s front airbag side impact sufficient to deploy the airbag(s),
5- Front impact sensors the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.
6- Driver’s knee airbag
7- Driver’s seat position sensor


When airbags deploy, some smoke is released The EDR is designed to record data related to To read data recorded by an EDR, special
accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale short period of time, typically 30 seconds or cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita- less. vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
tion to people with respiratory problems. law enforcement, that have the special equip-
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record ment, can read the information if they have
4 After deployment, the airbags will quickly such data as: access to the vehicle or the EDR.
deflate, so quickly that some people may not
even realize the airbags inflated.  How various systems in your vehicle were
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver operating; Driver’s seat position sensor
from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,  Whether or not the driver and passenger N00417900164
and does not prevent people from leaving the safety belts were buckled/fastened; The driver’s seat position sensor is attached
vehicle.  How far (if at all) the driver was depress- to the seat rail and provides the airbag control
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft
and, position. The airbag control unit controls
CAUTION  How fast the vehicle was traveling. deployment of the driver’s front airbag in
 Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
force. In certain situations, contact with an accordance with the information it receives
These data can help provide a better under- from this sensor.
inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
standing of the circumstances in which If there is a problem involving the driver’s
sions, and bruises. Refer to “Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on page crashes and injuries occur. seat position sensor, the SRS warning in the
4-21. instrument panel will come on. Refer to “SRS
NOTE warning” on page 4-26.
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
Event Data Recording if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data WARNING
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
N00418600230
 If the SRS warning comes on, have the
ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
This vehicle is equipped with an event data vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorder (EDR). subishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.
recorded. However, other parties, such as
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in  Please observe the following instructions
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
certain crash or near crash-like situations, to ensure that the driver’s seat position
data with the type of personally identifying
sensor can operate correctly.
such as an airbag deployment or hitting a data routinely acquired during a crash inves-
tigation. • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
road obstacle, data that will assist in under-
and sit well back against the seatback.
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.

WARNING WARNING WARNING

• Do not recline the seatback more than  If any of the following conditions occur, • Do not place luggage or other objects on
necessary when driving. you should immediately have your vehicle the seat.
• Do not place metallic objects or luggage inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi • Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
under the front seat. Motors dealer as soon as possible: • Do not modify or replace the seat and
 If the vehicle is involved in a severe
impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by
• The SRS warning does not initially come
on when the ignition switch is turned to
seat belt.
• Do not place luggage or other objects
4
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as the “ON” or “START” position. under the seat.
soon as possible. • The SRS warning does not go out after • Do not place the floor mat on the seat
several seconds. rails.
• The SRS warning comes on while you are • Do not expose the sensors to liquids or
Passenger’s seat weight sensors driving. vapors.
N00418000247
 To ensure that the passenger’s seat weight • Do not subject the sensors to shock.
The passenger’s seat weight sensors are sensors can correctly sense the weight • Do not allow rear-seat occupants to push
attached to the seat rails and provide the air- being applied to the seat, observe the fol- the front passenger seat with their feet or
bag control unit with information regarding lowing instructions. Failure to follow these force the front passenger seat upward.
the weight on the front passenger seat. The instructions can adversely affect the per-
• Do not allow rear-seat occupants to grasp
airbag control unit controls deployment of the formance of the passenger’s airbag sys-
the front passenger’s seatback or put
tem.
passenger’s front airbag in accordance with their arms around it.
• Adjust the seat to the correct position,
the information it receives from this sensor. • When attaching a child restraint system
and sit well back against the seatback. in the rear seat, make sure it does not
The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.
in an impact when the weight on the seat is interfere with the front seat.
• Do not recline the seatback more than  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
sensed to be less than approximately 66 necessary.
pounds (30 kg). In this case, the passenger’s impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
• Never have more than one person (adult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
airbag off indicator will come on. or child) sitting on the seat. soon as possible.
Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on • Do not place anything between the seat
page 4-25. and the floor console.
If there is a problem involving the passen- • Do not hang anything on the front pas- Passenger’s airbag off indicator
ger’s seat weight sensors, the SRS warning in senger’s seatback. N00418100277
the instrument panel will come on. Refer to • Do not remove the head restraints. The passenger’s airbag off indicator is
“SRS warning” page 4-26. • When attaching a child restraint system, located in the instrument panel.
secure it firmly.


WARNING
 If any of the following conditions occur,
you should immediately have the airbag
system in your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible:
4 • The passenger’s airbag off indicator Warning display type 2
comes on when an adult is sitting on the
front passenger seat.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when the front passenger’s
The indicator normally comes on when the seat is not occupied.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when the ignition switch is
and goes out a few seconds later. The system checks itself every time the igni-
turned to the “ON” position.
In the following situations, the indicator will tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator
stay on to show that the passenger’s front air- The SRS warning light will come on for sev-
comes on and goes out repeatedly.
bag is not operational. eral seconds and then go out. This is normal
 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off and means the system is working properly.
 The passenger’s seat weight sensors sense If there is a problem involving one or more of
indicator difficult or impossible to see.
a weight of less than approximately 66 You must be able to see the passenger’s the SRS components, the warning light will
pounds (30 kg) on the front passenger airbag off indicator and verify the status come on and stay on. At the same time, the
seat. of the passenger’s airbag system. warning display will appear on the informa-
 The front passenger’s seat is not occupied. tion screen in the multi information display.
The SRS warning light/display is shared by
When the weight applied to the front passen-
SRS warning light/display the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
ger seat is sensed to be approximately 66 system.
N00408301619
pounds (30 kg) or greater, the indicator goes
Warning light
out to show that the passenger’s front airbag
is operational.


passenger seat is not occupied or when the
WARNING weight sensor in the front passenger seat
 If any of the following conditions occur,
senses a weight on the seat of less than
there may be a problem with the SRS air-
approximately 66 pounds (30 kg).
bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
they may not function properly in a colli-
sion or may suddenly activate without a
collision: 4
• Even when the ignition switch is in ON,
the SRS warning light does not come on
or it remains on.
• The SRS warning light and/or the warn-
ing display comes on while driving. Driver
The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
sioners are designed to help reduce the Front passenger
risk of serious injury or death in certain
collisions.
If either of the above conditions occurs,
immediately have your vehicle checked by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Driver’s knee airbag system
N00404500010
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

Driver’s and passenger’s front steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
airbag system designed to deploy at the same time as the
N00407900318 driver’s front airbag.
The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-
ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front

Deployment of front airbags

N00408001629
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
4 Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main rail).
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical structure is above a specific threshold level. The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the
condition is shown in the illustration to the The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful, and can cause serious injuries
left. (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a or death if you are too close to the deploying
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If airbag. Accordingly, it is important that you
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is always wear the available seat belt.
designed to deploy only in certain moderate below this threshold level, the front airbags
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
area between the arrows in the illustration to threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
the right. cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,


Some typical situations are shown in the
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
objects illustrations.
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY
when … Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
airbag do not protect the occupants in all
In certain types of front collisions, the front types of collisions, be sure to always wear
airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not your seat belts properly. 4
deploy, even if the deformation of the body
Collision where the vehicle slides under the rear
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body
body of a truck Rear end collision to your vehicle
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants.
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Side collision to your vehicle
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee Oblique frontal impact
airbag do not protect the occupant in all types
of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear
your seat belts properly.
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

The front airbags and driver’s
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where
they cannot provide protection to the occu-
pants.
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with an elevated median/island or WARNING
knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when curb  Do not attach anything to the steering
… wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate-
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
4 may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- compartment. Such items could strike and
Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
carriage impact). Some typical situations are injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
shown in the illustrations.
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee

airbag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,
and these unexpected impacts can move you Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the
out of position, it is important to always wear ground
your seat belts properly. When worn properly,
seat belts can help maintain your distance
from the airbags and driver’s knee airbag
when they begin to inflate. The beginning
stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful
and can cause serious injury or death if you
are close to the deploying airbag. WARNING
 Do not attach accessories to, or put them
in front of, the windshield. They could
restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
injure an occupant, when the airbag
inflates.

WARNING WARNING Side airbag system (if so equipped)

 Do not attach additional keys or accesso-  Do not place objects, such as packages or N00408101460
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the pets, between the airbags and the driver The side airbags (A) are contained in the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent or the front passenger. Such objects can
driver and front passenger seatbacks.
the driver’s knee airbag from inflating adversely affect airbag performance, or
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
normally or could be propelled to cause cause serious injury or death when the
serious injury if the airbag inflates. airbag deploys. the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even 4
 Do not attach accessories to the lower por-  Immediately after airbag inflation, some with no passenger in the front seat.
tion of the driver’s side instrument panel. parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
Such objects could prevent the driver’s not touch them. You could be burned.
knee airbag from inflating normally or  The airbag system is designed to work
could be propelled to cause serious injury only once. After the airbags deploy, they
if the airbag inflates. will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer.
A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-

cles with side airbags.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
semble or repair the SRS airbags.

Curtain airbag system (if so WARNING

equipped)  Do not attach a microphone (A) or any
other object around the part where the
N00419201230
curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the
The curtain airbags are contained in the front windshield, side door glass or front and
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the
4 and rear pillars and roof side rail. The curtain
curtain airbag inflate, the microphone or
airbag is designed to inflate only on the side
other object may be hurled with great
of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate
passenger in the front seat. correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back
of either front seat. Special care should be
taken with children.
 Do not place any objects near or around
the front of either front seatback. Such
objects can interfere with proper side air-
bag deployment and cause injury during
deployment of the side airbag.
WARNING  Do not place stickers, labels or additional
 The side airbag and curtain airbag can trim on the back of either front seat. They
cause serious injury or death to anyone can interfere with proper side airbag
too close to the airbag when it deploys. To deployment.
reduce the risk of injury from a deploying  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats
side airbag and curtain airbags, all occu- that have side airbags. Covers can inter-
pants must be properly restrained and fere with proper side airbag deployment
seated well back, upright, and in the mid- and adversely affect side airbag perfor-
dle of the seat. Do not lean against the mance.
door.

WARNING WARNING Deployment of side airbag and

 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or  Work done on or in the vicinity of the side curtain airbag
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur- airbag and curtain airbag system compo- N00408200507
tain airbag was activated, any such item nents should be done only by an autho-
could be propelled away with great force rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Improper
and could prevent the curtain airbag from work methods can cause accidental side The side airbag and curtain airbag
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly airbag and curtain airbag deployment, or ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY 4
on the coat hook (without using a hanger). render a side airbag and curtain airbag when …
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp inoperable. Either of these situations can
objects in the pockets of clothes that you result in serious injury or death. A side airbag and curtain airbag are designed
hang on the coat hook. to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint to severe side impact to the middle of the pas-
system in the front passenger seat. Rear-
senger compartment.
facing child restraint systems MUST
ONLY be used in the rear seat.
The typical situation is shown in the illustra-
 Front-facing child restraint systems
tion.
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.
If a front-facing child restraint system Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the
must be used in the front passenger seat, vehicle body’s side structure
move the seat as far back as possible, and
make sure that the child stays in the child
restraint system, properly restrained and
away from the door.
 Do not allow a child to lean against or sit
close to the passenger door, even if the
child is seated in a child restraint system.
The child’s head should also not lean
against or be close to the section of the
seatback where the side airbag and cur- The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if mary means of protection in an accident. The
the side airbag and curtain airbag
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side
deploys. Failure to follow all of these
airbags and curtain airbags are designed to
instructions could lead to serious injury or
death to the child. provide additional protection. Therefore, for


your safety and the safety of all occupants, be
sure to always wear your seat belts properly. Side impact in an area away from the passenger Oblique side impact
compartment
The side airbag and curtain airbag

MAY NOT DEPLOY when …
4
In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle colli-
if the deformation of the body seems to be sion with the side of vehicle Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
large, because the vehicle’s body structure is
designed to absorb the impact and to deform
in order to help protect the occupants. Some
typical situations where the side airbag and
curtain airbag may not deploy are shown in
the illustrations. Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
object
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags The side airbag and curtain airbag
do not protect the occupant in all types of side ARE NOT DESIGNED TO
collisions, be sure to always wear your seat DEPLOY when …
belts properly.
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not
designed to deploy in situations where they
cannot provide protection to the occupants.
Typical situations where the side airbags and
curtain airbags cannot provide protection are
shown in the illustrations below.
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags

do not protect the occupants in all types of
collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
belts properly.

Head-on collision SRS servicing WARNING

N00408500672  Do not modify your front seats, center pil-
lar or center console. Such modifications
WARNING can adversely affect SRS performance and
 Any maintenance performed on or near may lead to injury.
Also, if you discover any tear or open
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi seam in the seat fabric near the side air- 4
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else bag, have the seat inspected by an autho-
Rear end collision rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
to do any service, inspection, maintenance
or repair on any SRS components or wir-  If you find a crack in or damage to the
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should front pillar, rear pillar, or roof side rail
ever be handled, removed or disposed by where the curtain airbag is located, have
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi the SRS inspected by an authorized Mit-
Motors dealer. subishi Motors dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
dental airbag deployment or could make NOTE
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-  When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
tions could result in serious injury or to another person, we urge you to alert the
death. new owner that it is equipped with the SRS
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any and refer that owner to the applicable sec-
other SRS component or related vehicle tions in this owner’s manual.
part. For example, replacement of the  If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,
steering wheel, or modifications to the we urge you to first take it to an authorized
front bumper or body structure can Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can
adversely affect SRS performance and be made safe for disposal.
may lead to injury.
 If any of the following parts needs to be
 If your vehicle has received any damage, modified for use by a handicapped person,
you should have the SRS inspected by an the advanced airbag system will be greatly
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to affected. Please consult an authorized Mit-
make sure it is in proper working order. subishi Motors dealer for assistance.
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt


[For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico] [For vehicles sold in American
NOTE To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Samoa]
• Steering wheel
Caribbean, Inc. To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
• Instrument panel
call 1-787-251-8715 or write to: call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, Pacific Marketing, Inc.
To contact Mitsubishi Motors North Inc. P.O. Box 698
4 America, Inc. Customer Service Department PAGO PAGO,
call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: P.O. Box 192216 AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
Mitsubishi Motors North America, SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
Inc.
Customer Relations Department [For vehicles sold in Guam] Warning labels
P. O. Box 6400 To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc. N00408600341
Cypress, CA 90630-0064 call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS
P.O. Box 6066 are located in the vehicle as shown in the
[For vehicles sold in Canada]
TAMUNING illustration.
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
Canada, Inc. GUAM 96931
call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, [For vehicles sold in Saipan]
Inc. To contact Triple J Motors
Customer Relations Department call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
P.O. Box 41009 Triple J Motors
4141 Dixie Road P.O. Box 500487
Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9 SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

*- Located in the passenger’s side as well.

Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-3 Anti-lock braking system ..............................................................5-74

Keys .................................................................................................5-3 Active Stability Control (ASC) (if so equipped) ............................5-76
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-4 Power steering system ...................................................................5-79 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-7 Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-80
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter Tire pressure monitoring system ...................................................5-84
(F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) ..................................................5-12 Rear-view camera (if so equipped).................................................5-88
Door locks ......................................................................................5-34 Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-90
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-37 Multi-information display .............................................................5-91
“Child safety locks” for rear door ..................................................5-38 Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display
Trunk lid ........................................................................................5-39 list ........................................................................................... 5-112
Inside emergency trunk lid release ................................................5-40 Indicators .....................................................................................5-123
Theft-alarm system (if so equipped)...............................................5-41 Warning lights ..............................................................................5-124
Power windows ..............................................................................5-43 Information screen display ..........................................................5-125
Sunroof (if so equipped) .................................................................5-46 Combination headlights and dimmer switch ...............................5-127
Parking brake .................................................................................5-48 Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)...................................5-132
Steering wheel tilt lock lever .........................................................5-49 Turn signal lever ..........................................................................5-133
Inside day/night rearview mirror ...................................................5-50 Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................................5-133
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-51 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) .........................................5-134
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-52 Wiper and washer switch .............................................................5-134
Steering wheel lock ........................................................................5-54 Electric rear window defogger switch .........................................5-138
Starting and stopping the engine ....................................................5-55 Horn switch .................................................................................5-139
Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-57 Link System (if so equipped) .......................................................5-139
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-59 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped).....................................5-139
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped).................5-68 USB input terminal ......................................................................5-160
All-wheel driving operation ...........................................................5-70 Sun visors ....................................................................................5-163
Cautions on handling of all-wheel drive vehicles ..........................5-71 12 V power outlet ........................................................................5-163
Service brake .................................................................................5-72 Interior lights ...............................................................................5-164
Brake assist system ........................................................................5-73 Storage spaces ..............................................................................5-166
Features and controls
Cup holder ................................................................................... 5-168

Bottle holder ................................................................................ 5-168
5 Assist grip .................................................................................... 5-168
Coat hook (if so equipped) ........................................................... 5-169
Break-in recommendations
Break-in recommendations Keys

N00508701395 N00508801657
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
mance and economy of your vehicle by
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. 5
observing the following precautions during
the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and
the break-in period. keyless entry system
2- Key number plate
 Avoid revving the engine.
 Avoid rough driving such as fast starts,
sudden acceleration, prolonged high- Type 3
speed driving and sudden braking. These
would have a detrimental effect on the Two Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
engine and also cause increased fuel and ter (F.A.S.T.-key) and two emergency keys
oil consumption, which could result in 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer are provided.
malfunction of the engine components. Be 2- Key number plate Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency
particularly careful to avoid full accelera- key in a safe place together as a set of spare
tion while in low gear. keys.
 Do not overload the vehicle. Observe the Type 2
seating capacity (See “Cargo load precau-
tions” on page 6-10). Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
Features and controls 5-3

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
NOTE Electronic immobilizer

• Keep away from devices that produce mag-
netism, such as audio systems, computers
(Anti-theft starting system)
N00509101804
and televisions.
• Keep away from devices that emit strong [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
phones, wireless devices and high fre- key)]
5 quency equipment (including medical
devices).
For information on operations for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
• Do not leave the key where it may be “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
1- Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
exposed to high temperature or high humid- (F.A.S.T.-key)”: “Electronic immobilizer
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) ity.
(with electronic immobilizer and keyless (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 5-27.
 If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of
entry system function) the vehicle immediately contact an autho- [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
2- Emergency key rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
hand Advanced Security Transmitter
3- Key number plate If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
Motors dealer of the key number, they can
make a new key. The key number is stamped The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
NOTE on the key number plate. Keep the key num- nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
ber plate in a safe place separate from the theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
 The key is a precision electronic device with
a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe key itself. bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
the following in order to prevent damage.  No keys other than those registered in attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
• Do not leave where it may be exposed to advance can be used to start the engine. achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
top of the dashboard. starting system)” on page 5-4. All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
• Do not take the remote control transmitter
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)”: “Electronic
apart. electronics.
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject
page 5-27.
it to strong impacts.
• Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
• Keep away from magnetic objects such as
key holders.
5-4 Features and controls

NOTE NOTE WARNING

 Do not attach additional keys or accessories  Do not make any alterations or additions
to the ignition key. Such objects could pre- B to the immobilizer system. Alterations or
vent the driver’s knee airbag from inflating additions could cause failure of the immo-
normally. Refer to “Deployment of front air- bilizer.
bags” on page 4-28.
 In the following cases, the vehicle may not
be able to recognize the registered ID code
from the key. This means the engine will not
Replacement keys 5
start even when the key is turned to the
“START” position. Only keys that have been programmed to the
• When the key contacts a key ring or other C vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the
metallic or magnetic object (Type A) vehicle.
• When the key grip contacts metal of
another key (Type B) If you lose the key, you can order a key from
• When the key contacts or is close to other your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
immobilizer keys (including keys of other referring to the key number.
vehicles) (Type C) To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
 In cases like the above, move the offending vehicle keys must be changed.
object(s) away from the key and turn the key  The key may not operate properly when it is
Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
back to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. near an object or facility that emits strong
electromagnetic waves. your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
Then try to start the engine again. If the have your ID code changed.
engine does not start, contact an authorized  Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. with commercially available remote starting
systems. Use of commercially available Additional keys
A remote starting systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection. To add a key, you need to register the ID code
 A system failure is suspected when the igni- to the vehicle.
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi- Registering the ID code can be done by your
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
Motors dealer. sold in Canada).


For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- 3. Within 30 seconds of turning the first key
low the “Customer key programming” proce- to the “LOCK” position, insert the second
NOTE
 It is not possible to register a key if:
dure below. valid key into the ignition and turn it to
• the immobilizer display goes off during the
If you choose to have your authorized Mit- the “ON” position. About 10 seconds
procedure
subishi Motors dealer register the ID code, later, the immobilizer display will start to
• the immobilizer display does not come on
take your vehicle and all remaining keys to blink.
within 30 seconds after turning the ignition
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 4. When the immobilizer display starts switch to the “ON” position with a blank
blinking, turn the second valid key to the
5 “LOCK” position and remove it. Within
immobilizer key
NOTE  The procedure will be terminated automati-
 You are provided with two keys, but you
30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank cally if:
may register up to eight keys. immobilizer key into the ignition switch • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform from the moment when the first key is
this operation no more than 30 seconds turned to the “LOCK” position to the
after the immobilizer display starts blink- moment when the second key is turned to
Customer key programming ing. When registration of the ID code is the “ON” position
(Except for vehicles sold in complete, the immobilizer display will • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
Canada) come on for 30 seconds then go off. If an from the moment when the second key is
turned to the “LOCK” position to the
N00562201152 error occurs, the immobilizer display will
moment when the blank immobilizer key is
You can program new keys to the system if go off during the procedure.
turned to the “ON” position
you have two valid (already registered) keys  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
and blank (not registered) immobilizer key is necessary to register the key with both the
(specially cut for your vehicle at your Mit- electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
subishi Motors dealer) by doing the follow- tem.
ing: Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
5. If you wish to register another key, per- tomer remote control transmitter program-
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition form the process again from step 1. ming” on page 5-9.
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi-
tion for 5 seconds. NOTE General information
2. Turn the key to the “LOCK” position and  Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
remove the first key. play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis- Your electronic immobilizer operates on a
play screen may prevent you from seeing the radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
immobilizer display.
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
To unlock the doors
N00543301125
device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
standard(s). driver’s door only.
Operation is subject to the following two con- Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
ditions. button one more time to unlock all the doors.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
 This device may not cause harmful inter- The turn signal lights will also blink twice. 5
ference. The front side-marker and parking lights will
 This device must accept any interference also turn on for about 30 seconds.
received, including interference that may 1- LOCK ( ) button Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-131.
cause undesired operation. 2- UNLOCK ( ) button
3- Trunk ( ) button NOTE
CAUTION 4- PANIC button  The door unlock function can be set so that
 Changes or modifications not expressly all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button
5- Indicator light
approved by the manufacturer for compli- (2) is pressed once.
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on
ate the equipment. page 5-9.
To lock the doors
N00542700024
Keyless entry system (if so Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the To open the trunk lid
doors. N00543400015
equipped) The turn signal lights will also blink once. Press the trunk button (3) twice within about
N00509001975
5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened.
Press the remote control transmitter buttons NOTE The trunk lid must be closed manually after it
to lock or unlock the doors and to open the  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice has been opened.
trunk lid. quickly, the horn will sound once.
It can also help you signal for attention by
setting off the panic alarm.

Answerback function Number Number of Condition

N00543501084
of Condition chimes To lock To unlock
chimes
Setting of the horn, turn signal lights and Two chimes One flash No flash
buzzer of the keyless entry system answer- The horn will sound if the
Four Three chimes No flash Two flashes
back function can be changed as required. LOCK button is pressed twice
chimes
This is done with the key removed from the quickly. Four chimes Two flashes One flash
ignition switch. Five chimes No flash One flash
5 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- Six chimes Two flashes No flash
NOTE bination headlights and dimmer switch to Seven
 The answerback function does not operate No flash No flash
the “OFF” position. chimes
when the key is in the ignition switch or any
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
doors is opened.
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
during this time. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and bination headlights and dimmer switch to
Horn deactivation/reactivation LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of the “OFF” position.
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10
The horn answerback function can be set to seconds and press the LOCK button (1)
the following three conditions. during this time.
Each time the horn answerback function is Changing the setting of the turn
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
set, a chime will sound to tell you the condi- signal lights answerback function LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
tion of the answerback function. pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
The turn signal lights answerback function
Number can be set to the following seven conditions.
of Condition Each time the turn signal lights answerback
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation
chimes function is set, a chime will sound to tell you
the condition of the answerback function. The buzzer answerback function can be
One
The horn will not sound. turned ON or OFF as required.
chime
Number of Condition
Two
The horn will sound. chimes To lock To unlock
chimes
One chime One flash Two flashes


1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than
Setting of door unlock function 1 second.
Additional remote control
N00543601131
2. The headlights will blink on and off and transmitters
The door unlock function can be set to the the horn will sound intermittently for N00543900010
following two conditions. about 3 minutes. To add a remote control transmitter, you must
Each time the door unlock function is set, a 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on already have one registered remote control
chime will sound to tell you the condition of the remote control transmitter. transmitter.
the door unlock function. Registering the ID code can be done by your-
self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
5
Number of Replacement remote control
Condition dealer. For you to register the ID code your-
chimes transmitters self, follow the “Customer remote control
N00543800019
One chime All doors unlock transmitter programming” procedure below.
Only remote control transmitters pro- If you choose to have your authorized Mit-
Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only
grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can subishi Motors dealer register the ID code,
lock or unlock all doors. take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- If you lose the remote control transmitter, you
bination headlights and dimmer switch to can order a remote control transmitter from
the “OFF” position. your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by NOTE
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- referring to the key number.  You are provided with two remote control
transmitters, but you may register up to eight
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all
remote control transmitters.
during this time. the remote control transmitters except the one
4. Release in sequence the LOCK and for the lost key must be programmed again.
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of Take your vehicle and all the remaining
pressing the LOCK button in step 3. remote control transmitters to your authorized Customer remote control trans-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your ID mitter programming (Except
Using the panic alarm codes programmed again. for vehicles sold in Canada)
N00543700018 N00544001174
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- You can program new remote control trans-
ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten- mitters to the system if you have one valid
tion as follows: (already registered) remote control transmit-
ter by doing the following:


1. Have available all (current and new) 6. If no ID code of a remote control trans-
remote control transmitters you wish to mitter is registered within 60 seconds
NOTE
 If you lose your remote control transmitter,
register. after step 4, the registration mode is can-
please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
2. With a valid (already registered) remote celed and the normal mode returns.
Motors dealer for a replacement.
control transmitter, press the UNLOCK
 If you wish to obtain an additional remote
button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds. Then press
and hold the LOCK button (1).
NOTE control transmitter, please contact an autho-
 For verification purposes, try to lock and rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum
3. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
5 button, release the LOCK and UNLOCK
unlock the doors after the registration is of eight remote control transmitters can be
programmed for your vehicle.
completed.
buttons in sequence.  The indicator light (5) comes on each time a  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
At this time, ID codes for all remote con- button is pressed. is necessary to register the key with both the
trol transmitters except for the transmitter  The keyless entry system does not work if electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
used in steps 2 and 3 are erased and the tem.
the key is in the ignition switch.
answerback function (door is locked and Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
 The remote control transmitter can be used
theft starting system): Customer key pro-
unlocked) informs you that the registra- from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However,
gramming” on page 5-6.
tion mode has been activated. this distance may change if your vehicle is
4. Within 60 seconds after step 3, complete near a TV transmitting tower, a power sta-
the following ID code registration operation, or a radio station. General information
tion using the next remote control trans-  If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when N00546101111
mitter you wish to register within all doors are locked and no doors are opened
within about 30 seconds, the doors will auto-
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
4 seconds. frequency subject to Federal Communica-
matically re-lock.
i. Press both the LOCK and UNLOCK tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
 If the following conditions are observed after
buttons for 2 seconds. sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
pressing the buttons on the remote control
ii. Release both the LOCK and UNLOCK transmitter, the battery in the remote control (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
buttons for 1 second. transmitter may need to be replaced. complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and
iii. Press the UNLOCK button. • The doors cannot be locked or unlocked. Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
The answerback function informs you • The trunk lid cannot be opened. dard(s).
that the ID code registration of the • The panic alarm cannot be operated. Operation is subject to the following two con-
transmitter is completed. • The indicator light (5) is dim or does not ditions.
5. To register the ID codes of additional come on.
remote control transmitters, repeat step 4  This device may not cause harmful inter-
within 60 seconds after step 4. ference.


 This device must accept any interference 3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
received, including interference that may insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade
NOTE
 The Federal Communications Commission
cause undesired operation. screwdriver into the notch in the remote
(FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC)
control transmitter case and use it to open
number and the model number (radio certifi-
the case.
CAUTION cation) are indicated in the illustrated posi-
 Changes or modifications not expressly tion.
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- 5
ate the equipment.
Procedure for replacing the

remote control transmitter bat-
tery
N00544101159 4. Remove the old battery.
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static 5. Install a new battery with the +side (B)
electricity from your body by touching a NOTE up.
metal grounded object.  Be sure to perform the procedure with the
2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-
shi mark is not facing you when you open the + side
control transmitter.
remote control transmitter case, the buttons
may come out.
- side
Coin type
battery
CR1620
6. Close the remote control transmitter case

firmly.
7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

8. Check the keyless entry system to see that system” on page 5-30.
it works.
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the
NOTE driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for
 You may purchase a replacement battery at vehicle operations such as locking and
an electric appliance store. unlocking the doors, opening the trunk
 Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer lid, and starting the engine. When leaving
can replace the battery for you if you prefer. the vehicle, make sure you are carrying
5 the F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehi-
cle.
CAUTION
 When the remote control transmitter case is
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. WARNING
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-  Individuals who use implantable pace-
nents. makers or implantable cardioverter-defi- A- External transmitter
brillators should keep away from the
B- Internal transmitter
external and internal transmitters. The
Free-hand Advanced Secu- electromagnetic waves used in the
F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- implantable pacemakers and implantable WARNING
key) (if so equipped) cardioverter-defibrillators.  Individuals using other electrical medical
apparatuses besides implantable pace-
N00503100052
makers and implantable cardioverter-
The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- defibrillators should check with the manu-
facturer of the apparatus to confirm the
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors to be
effect of the electromagnetic waves used
locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromagnetic
opened, and the engine to be started simply waves may affect the operations of the
by carrying it. electro-medical apparatus.
The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
remote control transmitter of the keyless
entry system.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)”: “Keyless entry


The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.- when the ID codes of the vehicle and
key can be modified as stated below.
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key match.
Use the emergency key in such circum-
(Keyless entry operations are possible.)
stances.
For details, contact an authorized Mitsubi-
Refer to “To operate using the emergency
shi Motors dealer. key” on page 5-22.
• Enabling only the locking and unlocking  The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
of the doors and the opening of the trunk reception operations in its communication
lid
• Enabling only the starting of the engine
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
5
• Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 3 years, depending on the
usage conditions.
NOTE  Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic ing reception operations, the reception of
waves. strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate
In cases such as the following, operation the running down of the battery. Do not place NOTE
may be improper or unstable. near electrical appliances such as televisions  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
• The vehicle is near a facility that emits or computers. down or there are strong electromagnetic
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV waves or noise in the area, the operating
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio range could decrease or operations could
station or an airport Operating range of the become unstable.
• The key is carried together with other com- F.A.S.T.-key
munication devices such as cellular phones N00503201193
or radios, or electrical appliances such as
computers
When a person enters the operating range of Operating range for locking and
• The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.- unlocking the doors and for open-
metal object key and presses the driver’s or front passen- ing the trunk lid
• A keyless entry system is being used ger’s door lock/unlock switch or the trunk lid
nearby OPEN switch, verification of the ID code is
The operating range is within about 2.3 feet
• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down performed.
(70 cm) of the driver’s and front passenger’s
• The vehicle is in a location with strong The F.A.S.T.-key enables the doors to be
door lock/unlock switches, and the center of
electromagnetic waves or noise locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be
the trunk lid.
opened and the engine to be started only

Operating range for starting the To operate using the F.A.S.T.-

engine key
N00503300025
N00503401241
The operating range is the interior of the

vehicle. To lock the doors
5 While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the

driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch (A) within the operating range to lock
*: Front of the vehicle all the doors.
The turn signal lights will blink once and the
: Operating range
buzzer will sound once.
Also refer to “Door locks” and “Power door

NOTE locks” on pages 5-34 and 5-37 respectively.
 Only the F.A.S.T.-key that is detectable by
the doors and the trunk lid can lock and
*: Front of the vehicle
unlock the doors and open the trunk lid.
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.- : Operating range
key is too close to the windshield, door win-
dows or trunk lid.
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about NOTE
2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s or front pas-  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-
senger’s door lock/unlock switch and center ing range, it may not be possible to start the
of the trunk lid, the system may not operate engine if the key is in a storage space such as
if the key is close to the ground or in a high the glove compartment, on top of the instru-
position. ment panel, or in the door pocket or trunk
 If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating compartment.
range, even a person not carrying the  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is outside the vehi-
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors cle, it may be possible to start the engine if NOTE
or open the trunk lid by pressing the driver’s the key is too close to a door or door win-  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch dow. key does not operate.
or the trunk lid OPEN switch.

NOTE NOTE
• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger  If the doors are unlocked when all doors are
compartment locked and no doors are opened within about
• A door is open or ajar 30 seconds, the doors will automatically re-
• The ignition switch is in a position other lock.
than “LOCK”  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
• The emergency key is inserted into the igni- key does not operate.
tion switch • A door is open or ajar 5
 When the vehicle is locked, the theft-alarm • The ignition switch is in a position other
system prepares to enter the armed stage. than “LOCK”
Refer to “Theft-alarm system” for further • The emergency key is inserted into the igni-
details on page 5-41. tion switch
NOTE  The amount of time after unlocking until the
 Settings can be changed so that all doors are vehicle re-locks automatically can be
To unlock the doors unlocked automatically by one press of the adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
driver’s door lock/unlock switch (A). Motors dealer for details.
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on  Function settings can be modified as stated
operating range, you can unlock the doors by pages 5-9 and 5-31. below.
F.A.S.T-key operation. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. Press the front passenger’s door lock/unlock for details.
The turn signal lights will blink twice and the switch (A) to unlock all the doors. • Activating the operation confirmation func-
buzzer will sound twice. tion (blink of the turn signal lights) only
Also refer to “Door locks” and “Power door during locking, or only during unlocking.
locks” on pages 5-34 and 5-37 respectively. • Deactivating the operation confirmation
function (blink of the turn signal lights) and
Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch buzzer.
(A) to unlock only the driver’s door. • Modifying the number of blink in the oper-
Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s ation confirmation function (blink of the
turn signal lights).
door lock/unlock switch (A) one more time to
• Making the buzzer sound when the
unlock all the doors.
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
compartment when all the doors are closed.


used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-
To open the trunk lid ACC
lizer function)
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the ignition
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the switch can be turned to start the engine. Allows operation of electrical accessories
operating range to open the trunk lid, press with the engine off.
and hold down the OPEN switch (A) until the
trunk lid opens. ON
5 Also refer to “Trunk lid” on pages 5-39
respectively. The engine runs and all electrical accessories
can be used.
START
Engages the starter. Release the ignition

switch when the engine starts. The ignition
switch returns automatically to the “ON”
position.
LOCK (PUSH OFF)
The position where the steering wheel is NOTE

locked.  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
NOTE which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
 The F.A.S.T.-key does not operate when the LOCK (PUSH ON) one registered to the immobilizer computer.
trunk lid is open. (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
When the ID code verification inside the starting system)” on page 5-27.)
vehicle produces a match, the ignition switch
Ignition switch can be turned.
N00513500059
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys

other than those registered in advance can be

NOTE NOTE
 If the ignition switch is not turned to the  To turn the ignition switch from the “LOCK
“LOCK (PUSH OFF)” position when the (PUSH OFF)” position to the “ACC” posi-
engine is not running, the ID code cannot be tion, push the ignition switch again, turn the
verified and the engine will not start even if steering wheel in both directions and then
the ignition switch is turned to the “START” turn the ignition switch.
position. If this happens, fully return the  The ignition switch cannot be turned unless
ignition switch to the “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”
position, and start the engine again.
the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle.
Refer to “Operating range for starting the
5
engine” on page 5-14.
To turn from “LOCK (PUSH
OFF)” to “ACC” NOTE
N00513600021
To turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”
N00513701117  For vehicle with CVT the ignition switch
Turn slowly after pressing the ignition switch. cannot be turned to the “LOCK” position
For vehicles with manual transaxle unless the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
position.
Slowly turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position while pressing it.
CAUTION
For vehicles with continuously variable  If the engine is stopped while driving, the
transmission (CVT) power brake booster will stop functioning
and greater effort for braking will be
First, set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) required. Also, the power steering system
position, and then slowly turn the ignition will not function and it will require greater
switch to the “LOCK” position while press- effort to manually steer the vehicle.
ing it.  Do not leave the ignition switch in the “ON”
A- Steering wheel locked position for a long time when the engine is
B- Steering wheel lock released not running. Doing so could lead to a dead
battery.
 Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position when the engine is run-
ning. It will damage the starter motor.

Warning activation Type 1 Type 1

N00503500160
Someone may be carrying a
F.A.S.T.-key with a different Refer to “Key lock-in pre-
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key vention system” on page
through buzzers and displays on the informa- Type 2 Type 2
may not be within the oper- 5-19.
tion screen in the multi-information display ating range
in order to prevent mistaken operations or
vehicle theft.
5 When a warning operates, be sure to check Type 1 Type 1
the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is
also displayed if there is a problem in the Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-
Refer to “Door ajar preven-
F.A.S.T.-key. out monitoring system” on
Type 2 Type 2 tion system” on page 5-19.
If the following warning displays, contact an page 5-18.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
Refer to “Ignition switch

There is a problem in the The battery of the F.A.S.T.-
turn-off reminder system” on
Type 2 F.A.S.T.-key Type 2 key is run down Type 2
page 5-20.
If the following warning display, the display  A door cannot be locked even when the
F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring
goes off if corrective action is taken. driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch is pressed. system
 The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the N00559801141
vehicle cannot be verified Type1


Type 2
Key lock-in prevention system Door ajar prevention system
N00559900103 N00560000104
Type 1 Type 1
When the ignition switch is in a position

other than the “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”, if the 5
door(s) are opened, the F.A.S.T. - key is Type 2 Type 2
removed from the passenger compartment,
and then the door(s) are closed, the warning
display is displayed and the buzzer sounds 4
times as a warning since it’s impossible to
verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and
vehicle.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK
NOTE (PUSH OFF)” position, the F.A.S.T.-key is (PUSH OFF)” position, and someone tries to
left in the passenger compartment, all the lock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s or
 The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system
does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is doors are closed, and someone tries to lock front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch
removed through a window without opening the vehicle by pressing the driver’s or front while one of the doors is not fully closed, the
a door. This setting can be changed. passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the warning display is displayed and the buzzer
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer warning display is displayed and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and
for details. sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and the doors cannot be locked.
 The warning may display even if the the doors cannot be locked.
F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for If all the doors are manually locked and
starting the engine. The surrounding envi- closed while the ignition switch is in the
ronment or electromagnetic waves may “LOCK (PUSH OFF)” position and the
make it impossible to verify the ID codes of
F.A.S.T.-key is left in the car, the doors will
the F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle.
automatically unlock and a buzzer will sound
for about 3 seconds.

Ignition switch turn-off reminder Steering wheel lock CAUTION

system N00514300025  If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the
N00560100105 ignition switch to the “ACC” position to
Type 1 unlock the steering wheel.
NOTE
5  If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn
the ignition switch from “LOCK” to “ACC”
Type 2 position. Firmly turn the steering wheel to
the left or to the right as you turn the ignition
switch.
To lock Starting
N00514601386
When the ignition switch is in a position
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
other than “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”, all the
tion. Tips for starting
doors are closed, and someone tries to lock
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
the vehicle by pressing the driver’s or front  Do not operate the starter motor for longer
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the than 15 seconds as this could run the bat-
warning display is displayed and the buzzer To unlock tery down or damage the starter motor. If
sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and the engine does not start, turn the ignition
the doors cannot be locked. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” posi- switch back to the “LOCK” position, wait
tion while moving the steering wheel slightly. a few seconds, and then try again. Trying
repeatedly with the engine or starter
CAUTION motor still turning will damage the starter
 Carry the key with you when leaving the mechanism.
vehicle.


 If the engine will not start because the bat-
Starting the engine NOTE
tery is weak or discharged, refer to
 On vehicles with CVT, the starter will not
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni- operate unless the selector lever is in the “P”
for instructions.
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
 A longer warm up period will only con- For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”
sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up a system that automatically controls fuel
(PARK) position so that the wheels are
enough for driving when the bar graph of injection. There is no need to depress the
locked.
the engine coolant temperature display accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
starts to move. Refer to “Interrupt display The starter motor should not be run for more 5
screen (With ignition switch in the “ON” than 15 seconds at a time. 6. While pushing the ignition switch from
position)” on page 5-101. To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) to “LOCK”
between attempts to restart the engine. (PUSH ON), set the ignition switch to the
“ON” position and confirm that all warn-
WARNING 1. Make sure all occupants are properly ing lights and warning displays are oper-
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly seated with seat belts fastened. ating properly.
ventilated area any longer than is needed 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 7. Without pressing the accelerator pedal,
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car- 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down slowly turn the ignition switch to the
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and firmly with your right foot. “START” position to start the engine.
extremely poisonous, could build up and 4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way Release the ignition switch when the
cause serious injury or death.
down (manual transaxle). engine starts.
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 Do not push-start the vehicle.  For models equipped with a manual trans-  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
axle, the starter will not operate unless the up. These will disappear as the engine warms
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter- up.
at high speeds until the engine has had a
lock). This is a safety feature.
chance to warm up.
 Release the ignition switch as soon as the When the engine is hard to start
engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor 5. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
will be damaged. the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) After several attempts, you may experience
position. that the engine still does not start.
On vehicles with continuously variable
transmission (CVT) make sure the selec-
tor lever is in the “P” (PARK) position.

1. Make sure that all electric devices, such be used to lock and unlock the driver’s door
Startability of continuously variable
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear and to start the engine.
transmission (CVT) vehicles at extremely
window defogger, are turned off.
cold ambient temperature To use the emergency key (1), unlock the lock
2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi-
cles equipped with continuously variable When the ambient temperature is -4°F knob (2) and remove it from the F.A.S.T.-key
transmission (CVT) or the clutch pedal on (-20°C) or lower, it may not be possible to (3).
the vehicles equipped with manual trans- start from a standstill even with the selector
axle, press the accelerator pedal halfway
5 and hold it there, then crank the engine.
lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”
(REVERSE) position.
Release the accelerator pedal, immedi- This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
ately after the engine starts. axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
could be flooded with too much gasoline. the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
cles equipped with CVT or the clutch The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
pedal on the vehicles equipped with man- able to drive normally.
ual transaxle, push the accelerator pedal Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
all the way down and hold it there, then operation.
crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. NOTE
Return the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and release the accelerator pedal. To operate using the emergency  Only use the emergency key in an emer-
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key
Wait a few seconds, and then crank the key has run down, replace the battery as soon as
engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while N00514800020 possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.
depressing the brake pedal or the clutch  After using the emergency key, be sure to
pedal, but do not push the accelerator Emergency key reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.
pedal. Release the ignition key if the N00515200148
engine starts. If the engine fails to start, The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.- To lock or unlock the driver’s door with
repeat these procedures. If the engine still key. the emergency key
will not start, contact your local Mitsubi- When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of Turn the emergency key toward the front of
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the
your choice for assistance. the vehicle to lock the door. After checking
vehicle has run down, the emergency key can
that the door is locked, turn the emergency
key back to the center and remove it.
LOCK NOTE
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
The engine is off and the steering wheel is immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
locked. The emergency key can be inserted which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
and removed only when the ignition switch is one registered to the immobilizer computer.
in this position. (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
starting system)” on page 5-27.)
ACC 5
The electrical accessories can be used with To turn from “LOCK” to “ACC”
the engine off.
1- Insert or remove the emergency key 1. Remove the emergency key from the
2- Lock F.A.S.T.-key.
3- Unlock ON
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-22.
The engine will start only by using the emer- 2. While pushing the lock release buttons
gency key with the F.A.S.T.-key inserted. It is (A), remove the cover of the ignition
Ignition switch switch.
possible to use all electrical accessories with
N00529301264
only the emergency key.
To prevent vehicle theft, only the emergency
key with the pre-registered F.A.S.T.-key
START
inserted can start the engine. (Electronic
immobilizer function) Engages the starter. Release the emergency
key when the engine starts. The ignition
switch returns automatically to the “ON”
position.
3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition

switch, and slowly push and turn.

CAUTION
 Do not turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position while the vehicle is moving. This
will cause the steering wheel to lock, making
it impossible to operate the vehicle.
 If the engine is stopped while driving, the
power brake booster will stop functioning
5 and greater effort for braking will be
required. Also, the power steering system
will not function and it will require greater
effort to manually steer the vehicle.
 Do not leave the ignition switch in the “ON”
NOTE NOTE position for a long time when the engine is
 For vehicles with CVT, the emergency key not running. The battery will run down.
 When the ignition switch cannot be turned
cannot be removed unless the selector lever  Do not turn the ignition switch to the
from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
is set to the “P” (PARK) position. “START” position when the engine is run-
position, turn the ignition switch while turn-
ning. It will damage the starter motor.
ing the steering wheel in both directions.
2. Install the cover of the ignition switch.
3. Reinsert the emergency key into the Steering wheel lock
To turn from “ACC” to “LOCK” F.A.S.T.-key.
1. [For vehicles with manual transaxle]
Push the emergency key in at the “ACC” NOTE
position and keep it depressed until it is  Always install the cover of the ignition
turned to the “LOCK” position, and switch when not using the emergency key.
remove. Not doing so could cause damage if foreign
[For vehicles with continuously variable material such as dust gets into the keyhole of
the ignition switch.
transmission (CVT)]
First, set the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position, and then slowly turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
while pressing it.


 Do not operate the starter motor continu-
To lock
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
CAUTION
Turn the emergency key to the “LOCK” posi- could run the battery down or damage the
at high speeds until the engine has had a
tion. starter motor. If the engine does not start,
chance to warm up.
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. turn the emergency key back to the
 Release the emergency key as soon as the
“LOCK” position, wait a few seconds, engine starts. It will damage the starter
To unlock and then try again. Trying repeatedly with motor.
the engine or starter motor still turning
Turn the emergency key to the “ACC” posi- will damage the starter mechanism. Starting the engine 5
tion while moving the steering wheel slightly.  If the engine will not start because the bat- Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
tery is weak or discharged, refer to cally controlled fuel injection system. This is
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2 a system that automatically controls the fuel
CAUTION for instructions. injection. There is no need to depress the
 Remove the emergency key when leaving the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
 A longer warm up period will only con-
vehicle. The starter motor should not be run for more
sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
 If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the than 15 seconds at a time.
emergency key to the “ACC” position to enough for driving when the bar graph of
the engine coolant temperature display To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
unlock the steering wheel.
starts to move. Refer to “Interrupt display between attempts to restart the engine.
screen (With ignition switch in the “ON”
1. Make sure all occupants are properly
NOTE position)” on page 5-101.
seated with seat belts fastened.
 If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn WARNING 3. While pushing the lock release buttons
the emergency key from “LOCK” to “ACC”.
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly (A), remove the cover of the ignition
Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or
ventilated area any longer than is needed switch.
to the right as you turn the emergency key.
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
Starting extremely poisonous, could build up and
Tips for starting
CAUTION
 Do not push-start the vehicle.

NOTE
 On vehicles with continuously variable
transmission (CVT), the starter will not oper-
ate unless the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position or the selector lever is in
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position with the brake
pedal depressed.
5 For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”
(PARK) position so that the wheels are
locked.
4. Insert the emergency key into the ignition 6. Press and hold the brake pedal down 9. Turn the emergency key with the
switch. firmly with your right foot. F.A.S.T.-key to the “ON” position and
7. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way make certain that all warning lights and
down (manual transaxle). warning displays are functioning properly
before starting the engine.
NOTE 10. Turn the emergency key with the
 For models equipped with a manual trans- F.A.S.T.-key to the “START” position
axle, the starter will not operate unless the without pressing the accelerator pedal.
clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter- Release the emergency key with the
lock). This is a safety feature. F.A.S.T.-key when the engine starts.
11. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the emer-
8. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place gency key.
the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
5. Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the emergency position. NOTE
key. On vehicles with CVT, make sure the
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) posi- up. These will disappear as the engine warms
tion. up.


WARNING cles equipped with continuously variable
Startability of continuously variable
 Make sure to remove the F.A.S.T.-key transmission (CVT) vehicles at extremely
transmission (CVT) or the clutch pedal on
from the emergency key after the engine is cold ambient temperature
the vehicles equipped with manual trans-
started.
If not removed, the F.A.S.T.-key could fall axle, press the accelerator pedal halfway When the ambient temperature is -4 °F
to the floor, which may interfere with and hold it there, then crank the engine. (-20 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to
pedal operation. Release the accelerator pedal, immedi- start from a standstill even with the selector
ately after the engine starts.
Furthermore, the F.A.S.T.-key could pre-
vent the driver’s knee airbag from inflat- 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”
(REVERSE) position.
5
ing normally or could be propelled to could be flooded with too much gasoline. This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
cause serious injury if the airbag inflates. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
cles equipped with CVT or the clutch not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
pedal on the vehicles equipped with man- the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
NOTE ual transaxle, push the accelerator pedal and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
 When using the emergency key to start the all the way down and hold it there, then The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
engine, first remove the key from the key crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. able to drive normally.
holder. If the emergency key is attached to a Return the ignition switch to the “LOCK” Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
key holder (key ring), it may become impos-
position and release the accelerator pedal. operation.
sible to insert the keyless operation key into
Wait a few seconds, and then crank the
the emergency key, and it may prevent the
engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while
engine from being started.
depressing the brake pedal or the clutch Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
When the engine is hard to start pedal, but do not push the accelerator theft starting system)
pedal. Release the ignition key if the N00529600101
After several attempts, you may experience engine starts. If the engine fails to start, The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
that the engine still does not start. repeat these procedures. If the engine still nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
will not start, contact your local Mitsubi- theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear your choice for assistance. attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
window defogger, are turned off. achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi-
lizer system.


All of the keys provided with your new vehi- For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- 5-32.
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
electronics. ming” procedure below. For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
If you choose to have your authorized Mit- procedures below.
Replacement F.A.S.T.-key subishi Motors dealer register the ID code,
1. Remove the emergency key from the
take your vehicle and all remaining F.A.S.T.-
N00561000039 F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Emergency key”
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro- on page 5-22.
dealer.
5 grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be 2. While pushing the lock release buttons
used to start the vehicle. (A), remove the cover of the ignition
NOTE switch.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a  You are provided with two F.A.S.T.-keys, but
F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi you may register up to four F.A.S.T.-keys.
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi
the F.A.S.T.-keys except the one for the lost Motors dealer.
F.A.S.T. -key must be programmed again.
Take your vehicle and all the remaining
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
Motors dealer to have your ID codes pro- ming (Except for vehicles sold in
grammed again. Canada)
N00561200073
Additional F.A.S.T.-key You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the 3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition
N00561100030 system if you have two valid (already regis- switch.
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have tered) F.A.S.T.-keys, blank (not registered)
two registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to F.A.S.T.-key and emergency key (specially
register the ID code to the vehicle. cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi
Registering the ID code can be done by your Motors dealer).
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it To use the new F.A.S.T.-key, it is necessary to
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles register the key with both the electronic
sold in Canada). immobilizer and keyless entry system.
Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
tomer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page

6. Turn the emergency key with the
F.A.S.T.-key to the “LOCK” position.
NOTE
 Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
Within 30 seconds after doing so, remove
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
the F.A.S.T.-key from the emergency key,
play screen may prevent you from seeing the
insert the second valid F.A.S.T.-key into immobilizer display.
the emergency key and turn it to the “ON”  It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if:
position. About 10 seconds later, the • the immobilizer display goes off during the
immobilizer display will start to blink.
7. When the immobilizer display starts
procedure 5
• the immobilizer display does not come on
blinking, turn the second valid F.A.S.T.- within 30 seconds after turning the ignition
key to the “LOCK” position and remove switch to the “ON” position with a blank
4. Insert the first valid F.A.S.T.-key into the it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert F.A.S.T.-key
emergency key. a blank F.A.S.T.-key into the emergency  The procedure will be terminated automati-
key and turn it to the “ON” position. Per- cally if:
form this operation no more than 30 sec- • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
onds after the immobilizer display starts from the moment when the first F.A.S.T.-
blinking. When registration of the ID key is turned to the “LOCK” position to the
moment when the second F.A.S.T.-key is
code is complete, the immobilizer display
turned to the “ON” position
will come on for 3 seconds then go off. If
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
an error occurs, the immobilizer display
from the moment when the second
will go off during the procedure. F.A.S.T.-key is turned to the “LOCK” posi-
tion to the moment when the blank
F.A.S.T.-key is turned to the “ON” position
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it
5. Turn the emergency key with the is necessary to register the key with both the
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
F.A.S.T.-key to the “ON” position for 5
tem.
seconds. Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.- tomer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page
key, repeat the process from step 1. 5-32.

Keyless entry system NOTE Answerback function

N00515500141  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice N00544501065
Press the remote control transmitter buttons quickly, the horn will sound once. Setting of the horn, turn signal lights and
to lock or unlock the doors and to open the buzzer of the keyless entry system answer-
trunk lid. back function can be changed as required.
It can also help you signal for attention by To unlock the doors This is done with the key removed from the
setting off the panic alarm. N00544301135 ignition switch.
5 Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
driver’s door only. Within about 2 seconds, NOTE
press the UNLOCK button one more time to  The answerback function does not operate
unlock all the doors. when the key is in the ignition switch or any
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. door is opened.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
The front side-marker and parking lights will Horn deactivation/reactivation
also turn on for about 30 seconds.
Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-131. The horn answerback function can be set to
the following three conditions.
NOTE Each time the horn answerback function is
1- LOCK ( ) button  The door unlock function can be set so that set, a chime will sound to tell you the condi-
all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button tion of the answerback function.
2- UNLOCK ( ) button (2) is pressed once. Refer to “Setting of door
3- Trunk ( ) button unlock function” on page 5-31.
Number of
4- PANIC ( ) button Condition
chimes
5- Indicator light One chime The horn will not sound.
To open the trunk lid
N00544400012 Two chimes The horn will sound.
To lock the doors Press the trunk button (3) twice within about The horn will sound if the
N00544200036
5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened. Four chimes LOCK button is pressed
The trunk lid must be closed manually after it twice quickly.
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
has been opened.
doors.
The turn signal lights will also blink once.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” Condition Each time the door unlock function is set, a
Number of
position. If you started the engine with the chime will sound to tell you the condition of
chimes To lock To unlock
key, remove the key from the ignition the door unlock function.
switch. Five chimes No flash One flash
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- Six chimes Two flashes No flash Number of
Condition
bination headlights and dimmer switch to chimes
the “OFF” position. Seven
No flash No flash One chime All doors unlock
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- chimes
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only 5
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
during this time.
position. If you started the engine with the 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
key, remove the key from the ignition position. If you started the engine with the
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
switch. key, remove the key from the ignition
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- switch.
bination headlights and dimmer switch to 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
Changing the setting of the turn signal the “OFF” position. bination headlights and dimmer switch to
lights answerback function 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 the “OFF” position.
seconds and press the LOCK button (1) 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
The turn signal lights answerback function
during this time. onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
can be set to the following seven conditions.
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and during this time.
Each time the turn signal lights answerback LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
function is set, a chime will sound to tell you pressing the LOCK button in step 3. UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
the condition of the answerback function. pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation
Number of Condition
The buzzer answerback function can be Using the panic alarm
chimes To lock To unlock N00544700015
turned ON or OFF as required.
One chime One flash Two flashes If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten-
Two chimes One flash No flash Setting of door unlock function
tion as follows:
Three chimes No flash Two flashes N00544601112
Four chimes Two flashes One flash The door unlock function can be set to the 1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than
following two conditions. 1 second.


2. The headlights will blink on and off and code yourself, follow the “Customer 1. Remove the emergency key from the
the horn will sound intermittently for F.A.S.T.-key programming” procedure below. F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Emergency key”
about 3 minutes. If you choose to have your authorized Mit- on page 5-22.
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on subishi Motors dealer register the ID code, 2. While pushing the lock release buttons
the remote control transmitter. take your vehicle and all remaining F.A.S.T.- (A), remove the cover of the ignition
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors switch.
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys dealer.
5 N00561300029
Only a F.A.S.T.-key, which has been pro- NOTE

grammed into the vehicle’s electronics, can  You are provided with two F.A.S.T.-keys, but
lock and unlock all the doors, and start the you may register up to four F.A.S.T.-keys.
engine.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a
F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. ming (Except for vehicles sold in
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all Canada)
the F.A.S.T.-keys except the one for the lost N00561501116
F.A.S.T.-key must be programmed again. 3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the switch.
Take your vehicle and all the remaining system if you have two valid (already regis-
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi tered) F.A.S.T.-keys, blank (not registered)
Motors dealer to have your ID codes pro- F.A.S.T.-key and emergency key (specially
grammed again. cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi
Motors dealer).
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys To use the new F.A.S.T.-key, it is necessary to
N00561400020 register the key with both the electronic
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have immobilizer and keyless entry system.
two registered F.A.S.T.-keys. Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer: Cus-
Registering the ID code can be done by your tomer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it 5-28.
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles 4. Insert the valid F.A.S.T.-key into the
For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
sold in Canada). For you to register the ID emergency key.
procedures below.

10. Release in sequence the LOCK and
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
NOTE
• The doors cannot be locked or unlocked.
pressing the LOCK button in step 9, and
• The trunk lid cannot be opened.
the immobilizer display will blink on the
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
information screen in the multi-informa-
• The indicator light (5) is dim or does not
tion display. (Perform the following pro-
come on.
cedure within 60 seconds)
 If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact
11. Press the LOCK button twice with the
blank F.A.S.T.-key and the immobilizer
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a 5
replacement.
display will come on for 30 seconds on  If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-
the information screen in the multi-infor- key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
5. Turn the emergency key with F.A.S.T.- mation display. Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
key to the “ON” position. (Perform the 12. This completes the registration of the key can be programmed for your vehicle.
following procedure within 30 seconds) F.A.S.T.-key.  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
6. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the emer- is necessary to register the key with both the
gency key. electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
NOTE tem.
7. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the  The indicator light (5) comes on each time a Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and button is pressed. theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-
press the LOCK button during this time.  The keyless entry system does not work if key programming” on page 5-28.
8. Release in sequence the LOCK and the key is in the ignition switch.
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of  The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
pressing the LOCK button in step 7. (Per- feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
General information
N00561601074
form the following procedure within 30 may change if your vehicle is near a TV
seconds) transmitting tower, a power station, or a Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre-
9. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press radio station. quency subject to Federal Communications
the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds  If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold
and press the LOCK button during this all doors are locked and no doors are opened in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For
within about 30 seconds, the doors will auto- vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-
time.
matically re-lock.
plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry
 If the following conditions are observed after
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
pressing the buttons on the remote control
Operation is subject to the following two con-
transmitter, the battery in the remote control
transmitter may need to be replaced. ditions.

Door locks
 This device may not cause harmful inter- 5. Close the remote control transmitter case
ference. firmly.
 This device must accept any interference 6. Check the keyless entry system to see that
received, including interference that may it works.
cause undesired operation.
NOTE
CAUTION  You may purchase a replacement battery at
5  Changes or modifications not expressly an electric appliance store.
approved by the manufacturer for compli-  Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- can replace the battery for you if you prefer.
ate the equipment.
NOTE
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
CAUTION
Procedure for replacing the Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-  When the remote control transmitter case is
remote control transmitter battery shi mark is not facing you when you open the opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
N00561700081 remote control transmitter case, the transmit- out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static ter may come out. nents.
electricity from your body by touching a
metal grounded object.
3. Remove the old battery.
2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
4. Install a new battery with the +side (A)
Door locks
insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade N00509200491
up.
screwdriver into the notch in the remote
control transmitter case and use it to open + side WARNING
the case.  Make sure all doors are tightly closed and
locked while driving.
• Locked doors, in combination with the
- side use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk
of ejection in an accident.
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
especially small children, from opening
Coin type bat-
doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
tery CR2032

Door locks
WARNING To lock or unlock the front To lock or unlock the door from
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders doors with the key the inside
from gaining access to your vehicle when
you slow or come to a stop. Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to Move the lock knob to the lock position to
 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. lock the door. After checking that the door is lock the door.
Children who get into unlocked vehicles locked, turn the key back to the center and All doors should be kept locked while driv-
may not be able to get out. Children
remove it. ing.
trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
overcome by heat and suffer serious
5
injury or death due to heat stroke.
 Never leave children unattended inside a
vehicle. In addition to the risk of heat
stroke, children can activate switches and
controls, resulting in an injury or fatal
accident.
NOTE
 When locking or unlocking with the key,
only the driver’s door will be locked or
1- Insert or remove the key 1- Lock
unlocked.
To lock or unlock all doors, use the power 2- Lock 2- Unlock
door lock switches, the keyless entry system, 3- Unlock
the F.A.S.T-key or the remote control trans- The driver’s door can be unlocked without
mitter of the F.A.S.T.-key. using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-37,
door handle.
“Keyless entry system” on page 5-7 and
5-30, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key” on page 5-14. To lock the door without using
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
the driver’s door can be locked and unlocked
the key
using the emergency key.
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-22.
position.

Door locks
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi- Type 2
cle. Close the door.
Ignition switch return reminder
system
N00503800121
When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to

If the ignition switch is turned off and the
start the engine
5 driver’s door is opened with the key in the Type 1
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will
sound intermittently to remind you to remove
the key.
The warning display will be displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information
display.
Key reminder system Type 2
N00549600178
Lock out protection
N00517300039
When a key was used to start the
When you push the lock knob forward or lock
engine the door with the power door lock switch in
both of the following conditions, the lock
Type 1 If the driver’s door is opened while the igni-
knob will automatically return to the
unlocked position. tion switch is in a position other than
“LOCK” (PUSH OFF), the ignition switch
 The key is in the ignition switch or the return reminder buzzer will sound intermit-
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” tently to remind you to return the ignition
position. switch to the “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) position.
 Driver’s door or front passenger door is The warning display will be displayed on the
opened. information screen in the multi-information
display.

Power door locks
Power door locks To lock and unlock the doors Using the key
N00509300564
NOTE Using the power door lock switch

 When locking or unlocking with the key on
the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will
lock or unlock.
 Repeated continuous operation between lock 5
and unlock could activate the power door
locking systems built-in protection circuit
and prevent the system from operating. If
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-
ating the inside lock knob or the key.
1- Insert or remove the emergency key.
2- Lock
3- Unlock
1- Lock
2- Unlock Turn the key in the driver’s door lock once in
the unlocking direction, and the driver’s door
All of the doors can be locked or unlocked by will be unlocked.
pressing the power door lock switch on the
driver’s or the front passenger’s door.

“Child safety locks” for rear door

Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-
To unlock the doors gers, especially children, from opening the
N00517701144
rear door using the inside door handle.
You can select either the function to unlock A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-
the doors using the ignition switch position vided on each rear door.
or the function to unlock the doors using the When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
selector lever {continuously variable trans- rear door cannot be opened using the inside
mission (CVT)} position. door handle.
5 These functions are not activated when the To open the rear door when the child safety
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti- lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-
vate or deactivate these functions, please side door handle.
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors When the lever is in the release position (2),
dealer. the child safety lock is released and the rear
“Child safety locks” for rear door can be opened using the inside door han-
door dle.
Using the ignition switch position N00509400190
WARNING
All doors will unlock when the ignition  Always keep the doors tightly closed and
switch is turned to the “LOCK” position. locked when driving. An unlocked door
may be accidentally opened by a passen-
Using the selector lever {continu- ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
ously variable transmission is a greater risk of someone being thrown
(CVT)} position from the vehicle in an accident.
All doors will unlock when the selector lever

is moved to the “P” (PARK) position with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position. 1- To lock
2- To release

Trunk lid
“Keyless entry system” on page 5-7, 5-30 or
Trunk lid To open “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
N00509501198
(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-12.)
WARNING Operation from outside the vehicle The trunk lid will pop up to slightly. Lift it to
 It is dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open the trunk.
open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
enter the cabin. CO is an invisible, odor- Using the key (Vehicles with key cylin-
less gas that can cause unconsciousness der) Operation from inside the vehicle 5
and even death.
 Do not allow children to have access to the Insert the key and turn it clockwise.
trunk, either by climbing into the trunk
from outside or through the inside of the The trunk lid will pop up slightly. Lift it to
vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when open the trunk.
your vehicle is unattended. If trapped in
the trunk, it is possible to escape from the
trunk by using the inside emergency trunk
release lever. (See “Inside emergency
trunk lid release” on page 5-40.)
CAUTION
Pull the trunk lid release lever, located to the
 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from left of the driver’s seat, up to open the trunk.
the exhaust could lead to burns.
CAUTION
 Do not use the trunk lid release lever while
Using the remote control transmitter the vehicle is moving. If the trunk lid is
(Vehicles with keyless entry system or opened, objects in the trunk could fall onto
F.A.S.T.-key) the road and cause an accident.
Press the trunk button (Vehicles with keyless

entry system or F.A.S.T.-key) or OPEN
switch (Vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key). (See

Inside emergency trunk lid release
NOTE CAUTION Inside emergency trunk lid

 The trunk area light comes on when the trunk
lid is opened, and goes out when it is closed.
 Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-
firm that the trunk lid is closed. If the trunk
release
N00509800165
 The trunk area light remains illuminated for lid opens while driving the vehicle, objects
a certain period and then goes off automati- stored in the trunk could fall out onto the The emergency trunk lid release is designed
cally. Refer to “Interior light auto-cutout road. to provide a way to open the trunk lid from
function (dome light and other lights)” on inside the trunk. It was developed to help pre-
5 page 5-166.
NOTE
vent death and serious injuries to children
who might become locked inside a vehicle
 Gas struts (A) are installed in the locations trunk.
To close illustrated to support the trunk lid. Please
observe the following in order to prevent The emergency trunk lid release lever (see
Pull the trunk lid downward as illustrated. damage or faulty operation. illustration) is mounted on the trunk lid.
Gently slam the trunk lid from the outside so • Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts
that it is completely closed. Always ensure when closing the trunk lid. The lever glows in the dark after exposure to
the trunk lid is securely closed. • Do not attach any plastic material, tape, sunlight.
etc., to the gas struts.
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
• Do not hang any object on the gas struts.
You and your family should familiarize your-

CAUTION selves with the location and operation of the
 Be careful to prevent catching anyone’s fin- emergency trunk lid release lever. Children
gers when closing the trunk lid. should be taught not to play in or around
vehicles.
Theft-alarm system (if so equipped)

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
WARNING CAUTION position.
 Children should never be left unsuper-  When loading the trunk, place your things so
Also, if a key was used to start the engine,
vised in or around vehicles. that they will not touch the emergency trunk
remove the key from the ignition switch.
 Unsupervised children could lock them- lid release lever when you close the trunk.
Otherwise you could damage the lever and 2. Make sure that the trunk lid and engine
selves in an open vehicle or trunk.
make it unusable. hood are closed.
 People trapped inside a vehicle or trunk,
even if only for a short period of time, can 3. Lock all doors by either the remote con-
trol transmitter or the F.A.S.T.-key.
quickly die from suffocation or heat 5
stroke, especially on hot days. Interior
temperatures in vehicles can rise in min-
Theft-alarm system (if so Arm the system and leave
utes. equipped)
 Keep your vehicle doors locked and the N00510201300
trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep
your vehicle keys away from children. The theft-alarm system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
To open the trunk from the inside, move the
stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the sec-
lever (A) in the direction of the arrow on the
ond is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “dis-
lever. Push up on the trunk lid to open the
armed” stage. If triggered, the system
trunk and climb out.
provides both audible and visual alarm sig-
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)
nals.
on the audio panel flashes for confirma-
tion.
CAUTION
 Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm
system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm
to malfunction.
Armed stage
N00510301183
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the

system as described below.

Theft-alarm system (if so equipped)

4. The system has entered the armed stage  One of the doors is opened without using
after about 20 seconds, when the theft- the remote control transmitter or the
NOTE
 The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min-
alarm indicator (A) flashing becomes F.A.S.T.-key.
utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will
slower.  The engine hood or the trunk lid is
automatically shut off to save battery power.
The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to opened. The system will then be rearmed until the
flash while the system is in the armed proper disarming step is taken.
stage. Type of alarm  The alarm will resume if unauthorized
5 NOTE
actions are taken again, even if the alarm has
stopped.
When the alarm is activated:
 If the engine hood or the trunk lid is open,  While the alarm is operating, a warning is
the theft-alarm indicator (A) illuminates and displayed on the information screen in the
1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-
the system cannot enter the armed stage. The multi-information display.
utes.
system enters the armed stage about 20 sec-
onds after the engine hood or the trunk lid is After 3 minutes the headlights automati- Type 1
closed. cally shut off.
 The system will be disarmed if, while the 2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3
theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all minutes.
doors are unlocked by remote control trans-
mitter or the F.A.S.T.-key. Horn sounds!
 The system will be disarmed if, while the Headlights blink on and off!
theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the igni- Type 2
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
 The system will not be armed if a door or the
trunk lid or the engine hood is not com-
pletely closed. If this happens, rearm the sys-
tem as described above.
Alarm deactivation
Alarm stage
N00510401197
The alarm can be deactivated in the following
The alarm will be activated if any of the fol- ways.
lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and
the system is armed.

Power windows
 By using the remote control transmitter or
the F.A.S.T.-key to lock or unlock the
NOTE Power windows
 The amount of time after unlocking until the
door. N00510800367
vehicle relocks automatically can be
 Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
tion. Motors dealer for details.
 Once the system has been disarmed, it can-
Disarmed stage not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
N00510501169
ing procedure.
5
The system will be disarmed if the following
operation is performed. Testing the theft-alarm system
N00510601128
 The ignition switch is turned to the “ON” Use the following procedure to test the sys-
position. tem:
 All doors are unlocked by the remote con- 1- Open (down)
trol transmitter or the F.A.S.T.-key. 1. Lower the driver’s window. 2- Close (up)
2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed
Disarm...by remote control transmitter or
stage”.
F.A.S.T.-key
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
NOTE
 Never try to operate the main switch and sub
comes on and flashes for approximately
switch in different directions at the same
20 seconds.
time. This will freeze the window in posi-
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the tion.
driver’s side door by using the inside door  Operating the power windows repeatedly
lock knob and open the door. with the engine stopped will run down the
5. Check to be sure that the horn sounds battery. Use the window switches only while
intermittently and the headlights blink on the engine is running.
and off when a door is opened.
6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors
NOTE by the remote control transmitter or the WARNING
 If the UNLOCK button is pressed when all F.A.S.T.-key.  Before operating the power windows,
doors are closed and no door is opened
make sure that nothing can be trapped
within approximately 30 seconds, re-arming
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.
will automatically occur.

Power windows
WARNING Sub switch

 Never leave the vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch.
 Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
Main switch
5
The main switch located on the driver’s door
can be used to operate all door windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operat- 1- Driver’s door window switch
ing the corresponding switch. 2- Front passenger door window switch
Press the switch down to open the window, 3- Left rear door window switch
and pull up the switch to close it. 1- Close (up)
4- Right rear door window switch 2- Open (down)
If the driver’s door window switch is fully 5- Window lock switch
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door
window automatically opens/closes com- Each sub switch can be used for its own pas-
pletely. senger door window, unless the driver’s win-
If you want to stop the window movement, dow lock switch is activated.
operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
tion.
Timer function
The power windows can be run up or down

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
The door windows can be opened or closed
for a 30 second period after the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position. However, once the driver’s door or
the front passenger’s door is opened, the
power windows cannot be operated.

Power windows
Safety mechanism (Driver’s NOTE Lock switch

door window only)  The safety mechanism can be activated if the N00549000127
N00528800092
driving conditions or other circumstances When this switch is in the lock mode, the
cause the door window to be subjected to a main switch for passenger door window and
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the physical shock similar to that caused by the sub switch cannot be used to open or
door window is automatically lowered a little. trapped hand or head. close the door window, and the main switch
After the door window is lowered, pull up the  If the safety mechanism is activated 3 or will open or close only the driver’s door win-
switch again to close the door window. more times consecutively, the safety mecha-
nism is deactivated and normal closing of the
dow. To unlock the switch, press it again. 5
door window will be aborted.
WARNING Use the following method to return to normal
 If the safety mechanism is activated three operation.
or more times successively, the safety
1. If the door window is open, repeatedly
mechanism will be temporarily cancelled.
pull up the power window switch to fully
If a hand or head subsequently gets
close the door window.
trapped, a serious injury can result.
2. With fully closing the window, release
the switch and then pull up the switch
again for about 1 second.
CAUTION
 The safety mechanism is deactivated just
before the door window closes. This allows
the door window to close completely. There- 1- Lock
fore be especially careful that fingers are not 2- Unlock
trapped in the door window opening.
 The safety mechanism is deactivated while
the switch is pressed. Therefore be especially WARNING
careful that fingers are not trapped in the  Before driving with a child in the vehicle,
door window opening. be sure to lock the window switch to make
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or head it inoperative. Children tampering with
in order to activate the safety mechanism. the switch could easily trap their hands or
Your hand or head could be trapped and per- heads in the window.
sonal injury could result.

Sunroof (if so equipped)
What to do if you hear wind To close

buffeting when driving
N00551400014 Press the switch (3), the sunroof automati-
Wind buffeting can be described as the per- cally closes.
ception of pressure on the ears or a booming To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch.
or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
5 wind buffeting when driving with one or both To tilt up
rear door windows down or partially opened.
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
When the switch (2) is pressed, the rear edge
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
of sunroof raises for ventilation.
door windows open, open the front door win-
dows as well as the rear door windows to
minimize the condition.
To open To tilt down
Press the switch (1), the sunroof automati- Press the switch (3).
Sunroof (if so equipped) cally opens and the sunroof will stop several
N00511000656 centimeters this side of the full open position.
Press the switch (1) again, and the sunroof Timer function
WARNING will be fully open.
 Do not stick your head, hands or anything To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. The sunroof can be operated when the igni-
else in the sunroof opening. tion switch is in the “ON” position. The sun-
 Before operating the sunroof, make sure NOTE roof can be opened or closed for a 30 seconds
that nothing can be trapped (head, hands, period after the ignition switch is turned to
 The sunroof stops just before reaching the
fingers, etc.). the “ACC” or “LOCK”. However, once the
fully open position. If the vehicle is driven
 Never leave a child (or other person who is driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is
with the sunroof in this position, wind buf-
incapable of safely operating the sunroof opened, the sunroof cannot be operated until
feting is lower than with the sunroof fully
switch) alone in the vehicle.
open. the ignition switch is turned on again.
The sunroof can be opened and closed with

the ignition switch in the “ON” position.

Sunroof (if so equipped)
Safety mechanism CAUTION CAUTION

 The safety mechanism is deactivated while  Be careful that hands are not trapped when
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing the switch (2) is pressed. Therefore be espe- closing the sunshade.
cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
sunroof opening, the safety mechanism will
the sunroof opening.
cause the sunroof to re-open automatically.
The opened sunroof will become operational
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or head NOTE
in order to activate the safety mechanism.  Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos-
again after a few seconds.
If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or
Personal injury and malfunction of the sun-
roof could result.
ing the sunshade. 5
 When leaving the vehicle unattended, be
more times consecutively, normal closing of
sure to close the sunroof and without the
the sunroof will be aborted.
As an emergency measure, the sunroof can be Sunshade ignition key.
 Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro-
closed in small increments until it is com- zen closed (after snowfall or during extreme
The sunshade can be opened or closed manu-
pletely closed by repeatedly pressing the cold).
ally while the sunroof is closed.
switch (2).  Do not sit on or place heavy luggage on the
When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade
After performing the emergency measure, sunroof or roof opening edge.
will also open automatically.
consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Do not apply any force that may cause dam-
dealer. age to the sunroof.
 Release the switch when the sunroof has
reached a completely open or completely
NOTE closed position.
 The safety mechanism can be activated if the
 If the sunroof does not operate when the sun-
driving conditions or other circumstances
roof switch is operated, release the switch
cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi-
and check whether something is trapped by
cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped
the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, have the
hand or head.
sunroof checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
 Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if a ski
CAUTION carrier or a roof carrier is installed. Depend-
 The safety mechanism is deactivated just ing on the model of ski carrier or roof carrier,
before the sunroof closes. This allows the CAUTION the sunroof may contact the carrier when the
sunroof to close completely. Therefore be  Do not attempt to close the sunshade when sunroof is tilted up.
especially careful that fingers are not trapped the sunroof is opened.
in the sunroof opening.

Parking brake
NOTE To apply To release

 Be sure to close the sunroof completely
when washing the vehicle or when leaving
the vehicle.
 Do not put any wax on the weatherstrip
(black rubber) around the sunroof opening. If
it is waxed, the weatherstrip cannot maintain
5 a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
 After washing the vehicle or after rain be
sure to wipe off any water that is on the sun-
roof before operating it.
 Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the
engine turned off will run down the battery.
Operate the sunroof only while the engine is 1- Pull the lever up without pushing the 1- Pull the lever up slightly.
running. button at the end of hand grip. 2- Push and hold the button at the end of
When the parking brake is set and the the hand grip.
Parking brake ignition switch is in the “ON” position, 3- Push the lever downward.
N00511401439
the brake warning light in the instru-
ment cluster will come on. When parking on a hill, apply the parking
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
plete stop and fully engage the parking brake. Before driving, be sure to release the brake and turn the front wheels toward the
For vehicles with a manual transaxle, move parking brake. curb on a downhill grade, away from the curb
the gear shift lever to 1st (on a uphill) or “R” on an uphill grade.
(Reverse) (on a downhill) position.
For vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission (CVT), set the selector lever to
“P” (PARK) position.

Steering wheel tilt lock lever
CAUTION Steering wheel tilt lock lever WARNING

 Before driving, be sure that the parking N00511501270  When releasing the tilt lock lever {moving
brake is fully released and brake warning it to the position (2)}, be sure to hold the
To adjust the steering wheel height, release
light is off. steering wheel firmly. Otherwise, the
If you drive without the parking brake fully
the tilt lock lever while holding the steering steering wheel may slip down too sud-
released, the warning display will appear on wheel by hand, and raise or lower the steering denly.
the information screen in the multi-informa- wheel to the desired height.
After adjustment, securely lock the lever by
tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the pulling it upward. 5
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
Warning light
1- Locked
2- Released
WARNING
 After adjusting, make sure the lock lever
is secured in the locked (1) position.
 Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This can be danger-
ous.

Inside day/night rearview mirror
Inside day/night rearview To adjust the vertical mirror

mirror position
N00548601080
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after It is possible to move the mirror up and down
making any seat adjustments so as to have a to adjust its position.
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
5
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
view mirror while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv- To reduce the glare
ing.
Type 1
Type 1
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the

mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
To adjust the mirror position reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
Type 2 left/right to adjust its position.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the

view through the rear window.

Outside rearview mirrors
Type 2 Outside rearview mirrors

N00512201245
When the headlights of the vehicles behind Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after
you are very bright, the reflection factor of making any seat adjustments so you have a
the rearview mirror is automatically changed clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
to reduce the glare.
WARNING 5
 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
view mirrors while driving. This can be
dangerous.
1- Daytime position
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
2- Night position
ing.
 Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
The objects you see in the mirror will look
smaller and farther away than they
appear in a regular flat mirror.
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-
tance of vehicles following you when
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the changing lanes.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion, the reflection factor of the mirror is
automatically changed.
NOTE
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity
could result.

Ignition switch
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while
To adjust the mirror position NOTE the defogger is on.
 After adjusting, return the lever to the
The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted The heater will be turned off automatically in
“•”(off) position (C).
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or about 20 minutes.
“ACC” position.
Move the lever (A) to the same side as the To fold the mirror
mirror you wish to adjust.
5 The outside mirror can be folded in toward
the side window to prevent damage when
parking in tight locations.
Ignition switch
L- Left outside mirror adjustment N00512401713
R- Right outside mirror adjustment [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
For information on operations for vehicles
Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi- equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to
tion. “F.A.S.T.-key: Ignition switch” on page 5-16.
Heated mirror (if so equipped)
1- Up N00549300175 [Except for vehicles equipped with the
2- Down F.A.S.T.-key]
When the rear window defogger switch is
3- Right pressed with the engine running, the outside
4- Left rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted.
Current will flow through the heater element
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or
condensation.

Ignition switch
Manual transaxle CVT START NOTE

• The time until the power cuts out can be
Engages the starter. After the engine starts, changed to about 60 minutes.
release the key and it will return automati- • The ACC power auto-cutout function can
be deactivated.
cally to the “ON” position.
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
NOTE 5
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code To remove the key
which the transponder inside the key sends N00550901237
must match the one registered to the immobi- For vehicles with a manual transaxle, when
lizer computer. removing the key, push the key in at the
LOCK (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer” on page “ACC” position and keep it depressed until it
5-4.)
is turned to the “LOCK” position, and
The engine is off and the steering wheel is remove.
locked. The key can be inserted and removed
only when the switch is in this position. ACC power auto-cutout func-
Manual transaxle
tion
ACC N00539601097
After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the

Allows operation of electrical accessories ignition switch in the “ACC” position, the
with the engine off. function automatically cuts out the power for
the audio system and other electric devices
that can be operated with that position.
ON When the ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position, the power is supplied again
The engine runs and all accessories can be to those devices.
used. For vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission (CVT), when removing the key,
NOTE first set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

Steering wheel lock

position, and then turn the key to the
“LOCK” position and remove it.
CAUTION To lock
 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
a long time when the engine is not running. Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
CVT This will cause the battery to run down.
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
 Do not turn the key to the “START” position
when the engine is running. It will damage
the starter motor. To unlock
5
Steering wheel lock Turn the key to the “ACC” position while
N00512500195
moving the steering wheel slightly.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
For information on operations for vehicles CAUTION
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to  Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
“F.A.S.T.-key: Steering wheel lock” on page
NOTE
5-20.
 For vehicles with a CVT, the key cannot be NOTE
removed unless the selector lever is set to the [Except for vehicles equipped with the  If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
“P” (PARK) position, which allows the igni-
F.A.S.T.-key] lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn
tion switch to turn to the “LOCK” position.
the key from “LOCK” position to “ACC”
position. Firmly turn the steering wheel to
the left or to the right as you turn the key.
CAUTION
 Do not remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch while driving. The steering
wheel will lock, causing loss of control.
 If the engine is turned off while driving, the
power brake booster will stop functioning
and braking efficiency will be reduced. Also,
the power steering system will not function
and it will require greater effort to manually
steer the vehicle.

Starting and stopping the engine

There is usually no need to depress the accel-
Starting and stopping the WARNING erator pedal when starting the engine.
engine  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed
The starter should not be run for more than
N00542101096 15 seconds at a time.
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
Tips for starting extremely poisonous, could build up and between attempts to restart the engine.
 Do not operate the starter motor continu-
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this 1. Make sure all occupants are properly 5
could run the battery down or damage the CAUTION seated with seat belts fastened
starter motor. If the engine does not start, 2. Insert the ignition key.
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
turn the ignition switch back to the 3. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
“LOCK” position, wait a few seconds, at high speeds until the engine has had a
4. Press and hold the brake pedal down
and then try again. Trying repeatedly with chance to warm up. firmly with your right foot.
the engine or starter motor still turning  Release the ignition switch as soon as the 5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way
will damage the starter mechanism. engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor down (manual transaxle).
 If the engine will not start because the bat- will be damaged.
tery is weak or discharged, refer to NOTE
“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)  For models equipped with a manual trans-
for instructions. Starting the engine axle, the starter will not operate unless the
 The engine is warmed up enough for driv- N00542201198 clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter-
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant lock). This is a safety feature.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
temperature display starts to move. A lon- key.]
ger warm up period will only consume For information on operation for vehicles 6. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
extra fuel. equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
“F.A.S.T.-key: Starting the engine” on page position.
5-20. On vehicles with continuously variable
[Except for vehicles equipped with the transmission (CVT), make sure the selec-
F.A.S.T.-key.] tor lever is in the “P” (PARK) position.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
cally controlled fuel injection system, which
automatically controls the release of fuel.

Starting and stopping the engine

NOTE Startability of continuously vari-
cles equipped with continuously variable
 On vehicles with CVT, the starter will not
transmission (CVT) or the clutch pedal on able transmission (CVT) vehicles
operate unless the selector lever is in the “P” at extremely cold ambient temper-
the vehicles equipped with manual trans-
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” axle, press the accelerator pedal halfway ature
(PARK) position so that the wheels are and hold it there, then crank the engine.
locked. Release the accelerator pedal, immedi- When the ambient temperature is -4 °F
ately after the engine starts.
5 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
(-20 °C) or lower on vehicles with CVT, it
may not be possible to start from a standstill
7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- could be flooded with too much gasoline. even with the selector lever in the “D”
tion and make certain that all warning While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) position.
lights are functioning properly before cles equipped with CVT or the clutch This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
starting the engine. pedal on the vehicles equipped with man- axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” ual transaxle, push the accelerator pedal not indicate a problem. If it occurs, place the
position without pressing the accelerator all the way down and hold it there, then selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position and
pedal. Release the key when the engine crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
starts. Return the ignition switch to the “LOCK” The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
position and release the accelerator pedal. able to start normally.
NOTE Wait a few seconds, and then crank the Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start- engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while operation.
up. These will disappear as the engine warms depressing the brake pedal or the clutch
up. pedal, but do not push the accelerator
pedal. Release the ignition key if the Stopping the engine
engine starts. If the engine fails to start, N00542301102
When the engine is hard to start repeat these procedures. If the engine still 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
will not start, contact your local Mitsubi- 2. Fully engage the parking brake while
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of depressing the brake pedal.
After several attempts, you may experience 3. For vehicles with a manual transaxle, turn
that the engine still does not start. your choice for assistance.
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such tion to stop the engine, and then move the
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear gearshift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or
window defogger, are turned off. “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

For vehicles with continuously variable
transmission (CVT), place the selector
To start Proper shift points
N00537400049
lever in the “P” (PARK) position, and
then turn the ignition switch to the Press the clutch pedal all the way down and Always use care to change the gear with the
“LOCK” position to stop the engine. shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then vehicle speed matched to the engine speed.
gradually release the clutch pedal while Proper shifting will improve fuel economy
depressing the accelerator pedal. and prolong engine life.
Manual transaxle (if so
equipped) CAUTION CAUTION
5
N00512701165  Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse  Avoid downshifting that may cause the
while the vehicle is moving forward; doing tachometer pointer to enter the red zone.
The shift pattern below is shown on the gear- so will damage the transaxle. This puts the engine at risk of being dam-
shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way  Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal aged.
down while shifting gears. because this will cause premature clutch
wear or damage.
 Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position Changing gears while the vehi-
(illegal in many states).
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest,
cle is moving
N00548101030
because this can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks. Always use care to change the gear with the
vehicle speed matched to the engine speed.
Proper shifting will improve fuel economy
NOTE and prolong engine life.
 If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this
clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then may cause excessive engine speed (the
be easier. tachometer needle into the red zone) and
 To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the damage the engine.
NOTE gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position,
 During cold weather, shifting may be diffi- and then shift it into reverse.
cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed
up. This is normal and not harmful to the
transaxle.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

Upshift speeds To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake
NOTE Shift point life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend-
 The gearshift indicator shows recommended Acceleration Cruise ing a steep hill.
gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It
1st gear to 15 mph 15 mph Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug-
shows a “ ” when an upshift is recom- 2nd gear (24 km/h) (24 km/h) ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as
mended, and it shows a “ ” when a down- when turning a corner or when driving up a
2nd gear to 28 mph 19 mph
shift is recommended. steep hill.
3rd gear (45 km/h) (31 km/h)
5 3rd gear to 36 mph 33 mph
4th gear (58 km/h) (53 km/h) Recommended downshifting speed
4th gear to 45 mph 45 mph
5th gear (72 km/h) (72 km/h) Downshifting speed Shift point
Under 20 mph Shift down from cur-
At high altitude locations, upshift as listed (32 km/h) rent gear to 2nd gear.
below. 20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur-
48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear.
Shift point Upshift speeds
Upshifting
1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)
N00512900131
Driving precautions
For the best fuel economy and performance in 2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)
N00513100215
using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed 3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h) The table below shows the maximum recom-
below. 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h) mended driving speed for in each gear. Do
not drive near or at these speeds for pro-
At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle
longed periods of time.
speeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruise Downshifting
conditions (relatively steady speeds) will N00513000096
improve your fuel economy. Maximum possible driving speed
It is recommended that you downshift to a
lower gear when needed to maintain the
desired speed, according to the table. Shift Maximum possible driving
Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The points speed
engine may suffer damage. 1st gear 31 mph (50 km/h)

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

Shift Maximum possible driving DRIVING DOWNHILL Except for vehicles with manual
points speed gate
2nd gear 62 mph (100 km/h) According to the conditions, the transmission
3rd gear 87 mph (140 km/h) will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio The CVT has 2 forward selector positions
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may and 1 reverse selector position.
4th gear 121 mph (195 km/h)
help reduce your need to use the service The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
brake. cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest.
(DRIVE) or “L” (LOW) position, depending 5
This can result in premature wear of the
on the speed of the vehicle and the position of
transaxle shift forks. Selector lever operation
the accelerator pedal.
N00513800384
The selector lever has 5 positions.
Continuously variable As an additional safety precaution, models
equipped with a continuously variable trans-
transmission (CVT) (if so mission have a shift-lock device that holds
equipped) the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.
N00513200229 To move the selector lever from the “P”
(PARK) position to another position, follow
The CVT will automatically and continuously the steps below.
change its gear ratio depending on road and
driving conditions. This helps achieve 1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency. 2. Move the selector lever to the desired
Also you can manually shift up and shift position.
down the transmission. Refer to “Sports
mode” on page 5-64.
NOTE
 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
DRIVING UPHILL (PARK) to another position if the ignition
switch is at the “LOCK” or “ACC” position,
or the key has been removed, or if the brake
The transmission prevents unnecessary
pedal is not pressed and held down.
upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is
released and ensures smooth driving.

NOTE
 To ensure proper transmission operation,
stop at each detent position when shifting.
After shifting, check the position in the
multi-information display.
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
5 selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.
 For a shift indicated by in the illustration,
depress the brake pedal before moving the
With the brake pedal depressed, selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake NOTE
set the selector lever in the gate to  In the main gate, the selector lever has 4
pedal, the selector lever will be immovable.
operate. positions.
Set the selector lever in the gate to  For information on manual gate operation,
operate. Vehicles with manual gate please refer to “Sports mode” on page 5-64.
WARNING The CVT has 2 forward selector positions

and 1 reverse selector position.
 Always depress the brake pedal when
shifting the selector lever into a selector
The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
position from the “P” (PARK) or “N” cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
(NEUTRAL) position. (DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
When beginning to drive, do not shift the the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or pedal.
“N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress- The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main
ing the accelerator pedal. Doing so is dan- gate (B) and the manual gate (C).
gerous because the vehicle will “jump”
forward or backward.
With the brake pedal depressed,
set the selector lever in the gate to
operate.


Set the selector lever in the gate to When the selector lever cannot be
operate. shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion
WARNING N00563101060
 Always depress the brake pedal when When the selector lever cannot be shifted
shifting the selector lever into a selector from the “P” (PARK) position to another
position from the “P” (PARK) or “N” position while the brake pedal is pressed and
(NEUTRAL) position.
held down with the ignition switch at the
5
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or
“ON” position, the battery may be flat or the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress- shift-lock mechanism may be malfunction-
ing the accelerator pedal. Doing so is dan- ing. 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
gerous because the vehicle will “jump” Immediately have your vehicle checked by an foot.
forward or backward. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”
repair facility of your choice. position.
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
NOTE selector lever as follows. NOTE
 To ensure proper transmission operation,  For vehicles with the Free-hand Advanced
stop at each detent position when shifting. 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), turn the
After shifting, check the position in the applied. ignition switch to the “ACC” position with
multi-information display. 2. Stop the engine if it is running. the emergency key if the vehicle battery is
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, 3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its flat.
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
selector lever from being moved from the gently as shown to remove the cover.
“P” (PARK) position. 6. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
 For a shift indicated by in the illustration,
release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
depress the brake pedal before moving the the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
selector lever. If you attempt to move the pressing the screwdriver down.
selector lever before depressing the brake
pedal, the selector lever will be immovable.


2. Keep depressing the brake pedal and then
When the selector lever position
place the selector lever in the “D”
display blinks (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) position. If
N00585900029
the selector lever position display stops
blinking, the warm up is completed and
WARNING
the transmission will function normally.
 To avoid unintended vehicle movement,
keep brake pedal applied with your right
3. If the display is still blinking, repeat steps
1 and 2 above.
5 foot and do not depress the accelerator
pedal, while the selector lever position dis-
play is blinking. NOTE
 While the selector lever position display is
If the ambient temperature is low, the selector blinking, a buzzer will sound intermittently.
Selector lever position display lever position display on the multi-informa-
N00513900402
tion display may blink when the selector
When the ignition switch is turned to the
lever is placed in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” Warning display
(REVERSE) position immediately after the
“ON” position, the selector lever position is N00514000194
engine has been started. This indicates that
shown on the multi-information display. Type 1
the transmission requires warming up. While
the display is blinking, the vehicle will not
move, because the transmission keeps disen- or
gaging until the warm up is completed even if
Type 2
the selector lever is placed in the “D” or “R”
position.
or
When the selector lever position display is
blinking, perform the following procedure: When the warning display or the warn-
ing display appears on the information
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right screen in the multi-information display while
foot and place the selector lever in the you are driving, there could be a malfunction
“N” (NEUTRAL) position for several in the CVT.
seconds.

CAUTION CAUTION “N” NEUTRAL

 If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while [When warning display is showing]
driving, the warning display or the It may be that there is something unusual At this position, the transmission is disen-
warning display will appear on the informa- happening in the CVT, causing a safety gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
tion screen in the multi-information display. device to activate. Have your vehicle a manual transaxle and should be used when
In this case, immediately park your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi the vehicle is not moving for an extended
in a safe place and follow these procedures: Motors dealer or a repair facility of your length of time during driving, such as in a
choice as soon as possible. traffic jam. 5
[When warning display is showing]
The continuously variable transmission Selector lever positions WARNING
(CVT) fluid is overheating. The engine con-
N00514200372  Never move the selector lever to the “N”
trol may activate to lower the CVT fluid tem-
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since
perature, causing the engine revolutions and
vehicle speed to decrease. In this case, take “P” PARK you could accidentally slip it into the “P”
(PARK) or “R”(REVERSE) position,
one of the following procedures:
damaging the transmission.
• Slow down your vehicle. This position locks the transmission to pre-  To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can stopped on a slope, the engine should be
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position, be started from the “PARK” position. started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
and open the engine hood with the engine
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.
running to allow the engine to cool down.
“R” REVERSE  To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
After a while, confirm that the warning on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
display is no longer showing. It is safe to “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
continue driving if the display is no longer Move the lever to this position only after the ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
showing. If the warning display remains or vehicle has come to a complete stop. tion.
flashes frequently, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
CAUTION
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” “D” DRIVE
choice.
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” This position is used for most city and high-
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while way driving. The transmission will automati-
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission
cally and continuously change its gear ratio
may be damaged.
depending on road and driving conditions.


the selector lever from the “D” (DRIVE)
CAUTION position into the manual gate (1). To return to
SHIFT UP SHIFT
 To prevent transmission damage, never shift DOWN
“D” (DRIVE) operation, push the selector
into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
lever back into the main gate (2).
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
motion. In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim-
SHIFT
ply by operating the selector lever or spor-
DOWN
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter.
Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode
5 “L” LOW (except for vehicles with
allows shifting with the accelerator pedal
SHIFT
manual gate) UP
depressed.
This position is for driving up very steep hills + (SHIFT UP)

and for engine braking at low speeds when
NOTE Transmission shifts up once by each opera-
 For vehicles equipped with the sportronic tion.
driving down steep hills.
steering wheel paddle shifter, sports mode
can be operated even when the selector lever - (SHIFT DOWN)
WARNING is in the main gate (2).
Transmission shifts down once by each
 This position can be used for maximum To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation, pull the
sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter on
operation.
engine braking.
Be very careful not to shift into “L” the +(UP) side for longer than 2 seconds, or
(LOW) suddenly. Sudden engine braking park the vehicle to change the selector lever
may cause the tires to skid. position indicator to “D” (DRIVE) and CAUTION
Select this position according to the road return to “D” (DRIVE) operation.  In sports mode, the driver must execute
conditions and vehicle speed. upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
road conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
 Repeated continuous operation of the selec-
Sports mode (if so equipped) tor lever or the sportronic steering wheel
N00514401469 paddle shifter will continuously switch shift
position.
 On vehicles with a sportronic steering wheel
Vehicles with manual gate paddle shifter, shift ranges may not change
when the lateral paddle shifters are operated
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in at the same time.
motion, sports mode is selected by pushing
NOTE Except for vehicles with manual

 The upward shift may be made automatically gate
in sports mode when the engine revolutions SHIFT DOWN
rises and approaches the tachometer’s red
While driving with the selector lever in the
zone (the red-colored part of the tachometer
dial).
“D” (DRIVE), sports mode can be selected
 Shift ranges can only be selected in a for-
by pulling one of the sportronic steering SHIFT UP
wheel shifters toward you.
ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim- 5
the “R” or “P” position. ply by operating the sportronic steering wheel
 To maintain good running performance, the paddle shifter.
transmission may refuse to perform an Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode + (SHIFT UP)
upshift when the selector lever or sportronic allows shifting with the accelerator pedal Transmission shifts up once by each opera-
steering wheel paddle shifter is moved to the depressed. tion.
“+(SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle
speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the - (SHIFT DOWN)
engine, the transmission may refuse to per- NOTE Transmission shifts down once by each
form a downshift when the shift lever or  To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation, pull the operation.
sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter is sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter on
moved to the “- (SHIFT DOWN)” position at the +(UP) side for longer than 2 seconds, or
certain vehicle speeds. When this happens, a park the vehicle to change the selector lever
buzzer sounds to indicate that a downshift is position indicator to “D” (DRIVE) and
CAUTION
not going to take place. return to “D” (DRIVE) operation.  In sports mode, the driver must execute
 When the sportronic steering wheel paddle upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
 Move the selector lever gently between the
shifter is operated with the selector lever in road conditions, taking care to keep the
manual and main gates and between posi-
the “L” (LOW) position, gear is not shifted engine speed below the red zone.
tions in the manual gate. And do not operate
sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter vio- because the selectable shift range is limited.  Repeated continuous operation of the spor-
lently. Excessive force could damage the tronic steering wheel paddle shifter will con-
selector lever or sportronic steering wheel tinuously switch shift position.
paddle shifter.  Shift ranges may not change when the lateral
paddle shifters are operated at the same time.

NOTE Sports mode display Operation of the CVT

 The upward shift may be made automatically N00538800154 N00514500287
in sports mode when the engine revolutions In sports mode, the currently selected shift
rises and approaches the tachometer’s red range is displayed on the information screen CAUTION
zone (the red-colored part of the tachometer in the multi-information display.  Before selecting a position with the engine
dial). running and the vehicle stationary, fully
 Shift ranges can only be selected in a for- depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
5 ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
cle from creeping.
Do not release the brakes until you are ready
the “R” or “P” position. to drive away. The vehicle will begin to
 To maintain good running performance, the move as soon as the CVT is engaged, espe-
transmission may refuse to perform an cially when the engine speed is high (fast
upshift when the sportronic steering wheel idle or air conditioning on).
paddle shifter is moved to the “+(SHIFT  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot.
UP)” position at certain vehicle speeds. Using the left foot could cause driver move-
Also, to prevent over-revving of the engine, ment delay in case of an emergency.
the transmission may refuse to perform a  To prevent sudden acceleration, never run
downshift when the sportronic steering the engine at high rpms when shifting from
wheel paddle shifter is moved to the “- the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
(SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain vehicle NOTE tion.
speeds. When this happens, a buzzer sounds  While driving in sports mode, the sports  Operating the accelerator pedal while the
to indicate that a downshift is not going to mode display may change to show “D” and other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
take place. shifting in sports mode may no longer be affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
 Do not operate sportronic steering wheel possible. mature wear of brake pads.
paddle shifter violently. Excessive force This indicates that controls to drive in the  Use the selector lever in the correct shift
could damage the sportronic steering wheel “D” position are operating normally in order position in accordance with driving condi-
paddle shifter. to lower the temperature of the continuously tions.
variable transmission (CVT) fluid; it does Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
not indicate a malfunction. Once the temper- ing shift position { “D” (DRIVE), “L”
ature of the continuously variable transmis- (LOW) or sports mode} or coast forward in
sion (CVT) fluid drops, shifting in the sports the “R” (REVERSE) position.
mode will be possible again. Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
and steering effort could lead to an accident.


For longer waiting periods with the engine
CAUTION running, the selector lever should be placed in
NOTE
 Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal  On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. brake before moving the selector lever to the
This can damage the CVT. “P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-
Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal CAUTION tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position before
while holding down the brake pedal with the  To avoid transmission overheating, never try applying the parking brake, it may be diffi-
selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position, to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by cult to disengage the selector lever from the
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
as when performing the same operation with
using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake.
“P” (PARK) position when next you drive
the vehicle, requiring application of a strong
5
the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)  Unexpected acceleration may occur if the force to the selector lever to move from the
position. selector lever is in a position other than “P” “P” (PARK) position.
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
Passing acceleration Before driving off from a stop, make sure
N00514900063
that the selector lever is in “D” (DRIVE) When the CVT makes no speed
position or “Sports mode” position.
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) change
N00515300194
position (when passing another vehicle) push
the accelerator to the floor if it is safe to do so If the CVT does not shift while driving, or
Parking
in traffic conditions. The CVT will automati- your vehicle does not pick up enough speed
N00515100062
cally downshift. when starting on an uphill slope, there may be
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- something unusual happening in the transmis-
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake, sion, causing a safety device to activate. Have
NOTE and then move the selector lever to the “P” your vehicle checked at an authorized Mit-
 In sports mode, downshifts do not take place (PARK) position.
when the accelerator is depressed all the way
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
If you are going to leave the vehicle unat- your choice as soon as possible.
to the floor.
tended, always switch off the engine and
carry the key. 1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving
uphill, shift the selector lever into “L”
Waiting (LOW) position (except for vehicles with
N00515000074
sport mode) or 2nd shift range of the
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic sports mode.
lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever This method might not work depending
position and held stationary with the service on the type of transmission malfunction.
brake.
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)

2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level Drive mode Function
road, move the selector lever back to “D”
(DRIVE) position. The default mode.
This mode is for automati-
cally controlling the distribu-
NOTE 4WD AUTO
tion of driving torque to all
 When the warning display or the four wheels according to the
warning display appears on the information driving conditions.
5 screen in the multi-information display, there This mode is for driving in
could be a malfunction in the CVT. Refer to slippery conditions such as
“Continuously variable transmission (CVT): on snow-covered roads or
Warning display” on page 5-62.
sand. 1- 2WD
The large amount of driving 2- 4WD AUTO
4WD LOCK 3- 4WD LOCK
torque that is applied to the
Electronically controlled rear tires enables getting out
4WD system (if so equipped) of slippery areas and power- The drive mode is displayed as an interrupt
N00548300019
ful driving is possible across display on the information screen in the
all ranges. multi-information display when the drive
The electronically controlled 4WD system is mode is switched.
an all-wheel drive system that allows one of 4-wheel drive operation requires special driv- After a few seconds, the information screen
three drive modes to be selected with a ing skills. returns from the drive mode display to the
switch, in accordance with the driving condi- Carefully read the “All-wheel driving opera- previous screen.
tions. tion” section on page 5-70 and take care to
drive safely. Display
The following drive modes are available. Drive mode
Type 1 Type 2
Drive mode Function Drive mode-selector
N00548401033 2WD
This mode is for economical
driving on normal dry roads The drive mode can be selected by pressing
2WD the switch while the ignition switch is in the
and freeways. 4WD AUTO
Driving in front-wheel drive. “ON” position.

Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)

Display Type 2
Drive mode CAUTION
Type 1 Type 2  If the selected drive mode indicator is blink-
ing, the vehicle switches automatically to
4WD LOCK front-wheel drive in order to protect the
Normally the indicator illuminates when the drive-system components, and drive mode
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi- selection is no longer possible with the drive
tion, and then the drive mode is displayed a mode-selector.
CAUTION
 Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
few seconds after the engine is started.
The status of each drive mode display is as
The warning display is also displayed in the
information screen in the multi-information
5
the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or follows. display.
in similar conditions. The vehicle could Reduce speed, and if the indicator goes out
lunge in an unexpected direction. after driving a while, resume driving as
Drive mode indicator before. If the indicator continues blinking for
 Driving on dry, paved roads in “4WD
LOCK” mode causes increased fuel con- Drive mode “4WD” indi- “LOCK” more than about 5 minutes, have the vehicle
sumption, noise, and premature tire wear. cator indicator inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Do not drive with the tires spinning in dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
2WD OFF OFF soon as possible.
“2WD” mode.
Doing so could generate heat in the drive- 4WD AUTO ON OFF
system components. 4WD LOCK ON ON Type 1 Type 2
NOTE
 The drive mode can be switched while driv-
ing or stopped.
Drive mode indicator

N00549400017
Type 1

All-wheel driving operation

traction when driving on slippery, wet or
CAUTION All-wheel driving operation snow-covered roads and when moving out of
 The warning display on the information N00530600169
mud.
screen in the multi-information display, a
These vehicles, however, are not designed
problem has occurred with the electronically
controlled 4WD system and the safety device
For vehicles with full-time 4WD for off-road use, and are unsuitable for
has activated. Have an inspection made by driving on bumpy ground that may cause
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Full-time 4WD vehicles are propelled by excessive strain. Electronically controlled
4WD system vehicles should be driven only
5 repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-
sible.
engine power distributed constantly and
under the same conditions as are suitable for
appropriately to all 4 wheels.
Not only does this ensure enhanced handling ordinary front-wheel drive vehicles.
Type 1 Type 2 on dry, paved roads but also permits better
traction when driving on slippery, wet or Turning sharp corners
snow-covered roads and when moving out of
mud. When turning a sharp corner in “4WD
These vehicles, however, are not designed LOCK” position at low speed, a slight differ-
for off-road use, and are unsuitable for ence in steering may be experienced similar
driving on bumpy ground that may cause to feeling as if the brakes were applied. This
excessive strain. Full-time 4WD vehicles is called tight corner braking and results from
CAUTION should be driven only under the same condi- each of the four tires being at a different dis-
 Always use tires of the same size, type, and tions as are suitable for ordinary front-wheel tance from the corner. The phenomenon is
brand that have no wear differences. Using drive vehicles. typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles. If this
tires that differ in size, type, brand, or wear
occurs, either straighten out the steering
amount may activate the protection of the
drive-system components, causing the drive For vehicles with electronically wheel, or change to “2WD” or “4WD
mode in “4WD AUTO” mode to lock or the controlled 4WD system AUTO” mode.
“4WD” and “LOCK” indicators to blink
alternately. On snowy or icy roads
Electronically controlled 4WD system vehi-
cles are propelled by engine power distrib-
uted constantly and appropriately to all 4 Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD AUTO”
wheels. or “4WD LOCK” in accordance with the road
Not only does this ensure enhanced handling conditions, and then gradually depress the
on dry, paved roads but also permits better accelerator pedal for a smooth start.

Cautions on handling of all-wheel drive vehicles
NOTE CAUTION Climbing/descending sharp grades

 The use of snow tires is recommended. • The “ ” warning display or the “ ”
 Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, warning display appear on the information Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill
avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak- screen in the multi-information display. climbing ability and engine braking on steep
ing (downshifting). Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-62. slopes. Avoid driving on steep slopes even
though the vehicle is a 4-wheel drive vehicle.
CAUTION WARNING 5
 Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration,  When attempting to rock your vehicle out
Cautions on handling of all-
and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con- of a stuck position, be sure that the area wheel drive vehicles
trol of the vehicle could be lost. around the vehicle is clear of people and N00530800190
physical objects. The rocking motion may
cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-
Moving out of mud ward/backward, causing injury or dam-
Tires and wheels
age to nearby people or objects.
Since driving torque can be applied to all four
Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD LOCK”
wheels, the performance of the vehicle when
and then gradually depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth start.
NOTE operating in all-wheel drive is greatly
 Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration affected by the condition of the tires.
Keep the pressure on the accelerator pedal as
and sharp turning; such operations could
constant as possible, and drive at low speed. Pay close attention to the tires.
result in the vehicle becoming stuck.
 If the vehicle becomes stuck in muddy roads,
CAUTION it can often be moved with a rocking motion.  Install specified tires on all wheels. Refer
 If any of the following conditions occur, fol- Move the selector lever alternately between to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.
low these procedures: “D” (DRIVE) and “R” (REVERSE) posi-  Be sure to fit all four tires and wheels of
tions, while pressing lightly on the accelera- the same size and type.
• The engine coolant temperature display
tor pedal. When replacement of any of the tires or
appears on the information screen in the
wheels is necessary, replace all of them.
multi-information display or the engine
power drops suddenly.  All tires should be rotated whenever the
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4. wear difference between the front and rear
tires is recognizable.

Service brake
Good vehicle performance cannot be
expected if there is a difference in wear
Towing Jacking up a all-wheel drive
between tires. Refer to “Tire rotation” on vehicles
page 9-19.
 Check the tire inflation pressure regularly. WARNING

 Do not start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on the jack.
5 CAUTION The jack could slip out of position and
 Always use tires of the same size, same type, result in an accident.
and same brand, and which have no wear dif-
ferences. Using tires that differ in size, type,
brands or the degree of wear, will increase
the differential oil temperature, resulting in Service brake
possible damage to the driving system. Fur- N00517500262
ther, the drive train will be subjected to

excessive loading, possibly leading to oil Brake pedal
leakage, component seizure, or other serious
problems.
Overuse of the brake can cause poor brake
CAUTION response and premature wear of the brake
 Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
pads and linings.
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A
or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in When driving down a long or steep hill, use
damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. engine braking by downshifting.
If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
C or Type D equipment. WARNING
 [For vehicle equipped with the Electronically  Do not leave any objects near the brake
controlled 4WD system] pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;
Even in “2WD” mode, the vehicle cannot be doing so could prevent the full pedal
towed with the front or the rear wheels on stroke that would be necessary in an
the ground. emergency. Make sure that the pedal can
be operated freely at all times. Make sure
the floor mat is securely held in place.

Brake assist system
CAUTION WARNING Brake assist system

 It is important not to drive the vehicle with  Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. N00567300076
your foot resting on the brake pedal when Keep the engine running whenever your
The brake assist system is a device assisting
braking is not required. This practice can vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the
result in very high brake temperatures, pre- engine while driving, the power brake
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal
mature pad and lining wear, and possible booster will stop working and your brakes firmly such as in emergency stop situations
damage to the brakes. will not work as well. and provides greater braking force.
 If the power assist is lost or if either brake
hydraulic system stops working properly, If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the 5
take your vehicle to an authorized Mit- brakes will be applied with more force than
Power brakes usual.
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
N00517600377
of your choice immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes
for more braking force with minimal brake
CAUTION
 The brake assist system is not a device
pedal effort. Brake pad wear alarm designed to exercise braking force greater
Your brakes are designed to operate at full N00532500087 than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
capacity, even if the power assist is lost. sufficient distance between vehicles in front
The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a
If the power assist is lost, the effort needed to of you without relying too much on the brake
metallic squeal when the brake pads have
press the brake pedal is greater. assist system.
worn down enough to need service. If you
If you should loose the power assist for some
hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced
reason, the brakes will still work.
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
If the power brake unit or either of the two
a repair facility of your choice.
NOTE
brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-  Once the brake assist system is operational,
erly, the rest of the brake system will still it maintains great braking force even if the
work, but the vehicle will not slow down as WARNING brake pedal is lightly released.
quickly.  Driving with worn brake pads will make it To stop its operation, completely remove
You will know this has happened if you find harder to stop, and can cause an accident. your foot from the brake pedal.
you need to depress the brake pedal down  The brake assist system may become opera-
further, or harder when slowing down or stop- tional when the brake pedal is fully
depressed even if it has not been depressed
ping, or if the brake warning light and the
suddenly.
warning display in the multi-information dis-
play come on.

Anti-lock braking system

 Always keep a safe distance from the
NOTE vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-
CAUTION
 When the brake assist system is in use while  Never install a limited slip differential as the
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
driving, you may feel as if the depressed ABS may not function normally.
system, leave a greater braking distance
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
motions in conjunction with the operation when: Motors dealer.
noise, or the vehicle body and the steering • Driving on gravel or snow-covered
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake roads.
5 assist system is operating normally and does • Driving on uneven road surfaces. NOTE
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to  Operation of anti-lock braking system is  After your vehicle is driven a short distance
depress the brake pedal. not restricted to situations where brakes after starting the engine, you will hear the
 You may hear an operation noise when the are applied suddenly. This system may sound coming from the engine compartment.
brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed also prevent the wheels from locking These are the normal sounds the anti-lock
while stationary. This does not indicate a when you drive over manholes, steel braking system makes when performing a
malfunction and the brake assist system is self-check. It does not indicate a malfunc-
roadwork plates, road markings, or any
operating normally. tion.
uneven road surface.
 When the anti-lock braking system is in  The anti-lock braking system can be used
Anti-lock braking system use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat- after the vehicle has reached a speed over
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
N00517900309 ing and hear a unique sound. You may
working when the vehicle slows below
The anti-lock braking system helps prevent also feel as if the pedal resists being
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
the wheels from locking up when braking. pressed.
This helps you keep control of your vehicle In this situation, simply hold the brake
pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
and its direction.
brake, which will result in reduced
Anti-lock braking system warn-
braking performance. ing light / display
Driving hints N00531600573
Warning light
 When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden CAUTION
braking), steering is slightly different  The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
from normal driving conditions. Use the accidents. It is your responsibility to take
steering wheel carefully. safety precautions and to drive carefully.
 To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
system, be sure all four wheels and tires are
the same size and the same type.

Anti-lock braking system

CAUTION If the anti-lock braking system
• When the ignition switch is in the “ON” warning light / display and brake
position, the warning light does not come warning light / display come on at
on or it remains on and does not go off
• The warning light comes on while driving
the same time
• The warning display appears while driving Warning light
If the warning light / display 5
comes on while driving
N00531700503
If only the anti-lock braking sys-

If there is a malfunction in the system, the tem warning light / display comes
anti-lock braking system warning light will
come on and the warning display will appear
on
on the information screen in the multi-infor-  Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-
mation display. ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Under normal conditions, the anti-lock brak- Test the system by restarting the engine
ing system warning light only comes on when and driving at a speed of about 12 mph
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” (20 km/h) or higher.
position and goes off a few seconds later. If the warning light / display then remain
off during driving, there is no problem.
CAUTION However, if the warning light / display do
 Any of the following warning light/display not disappear, or if they come on again
behavior indicates that the anti-lock braking when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi-
system is not functioning and only the stan- cle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
dard brake system is working. (The standard Motors dealer or repair facility of your
brake system will still work properly.) If this choice as soon as possible.
happens, take your vehicle to an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible.

Active Stability Control (ASC) (if so equipped)

The anti-lock braking system and brake force and traction. Please read this section in con-
Front
distribution function may not work, so hard junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-
braking could make the vehicle unstable. ing system, traction control function and skid
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. control function.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair Anti-lock braking system (ABS)  P.5-74
facility of your choice. Traction control function  P.5-77
Skid control function  P.5-77
5
NOTE
 The anti-lock braking system warning light CAUTION
and brake warning light illuminate at the  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC
same time and the warning displays appear cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
alternately on the information screen in the Rear from acting on the vehicle. This system, like
multi-information display. any other system, has limits and cannot help
you to maintain traction and control of the
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-
ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s
After driving on icy roads responsibility to drive carefully, This means
N00529200022
taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove ronmental conditions.
any snow and ice which may have been left  Be sure to use the same specified type and
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to ASC may not work properly.
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the  Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
cables located at each wheel.
Active Stability Control may stop functioning properly.
(ASC) (if so equipped)
N00559100118
The Active Stability Control (ASC) takes

overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-
tem, traction control function and skid control
function to help maintain the vehicle’s control

NOTE CAUTION
 An operation noise may be emitted from the  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
engine compartment in the following situa- road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
tions. The sound is associated with checking the vehicle at moderate speeds.
the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
Skid control function
tion.
• When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
N00559300035 5
position. The skid control function is designed to help
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
the engine is turned on. slippery roads or during rapid steering
 When the ASC is activated, you may feel a maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine CAUTION
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin- output and the brake on each wheel.  For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch
ing sound from the engine compartment. should be operated when your vehicle is
This indicates that the system is operating stopped.
normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. NOTE  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
 When the anti-lock braking system warning  The skid control function operates at speeds normal circumstances.
light is illuminated, the ASC is not active. of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.
NOTE
Traction control function “ASC OFF” switch  Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both
N00559200034
N00559400179 the skid control function and the traction
The ASC is automatically activated when the control function.
On slippery surfaces, the traction control
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-  When moving out of mud, sand or fresh
function prevents the drive wheels from spin-
tion. You can deactivate the system by press- snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to allow the engine speed to increase. In such
start moving from a stopped condition. It also ing down the “ASC OFF” switch for 3
situations, temporarily turning off ASC with
provides sufficient driving force and steering seconds or longer.
the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to
performance as the vehicle turns while press- When the ASC is deactivated, the dis- move out your vehicle.
ing the acceleration pedal. play/indicator will turn on. To reactivate the  If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
ASC, momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-
taken operation protection function” will
switch ; the display/indicator is turned off.
activate and the ASC will turn back on.

ASC operation display or ASC CAUTION ASC warning display

OFF display  If the temperature in the braking system con- N00559500196
N00559500183
tinues to increase due to continuous brake If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
ASC operation display/ASC indicator control on a slippery road surface, the tem, the following display/indicator will turn
- display/indicator will blink. To prevent the on.
The display/indicator will blink when
brake system from overheating, the brake
the ASC is operating.
control of the traction control function will
5 ASC OFF display/ASC OFF indicator be temporarily suspended. The engine con- - ASC indicator
-
This display/incicator will turn on trol of the traction control function and nor-
when the ASC is turned off with the - ASC OFF display/ASC OFF indicator
mal brake operation will not be affected.
“ASC OFF” switch. Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the
temperature in the braking system has come
down, the display/indicator will be
NOTE turned off and the traction control function
 The combination of items shown on the dis- will start operating again.
play varies depending on the vehicle model.
NOTE
CAUTION  The display/indicator may come on when Warning display type 2
 When display/indicator blinks, ASC is you start the engine. This means that the bat-
operating, which means that the road is slip- tery voltage momentarily dropped when the
pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin- engine was started. It does not indicate a
ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower. malfunction, provided that the display goes
out immediately.
 When a spare tire has been put on your vehi-
cle, the gripping ability of the tire will be
NOTE
lower, making it more likely that the dis-
 The combination of items shown on the dis-
play/indicator will blink. play varies depending on the vehicle model.

Power steering system
CAUTION Power steering system Electric power steering system

 The system may be malfunctioning. N00518000310 (EPS) (if so equipped)
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
The power steering system operates while the N00547201063
engine.
Restart the engine and check whether the dis-
engine is running. It helps reduce the effort
play/indicator goes out. If they go out, there needed to turn the steering wheel. NOTE
is no abnormal condition. If they do not go The power steering system has mechanical  During repeated full-lock turning of the
steering capability in case the power assist is
out or if they turn on frequently, it is not nec-
essary to stop the vehicle immediately, but lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
steering wheel (for example, while you are
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
5
you should have your vehicle inspected by son, you will still be able to steer your vehi- space), a protection function may be acti-
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a cle, but you will notice it takes much more vated to prevent overheating of the power
repair facility of your choice as soon as pos- effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi- steering system. This function will make the
sible. cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
this event, limit your turning of the steering
wheel for a while. When the system has
choice. cooled down, the steering effort will return
Towing to normal.
N00546300015
WARNING  If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the
CAUTION  Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
headlights may become dim. This behavior
moving. Stopping the engine would make
 When towing the vehicle with only the front is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the their original brightness after a short while.
possibly resulting in an accident.
ground, do not place the ignition switch in
the “ON” position. Placing the ignition
switch in the “ON” position could cause the
ASC to operate, resulting in an accident. Hydraulic power steering sys- Electronic power steering system
Note that the correct towing method depends
tem (HPS) (if so equipped) warning display
on the transmission type and the vehicle’s
N00547101062
drive configuration.
For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12. Type 1
CAUTION
 Do not leave the steering wheel turned all the
way in one direction. This can cause damage
to the power steering system.

Cruise control (if so equipped)

Type 2
CAUTION Cruise control switches
 For safety reasons, the cruise control system
should be set to the “OFF” position by press-
ing the “ON OFF” switch (A) when you are
not using the cruise control system.
 Do not use cruise control when driving con-
If there is a malfunction in the system, the ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
5 warning display will appear on the informa-
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snowy, wet, slippery or
tion screen in the multi-information display. on a steep downhill slope.
 On vehicles with manual transaxle, do not
CAUTION move the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
 If the warning display appears while the position while driving at a set speed without
engine is running, have the vehicle inspected depressing the clutch pedal. The engine will
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or run too fast and might be damaged.
A- “ON OFF” switch
a repair facility of your choice as soon as
possible. It may become harder to turn the
To activate and deactivate the cruise control
steering wheel. NOTE function.
 Cruise control may not be able to keep your
speed on uphills or downhills.
B- “COAST SET” switch
Cruise control (if so equipped)  Your speed may drop on a steep uphill. You
may have to use the accelerator pedal if you
N00518301639 To reduce the set speed and to set the speed of
want to stay at your set speed.
constant-speed driving.
Cruise control is an automatic speed control  Your speed may increase to more than the set
system. It lets you keep the same driving speed on a steep downhill. You must use the
speed. Cruise control can be activated at brake to control your speed. C- “ACC RES” switch
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. It is espe- To increase the set speed and to resume to the
cially useful for freeway driving. Cruise con- previous set speed.
trol does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
D- “CANCEL” switch
To terminate constant-speed driving.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 When operating the cruise control switches,  If the cruise control is on when the ignition  The speed when you released the “COAST
correctly press each cruise control switch. switch is turned to “LOCK” or “ACC” posi- SET” switch will be set as the cruising
The cruise control may be turned off auto- tion, cruise control will turn on automatically speed.
matically if two or more of the cruise control and the “CRUISE” control indicator will
switches are pressed at the same time. illuminate the next time you start the engine.
 If the battery voltage is insufficient, the To increase the set speed
memory data for the cruise control will be
erased. As a result, the “CRUISE” control
N00518501383 5
To activate There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
indicator may not come on when you restart
N00518401425
the engine. If this happens, press the “ON
1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi- OFF” switch once again to activate the cruise
tion, press the “ON OFF” switch (A) to “ACC RES” switch
control.
turn on the cruise control. The “CRUISE”
indicator light in the meter cluster will If you press and hold down the “ACC RES”
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired
come on. switch (C), the speed will gradually increase.
speed, then press and release the “COAST
When you reach your desired speed, release
SET” switch (B) when the “CRUISE”
the switch. Your cruising speed is now set.
indicator light is illuminated. The vehicle
will then maintain the desired speed.
To increase the speed in small amounts, press

the “ACC RES” switch (C) for less than 1
second and release it. Every time you press


the “ACC RES” switch (C), the speed will
“COAST SET” switch Brake pedal
increase by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Press and hold the “COAST SET” switch (B), Press the brake pedal (which disengages the
Accelerator pedal the speed will slow down (coast) gradually. cruise control) and when the desired speed is
When you reach your desired speed, release reached, press the “COAST SET” switch (B)
Use the accelerator pedal to reach your the “COAST SET” switch. Your cruising and release the switch momentarily to set a
desired speed. Press the “COAST SET” speed is now set. new desired cruise speed.
5 switch (B) and release the switch momen-
tarily to set a new desired cruising speed.
To decrease the speed in small amounts, press

the “COAST SET” switch (B) for less than 1
second and release it. Every time you press
To temporarily increase or
the “COAST SET” switch (B), the speed will decrease the speed
To decrease the set speed decrease by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h). N00518701138
N00518601313
To temporarily increase the speed
There are 2 ways to reduce the set speed.
Press the accelerator pedal as you would nor-
mally. When you release the pedal, you will
return to your set speed.


 When the active stability control (ASC)
To deactivate starts operating (if so equipped).
N00518801618
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
The cruise control can be turned off as fol- on page 5-76.
lows:
 Press the “ON OFF” switch (A). (Cruise WARNING

control will be turned off.)  On vehicles with continuously variable
 Press the “CANCEL” switch (D). transmission (CVT), although the cruise 5
 Depress the brake pedal or lightly tap it. control will be disengaged when shifting to
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, never move
the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position while driving.
You would have no engine braking and
To temporarily decrease the speed this could cause a serious accident.
Apply the brakes to decrease the speed. To Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-
return to the previously set speed, press the vated as follow:
“ACC RES” switch (C). Refer to “To resume
the set speed” on page 5-84.  When the engine speed rises and
approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
red-colored part of the tachometer dial).
The cruise control will be turned off automat-

ically in the following conditions: CAUTION
 When the set speed driving is deactivated
 When you depress the clutch pedal (on automatically in any situation other than
vehicles with manual transaxle). those listed above, there may be a system
 Your speed slows to about 10 mph malfunction.
Press the “ON OFF” switch to turn off the
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed
cruise control and have your vehicle
because of an uphill, etc.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
 Your speed slows to about 25 mph Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
(40 km/h) or less. choice.

Tire pressure monitoring system
To resume the set speed Tire pressure monitoring NOTE

N00518901358
system  The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
substitute for regularly checking tire infla-
If the cruise control is deactivated by any of N00530201579
tion pressures.
the conditions described in “To deactivate”
The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
on page 5-83, you can return to the previously
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels as described in “Tires” on page 9-14.
set speed by pressing the “ACC RES” switch
to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The  The tire inflation pressure sensor (B) is
(C) while driving at a speed of approximately
5 25 mph (40 km/h) or greater.
system only indicates when a tire is signifi- installed in the illustrated location.
Replace grommet and washer (C) with a new
cantly under-inflated.
one when the tire is replaced.
For details, please contact your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
However, you must repeat the speed setting

procedure under either of the following con- WARNING Tire pressure monitoring sys-
ditions:  The spare wheel does not have a tire infla-
tion pressure sensor.
tem warning light/display
 The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” When the spare tire is used, the tire pres- N00532701376
position. sure monitoring system will not work

 The cruise control is turned OFF. properly.
 “CRUISE” indicator light is turned off. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire. When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the tire pressure monitoring


system warning light normally illuminates
and goes off a few seconds later.
CAUTION NOTE
 If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-  In addition, the warning display is displayed
If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for ing light does not illuminate when the igni- on the information screen in the multi-infor-
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, tion switch is turned to the “ON” position, it mation display.
means that the tire pressure monitoring sys- Type 1
the warning light will remain illuminated
tem is not working properly. Have the sys-
while the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- tem inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
tion.
Refer to “If the warning light/display illumi-
Motors dealer.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
5
nates while driving” on page 5-86 and take system may be preventing the monitoring of
the necessary measures. the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, Type 2
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
 If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
NOTE sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
 In addition, the warning display is displayed
monitoring system warning light will blink
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
for approximately 1 minute and then remain
mation display. continuously illuminated. The warning light
Type 1
will issue further warnings each time the
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
exists. should be checked monthly when cold and
Check to see whether the warning light goes inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
off after few minutes driving. mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
If it then goes off during driving, there is no vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
Type 2 problem.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size
However, if the warning light does not go
off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an or tire inflation pressure label, you should
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. determine the proper tire inflation pressure
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the for those tires.)
system may be preventing the monitoring of As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
the warning light appears while driving, system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and pressure telltale when one or more of your
high-speed driving. tires is significantly under-inflated.


Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell- vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-
tale illuminates, you should stop and check ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
NOTE
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate function telltale after replacing one or more
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig- tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
valve stem.
nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to the replacement or alternate tires and wheels Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
overheat and can lead to tire failure. allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- get into the valve, resulting in damage to the
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency erly. tire inflation pressure sensor.
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
5 cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
 Do not use metal valve caps, which may
cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
If the warning light/display illu- and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s minates while driving sors.
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- N00532800439  Once adjustments have been made, the warn-
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system ing light will go off after a few minutes of
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS warning light illuminates, avoid hard driving.
low tire pressure telltale. braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
high speeds. You should stop and adjust 2. If the tire pressure monitoring system
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
the tires to the proper inflation pressure as warning light remains illuminated after
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at you have been driving for about 20 min-
the system is not operating properly. The
the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
9-14. sure, one or more of the tires may have a
with the low tire pressure telltale.
puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a
When the system detects a malfunction, the
NOTE puncture, have it repaired by an autho-
telltale will flash for approximately one min-
 In addition, the warning display is displayed rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as
ute and then remain continuously illuminated.
on the information screen in the multi-infor- possible.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent
mation display.
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.  When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- WARNING
sure, do not apply excessive force to the
When the malfunction indicator is illumi-  If the warning light/display illuminates
valve stem to avoid breakage.
nated, the system may not be able to detect or while you are driving, avoid hard braking,
signal low tire pressure as intended. sharp steering maneuvers and high
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety speeds. Driving with an under-inflated tire
of reasons, including the installation of adversely affects vehicle performance and
can result in an accident.
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the


 Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine replacement is not done by an authorized
CAUTION wheels are being used. Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by
 If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with
 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla- your warranty.
the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire
tion pressure sensors are being used.
could lead to an accident.
 Wheels whose ID codes are not memo- CAUTION
 The warning light/display may not illuminate
immediately in the event of a tire blowout or rized by the vehicle are used.  The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
rapid leak.  Compact spare tire is fitted on a road the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure
wheel.
 A window tint that affects the radio wave
sensors, resulting in air leakage or damage to
the sensors.
5
NOTE signals is installed.
 To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
tion pressure sensors, have any punctured NOTE General information
tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi
 Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi- N00533001259
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by
ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to Your tire pressure monitoring system oper-
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is
large variations in ambient temperature, the ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
not covered by your warranty.
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair prod- (causing the warning light/display to come
uct on any tire. Such a spray could damage (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry
on) when the ambient temperature is rela-
the tire inflation pressure sensors. Have any Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).
tively low. If the warning light/display
puncture repaired by an authorized Mitsubi- comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
shi Motors dealer. Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two con-
The tire pressure monitoring system may not Whenever the tires and wheels ditions.
work normally in the following circum- are replaced with new ones
stances: N00532900179  This device may not cause harmful inter-
If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure ference.
 A wireless facility or device using the
sensors are installed, their ID codes must be  This device must accept any interference
same frequency is near the vehicle.
programmed into the tire pressure monitoring received, including interference that may
 Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
system. Have tire and wheel replacement per- cause undesired operation.
and/or on the wheels.
 The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
is dead. dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire
inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
CAUTION WARNING CAUTION

 Changes or modifications not expressly  The view on the screen is limited, and • Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.
approved by the manufacturer for compli- objects outside the view, such as under the • Do not spray the camera and its surround-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- bumper or around either corner of the ings with high-pressure water.
ate the equipment. bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen. • Make sure that the trunk lid is securely
closed when backing up.
Location of rear-view camera
5 Rear-view camera (if so Reference lines on the screen
equipped) The rear-view camera (A) is built-in to the
N00546201271 trunk lid. Reference lines and upper surface of the rear
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
is in the “R” (REVERSE) position with the  Red line (B) indicates approximately 20
ignition switch in the “ON” position, the rear- inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.
view image will be displayed on the DIS-  Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
PLAY AUDIO in the center panel. mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the
When the gearshift lever or the selector lever vehicle body.
is shifted out of the “R” (REVERSE) posi-  Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-
tion, the rear-view image will go off. tance from the rear bumper.
A
WARNING
 Never rely solely on the rear-view camera
to clear the area behind your vehicle.
Always check visually behind and all
CAUTION
around your vehicle for persons, animals,  If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
do so can result in vehicle damage, serious lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
injury or death. clean, soft cloth.
 The rear-view camera is an aid system for  To avoid damaging the camera;
backing up, but it is not a substitute for • Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
your visual confirmation. it by using an abrasive compound.
• Do not disassemble the camera.

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
CAUTION CAUTION
• When there is an upward slope at the back.  The reference lines for distance and vehicle
(Case 2) width are intended to indicate the distance to
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
Case 1 They may not indicate correct distance
depending on the shape of an obstacle.
For example, when there is an object behind
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting
in the direction of the vehicle, the reference
5
lines on the screen will indicate that point A
is the farthest point and point B is the closest
1: Approximately at the rear edge of the point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B
rear bumper A- Actual objects are actually the same distance from the vehi-
2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm) B- Objects shown on the screen cle, and point C is farther off than point A
3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) and B.
Case 2
CAUTION
 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
lens. As a result, images and distances shown
on the screen are not exact.
 Actual distance may be different from dis-
tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
depending on the loading condition of the
vehicle and road surface condition. A- Actual objects
The reference lines for distance and vehicle B- Objects shown on the screen
width are based on a level, flat road surface.
In the following cases, objects shown on the
screen will appear to be farther off than they
actually are. NOTE
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed  Under certain circumstances, it may become
down with the weight of passengers and difficult to see an image on the screen, even
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) when the system is functioning correctly.
• In a dark area, such as at night.

Instrument cluster
NOTE Speedometer Tachometer

• When water drops or condensation are on N00519100190 N00519201329
the lens. The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in The tachometer shows engine revolutions per
• When sun light or headlights shine directly miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour minute. This allows the driver to determine
into the lens.
(km/h). the most efficient shift position (manual
transaxle), selector position {continuously
Instrument cluster variable transmission (CVT)} and engine
5 N00519001431
Type 1
speed combinations.
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
performance.
Type 2
1- Tachometer P.5-90
2- Multi-information display P.5-91
Information screen display list
P.5-113
3- Speedometer P.5-90 CAUTION
4- Rheostat meter illumination button  The red zone indicates an engine speed
P.5-91 beyond the range of safe operation.
 Select the correct shift position (manual
transaxle) or selector position (CVT) to con-
trol the engine speed so that the tachometer
indicator does not enter the red zone.

Multi-information display
Rheostat meter illumination NOTE

button  The brightness level of the instruments is
N00554900137
stored in memory when the ignition switch is
turned off.
Each time you press this button, there is a  If you press and hold the button for longer
sound and the brightness of the instruments than about 1 second when the parking lights
changes. are illuminated, the brightness level changes
to the maximum level. Pressing and holding
the button for longer than about 1 second
5
NOTE
again returns the brightness level to the pre-
 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
vious level.
tively for when the tail lights are illuminated 1- Brightness display
and when they are not. 2- Rheostat illumination button
 If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
light control, when the light switch is in a
position other than the “OFF” position, the
meter illumination switches automatically to
the adjusted brightness, depending on the
brightness outside the vehicle.
N00555001350
The multi-information display displays warnings, the odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel remaining, out-
side temperature, gearshift lever position, selector lever position, all-wheel drive operation status, average and momentary fuel consumption,
driving range, average speed, instrument brightness, etc.
It is also possible to change elements such as the language and units used on the multi-information display.

With ignition switch in “OFF” With ignition switch in “ON” position {Continuously With ignition switch in “ON” position
position variable transmission (CVT)} (Manual transaxle)
Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2
1- 6- Information screen (With ignition 13- Gearshift indicator display screen (if so
Warning display screen (With igni-
switch in the “ON” position) P.5-98 equipped) P.5-57
tion switch in the “OFF” position)
Interrupt display screen (With ignition
P.5-93
switch in the “ON” position) P.5-101 NOTE
2- Information screen (With ignition
7- Outside temperature display screen  The fuel units, temperature units, display
switch in the “OFF” position) P.5-93
P.5-102 language, and other settings can be changed.
Interrupt display screen (With ignition
8- Fuel remaining display screen P. Refer to “Changing the function settings
switch in the “OFF” position) P.5-95
5-102 (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
3- Door ajar warning display screen (With on page 5-105.
9- Engine coolant temperature display (if
ignition switch in the “OFF” position)
so equipped) P.5-98
P.5-96
10- Selector lever position display screen
4- Warning display screen (With igni- P.5-62
tion switch in the “ON” position) 11- Drive mode indicator display screen (if
P.5-97 so equipped)
5- Active stability control (ASC) OFF dis-  P.5-97
play screen (if so equipped) P.5-98 12- ECO mode indicator (if so equipped)
P.5-102

information display by operating the multi-
NOTE information meter switch.
NOTE
 The display screen is different depending on  When the warning is displayed, the warn-
whether the ignition switch in the “OFF” or
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
“ON” position.
information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page 5-93.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page
5-113.
switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-98. 5
switch turned from “OFF” to “ON” posi-
tion)” on page 5-96. Information screen (With igni-
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition tion switch in the “OFF” posi-
switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-98.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition tion)
switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-116. N00555300112
Warning display screen Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
Multi-information meter switch (With ignition switch in the mation meter switch, the display screen
changes in the following order.
N00555101218 “OFF” position)
The multi-information meter switch is a but- N00555200137
ton marked “INFO” on the left side of the If you press the multi-information meter
dash. switch and return from the warning display
Each time the multi-information meter switch
screen to the previous screen, the warning
is operated, a sound is emitted and the multi-
is displayed.
information display changes between infor-
Refer to “Returning to the display screen
mation such as warnings, odometer, trip
from before the warning display” on page
odometer, service reminder, engine coolant
5-95.
temperature (Type 1), average and momen-
This mark is also displayed if there is another
tary fuel consumption, driving range, and
warning other than the one displayed. When
average speed.
the cause of the warning display is elimi-
It is also possible to change elements such as
the language and units used on the multi- nated, the warning goes out automatically.

Type 1 Odometer/Trip odometer It is possible to measure two currently

N00555400100
traveled distances, from home using trip
odometer and from a particular point
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
When there is no on the way using trip odometer .
warning display
mation meter switch, the display screen
changes as follows: To reset the trip odometer:
To return the display to 0, hold down the
When there is a Odometer/Trip odometer  Odome- multi-information meter switch for about
5 warning display ter/Trip odometer  Service reminder 2 seconds or more. Only the currently dis-
 Redisplay of a warning display screen  played value will be reset.
Example:
Odometer/Trip odometer .
Type 2 If trip odometer is displayed, only trip
Odometer odometer will be reset.
When there is no Shows the total distance traveled.
warning display
Trip odometer
When there is a
warning display Shows the distance traveled between two
points.
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip

1- Odometer (Type 1), Trip odometer odometer :
2- Odometer (Type 1), Trip odometer
3- Service reminder
4- Redisplay of a warning display screen

Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
NOTE switch in the “OFF” position)” on page
 Both trip odometers and can count 5-113.
Type 1 up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo- Type 1
meters.
 When the battery is disconnected, the memo-
ries of trip odometer displays and 5
are cleared, and their displays return to “0.0
miles/kilometers”. Type 2
Type 2
Service reminder
N00555500039
Shows the distance and number of months 1- Information generated

until the next periodic inspection. 2- Cause eliminated
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-103.
Interrupt display screen (With Returning to the display screen

ignition switch in the “OFF” from before the warning display
position)
N00559600155
Even if the cause of the warning display is
NOTE not eliminated, you can return to the screen
When there is information to be announced,
 If there is no warning display, the switching that was displayed before the warning dis-
such as a key reminder, the buzzer sounds and
sequence is: Odometer/Trip odometer play.
switches to the warning display screen. Refer
 Odometer/Trip odometer  service If you press the multi-information meter
to the appropriate page and take the necessary
reminder Odometer/Trip odometer . switch, the display screen switches to the
measures.
screen display from before the warning and
When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning display goes out the warning (A) is displayed.
automatically.

Type 1
Information screen (With igni-
tion switch turned from “OFF”
Door ajar warning display to “ON” position)
N00555800133
(With ignition switch in the
“OFF” position) “ON” position, the display screen changes in
Type 2
5 N00559700130
the following order.
If any of the doors or the trunk lid is not com-
pletely closed, the open door or open trunk lid
Type 1
warning is displayed.
Type 1
NOTE
Type 2
 Warning display screens with a “ ” or
Type 2
“ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
the display, press the multi-information
meter switch as follows.
“ ” : Press lightly.
1- Doors and trunk lid are closed
“ ” : Press for about 2 seconds or more. 2- Doors or trunk lid is open (driver’s door 1- Screen when the ignition switch is
is open in this example) “OFF”
Redisplay of a warning display screen 2- System check screen
3- Screen when the ignition switch is
When the warning is displayed, if you “ON”
lightly press the multi-information meter
switch a few times, the warning display
screen you switched from is redisplayed.

System check screen Service reminder Warning display screen

When the ignition switch is turned to the When the time for periodic inspection arrives,
“ON” position)
“ON” position, the system check screen is the warning display is displayed for a few
N00555200140
displayed for about 4 seconds. If there is no seconds after the screen that is initially dis-
fault, information screen (when the ignition played when the ignition switch is turned This is displayed when you press the multi-
switch is “ON”) is displayed. “ON”. Refer to “Service reminder” on page information meter switch and switch the
If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn- 5-103. warning display screen. 5
ing display. Refer to “Warning display list Type 1 This mark is also displayed if there is another
(when the ignition switch is “ON” position)” warning other than the one displayed.
on page 5-116. When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning goes out automat-
ically.
Type 1 Type 2
Type 2 NOTE
 When the warning is displayed, the warn-
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen.
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page 5-93
or “Information screen (With ignition switch
in the “ON” position)” on page 5-98.
Drive mode indicator display
NOTE screen (if so equipped)
N00555900046
 The system check screen display varies
depending on your equipment. Shows the 4WD drive status.
Refer to “Drive mode-selector” on page 5-68.

8- Average fuel consumption display,
“Active stability control (ASC) Type 1 momentary fuel consumption display
OFF” display screen (if so (Type 2)
equipped) 9- Average speed display, momentary fuel
N00556100074 When there is no warning display consumption display (Type 2)
10- Function setting screen
This is displayed when the Active stability 11- Redisplay of a warning display screen
control (ASC) is turned “OFF” with the
5 “ASC OFF” switch.
Also, if an abnormal condition is occurred in
NOTE
When there is a  While driving, the function setting screen is
the ASC while driving, the “ASC OFF” dis- warning display
Type 2 not displayed even if you operate the multi-
play illuminates. information meter switch. Always park the
Refer to “ASC OFF switch” on page 5-77. vehicle in a safe place before operating.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
When there is no warning display (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
Information screen (With igni- on page 5-105.
tion switch in the “ON” posi-  When there is information to be announced,
tion) such as a system fault, the tone sounds and
N00556200176 the screen display is changed.
When there is a
Refer to “Interrupt display screen (With igni-
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor- warning display
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on page
mation meter switch, the display screen 5-101.
changes in the following order. 1- Odometer (Type 1)/Trip odometer
2- Odometer (Type 1)/Trip odometer
3- Service reminder Odometer/Trip odometer
4- Engine coolant temperature display
(Type 1) The operation method is the same as when
5- Driving range display (Type 1) the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position.
6- Average speed display, average fuel For further details, refer to “Odometer/Trip
consumption display, momentary fuel odometer” on page 5-94.
consumption display (Type 1)
7- Driving range display, momentary fuel
consumption display (Type 2)
Service reminder NOTE Manual reset mode

 The driving range is determined based on the
fuel consumption data. This may vary  When the average speed is being dis-
Shows the distance and number of months
depending on the driving conditions and hab- played, if you hold down the multi-infor-
until the next periodic inspection.
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a mation meter switch, the average speed
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-103.
rough guideline. displayed at that time is reset.
 When you refuel, the driving range display is  When the ignition switch is turned to the
Engine coolant temperature dis-
play
automatically updated.
However, if you only add a small amount of
“ON” position from the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position, the mode setting
5
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. changes automatically from manual to
Fill to a full tank whenever possible. auto.
Shows the engine coolant temperature.
 When your vehicle is stopped on an Switching to auto occurs automatically. If
If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink. extremely steep hill, the driving range value
switching to manual mode is done, how-
Pay careful attention to the engine coolant may change. This is due to the movement of
ever, the data from the last reset is dis-
temperature display while you are driving. fuel in the tank and does not indicate any
problem. played.
 The display setting can be changed to the
CAUTION preferred units (miles or km). Auto reset mode
 If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink. Refer to “Changing the function settings
In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone. (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”  When the average speed is being dis-
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place on page 5-105. played, if you hold down the multi-infor-
and take the required measures. Refer to mation meter switch, these calculations
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4. will be reset to zero.
 When the ignition switch has been set to
Average speed display the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about
Driving range display 4 hours or more, the average speed dis-
This displays the average speed from the last play will automatically reset.
Shows the approximate driving range (how reset to the present.
many more miles or kilometers you can There are 2 types of mode settings as follows. NOTE
drive) with the current fuel level. When this For details on how to change the average
 The average speed display and the average
driving range falls below 30 miles (50 km), “- speed display setting, refer to “Changing the fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
--” is displayed. function settings (With ignition switch in the rately in both auto reset mode and manual
Refuel as soon as possible. “ON” position)” on page 5-105. reset mode.

NOTE Manual reset mode NOTE

 “---” is displayed when the average speed  The average speed display and the average
cannot be measured.  When the average fuel consumption is fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset being displayed, if you hold down the rately in both auto reset mode and manual
mode”. multi-information meter switch, the aver- reset mode.
 The display setting can be changed to the age fuel consumption displayed at that  “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-
preferred units (mph or km/h). time is reset. sumption cannot be measured.
5 Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
 When the ignition switch is turned to the
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.
on page 5-105. “LOCK” position, the mode setting  Average fuel consumption may vary depend
 The average speed display memories for auto changes automatically from manual to on the driving conditions (road conditions,
reset mode and manual reset mode are erased auto. how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel con-
if the battery is disconnected. Switching to auto occurs automatically. If sumption may differ from the fuel consump-
tion displayed, so treat the fuel consumption
switching to manual mode is done, how-
displayed as just a rough guideline.
Average fuel consumption display ever, the data from the last reset is dis-
 The average fuel consumption display mem-
played.
ories for auto reset mode and manual reset
This displays the average fuel consumption mode are erased if the battery is discon-
from the last reset to the present. Auto reset mode nected.
There are 2 types of mode settings as follows.  The display setting can be changed to the
For details on how to change the average fuel  When the average fuel consumption is preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK), L/100
consumption display setting, refer to “Chang- being displayed, if you hold down the km or km/L}.
ing the function settings (With ignition switch multi-information meter switch, these cal- Refer to “Changing the function settings
culations will be reset to zero. (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
in the “ON” position)” on page 5-105.
 When the ignition switch has been set to on page 5-105.
The “ ” mark in the momentary fuel gauge
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about
shows the average fuel consumption. (Type
4 hours or more, the average speed dis-
2) Momentary fuel consumption dis-
play will automatically reset.
play
While driving, the momentary fuel consump-

tion is shown with a bar graph.

When the momentary fuel consumption sur-
passes the average fuel consumption, the
Interrupt display screen (With Type 1
momentary fuel consumption is displayed ignition switch in the “ON”
with a green bar graph. (Type 2) position)
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary N00556300135
fuel consumption above the average fuel con-
sumption, it can help you drive with the better Warning display
fuel consumption. Type 2
5
When there is information to be announced,
NOTE such as a system fault, a tone sounds and the
 When the momentary fuel consumption can- information screen is switched to the warning
not be measured, a bar graph is not shown. display screen.
 The display setting can be changed to the Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK), L/100 sary measures. Refer to “Warning display list
km or km/L}.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
on page 5-116. NOTE
on page 5-105. When the cause of the warning display is  Warning display screens with a “ ” or
 It is possible to cancel the green bar graph. eliminated, the warning display goes out
“ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
Refer to “Changing the function settings automatically.
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” the display, press the multi-information
on page 5-105. Returning to the display screen from meter switch as follows.
before the warning display
“ ”: Press lightly.
Function setting screen Even if the cause of the warning display is “ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more.
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
that was displayed before the warning dis-
The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”,
play. Redisplay of a warning display
“Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel
consumption and speed reset method” set- If you press the multi-information meter screen
tings can be modified as desired. switch, the display screen switches to the
For further details, refer to “Changing the screen display from before the warning and When the warning is displayed, if you
function settings (With ignition switch in the
the warning (A) is displayed. lightly press the multi-information meter
“ON” position)” on page 5-105.
switch a few times, the warning display
screen you switched from is redisplayed.
NOTE Type 1 Type 2
 The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (°F or °C).
Other interrupt displays Refer to “Changing the function settings
The operation status of each system is dis- on page 5-105.
played on the information screen.  Depending on factors such as the driving
5 For further details, refer to the appropriate
conditions, the displayed temperature may
vary from the actual outside temperature.
page in the warning display list.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays (With igni-
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on page
5-121. ECO mode indicator (if so CAUTION
equipped)  Running out of gas could damage the cata-
Selector lever position display N00568700019 lytic converter. If the warning display
appears, refuel as soon as possible.
screen {continuously variable This indicator will be displayed when fuel-
transmission (CVT)} efficient driving is achieved.
N00556400048 NOTE
Shows the position of the selector lever. Fuel remaining display screen  It may take several seconds to stabilize the
Refer to “Selector lever operation” on page N00556600125 display after refilling the tank.
5-59. Shows the amount of fuel remaining.  If fuel is added with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position, the remaining fuel dis-
play may indicate an incorrect fuel level.
Outside temperature display
screen
N00556500094 Fuel tank filler door mark
Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
filler door is located on the left side of the
vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on
page 3-3.)

2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
Fuel remaining warning display Service reminder tion is due. Contact an authorized Mit-
N00556701279
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
When the fuel level runs low, the information Displays the approximate time until the next of your choice to have the system
screen changes to the interrupt display of the recommended periodic inspection. “---” is checked.
fuel remaining warning display and the mark displayed when the inspection time has
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes arrived. At that time, when the ignition switch is
slowly. If this warning display appears, refuel switched from the “OFF” position to the
as soon as possible.
NOTE “ON” position, the warning display is dis-
5
 Shows the time until the periodic inspection played for a few seconds on the informa-
Type 1 every 6 months and 7,500 miles tion screen.
(12,000 km). Type 1
Type 1
Type 2
Type 2
Type 2
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an

1. Shows the time until the next periodic authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
NOTE
inspection. displays the time until the next periodic
 On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
inspection.
NOTE
 Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
km) and the time in units of 1 month.

2. Press and hold the multi-information
To reset CAUTION
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
 The customer is responsible for making sure
The “---” display can be reset while the igni- more) to display “ ” and make it flash. that regular inspections and maintenance and
tion switch is in the “OFF” position. When (If there is no operation for about 10 sec- periodic inspections and maintenance are
the display is reset, the time until the next onds with this indicator flashing, the dis- performed.
periodic inspection is displayed and the warn- play returns to the previous screen.) Inspections and maintenance must be per-
3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
ing display is no longer displayed when the
5 ignition switch is switched from the “OFF” press the multi-information meter switch, tions.
position to the “ON” position. the screen switches from “---” to

“CLEAR”. After that, the time until the
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa- next periodic inspection is shown. NOTE
tion meter switch, the information screen  The “---” display cannot be reset while the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
changes to the service reminder display
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
screen. Type 1
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
play is reset and the time until the next
periodic inspection is displayed.
Type 1  If you accidentally reset the display, consult
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
Type 2
assistance.
Type 2 Door ajar warning display

“ON” position)
N00555700145
If any of the doors or the trunk lid is not com-

pletely closed, this displays the open door or
trunk lid.
If the speed increases to about 5 mph (8
km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a buzzer will

sound 4 times to inform you that a door is Fully apply the parking brake and move
ajar. the shift lever into the “N” position (man- Type 1
The buzzer will not sound if only the trunk lid ual transaxle) or the selector lever {con-
is open. tinuously variable transmission (CVT)}
Type 1 into the “P” position.
2. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
tion meter switch, the information screen
changes to the function setting screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With igni-
Type 2
5
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on
page 5-98.
Type 2
Type 1 Type 2
NOTE
 To return the menu screen to the function set-
ting screen, press and hold the multi-infor-
CAUTION mation meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
 Always make sure that the warning display more).
goes out before beginning to drive.
 If no operations are made within about 15
seconds of the menu screen being displayed,
the display returns to the function setting
Changing the function settings CAUTION screen.
(With ignition switch in the  For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.
While driving, even if you operate the multi-
“ON” position) 4. Select the item to change on the menu
information meter switch, the function set-
screen and change to the desired setting.
N00556801241 ting screen is not displayed.
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place. For further details on the operation meth-
ods, refer to the following sections.
more) to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for 1. Press and hold the multi-information
Manual reset mode
average fuel consumption and average meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
speed” on page 5-106. more) to switch from the setting mode • If you press and hold the multi-informa-
Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption screen to the menu screen. tion meter switch when the average fuel
display unit” on page 5-107. Refer to “Changing the function settings consumption and average speed are dis-
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- played, these calculations will be reset to
on page 5-108. tion)” on page 5-105. zero.
Refer to “Changing the display language” 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
5 on page 5-108. switch to select “AVG” (average fuel con-
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on sumption and average speed setting). “LOCK” position, the mode setting
page 5-109. changes automatically from manual to
Refer to “Changing the amount of time Type 1 auto.
until “REST REMINDER” is displayed” Switching to auto occurs automatically.
on page 5-109. If switching to manual mode is done,
Refer to “Changing the turn signal sound” however, the data from the last reset is
on page 5-110. displayed.
Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel
consumption display (Type 2)” on page Type 2 Auto reset mode
5-110.
Refer to “Returning to the factory set- • When the average fuel consumption and
tings” on page 5-111. average speed are being displayed, if you
hold down the multi-information meter
switch, these calculations will be reset to
Changing the reset mode for aver- zero.
age fuel consumption and average • When the ignition switch has been set to
speed 3. Press and hold the multi-information the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for
N00557000184 meter switch (for about 2 seconds or about 4 hours or more, the average fuel
You can change the mode condition for the more) to switch in sequence from A or 1 consumption display and the average
average fuel consumption and average speed (Auto reset mode) M, 2 or P (Manual speed display will automatically reset.
display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset”. reset mode) A or 1 (Auto reset mode).
The setting will change to the selected
mode condition.

NOTE Type 1
 The average speed display and average fuel
consumption display can be reset separately Type 1 Type 2
in both auto reset mode and manual reset
mode.
 The average speed display memories and
average fuel consumption memories for auto
Type 2
reset mode and manual reset mode are erased
if the battery is disconnected.
5
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.
Changing the fuel consumption

display unit
3. Press and hold the multi-information 5. Press and hold the multi-information
N00557100130
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
The fuel consumption display unit can be more) to display “AVG UNIT” (fuel con- more) to change the setting to the selected
changed. The distance, speed, and amount sumption display unit setting). unit.
units are also changed to match the selected 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
fuel consumption unit. switch to switch in sequence from km/L
 L/100 km  mpg (US)  mpg (UK)
NOTE
1. Press and hold the multi-information  The display units for the driving range, the
 RETURN  km/L.
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or average fuel consumption, the average speed
more) to change from the setting mode and the momentary fuel consumption are
screen to the menu screen. changed, but the units for the indicating nee-
Refer to “Changing the function settings dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- odometer will remain unchanged.
tion)” on page 5-105.  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}.
switch to select “AVG UNIT” (fuel con-
sumption display unit setting).

The distance and speed units are also changed 1. Press and hold the multi-information
Type 1
in the following combinations to match the meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
selected fuel consumption unit. more) to change from the setting mode
Distance Speed Refer to “Changing the function settings
Fuel econ-
(driving (average (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
omy
range) speed) tion)” on page 5-105.
Type 2
5 mpg (US) mile (s) mph
switch to select “LANGUAGE” (lan-
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph guage setting).
km /L km km /h
Type 1
L /100 km km km /h
Changing the temperature unit

N00557200102
The temperature display unit can be changed.
more) to change in sequence from °F  Type 2
1. Press and hold the multi-information °C  °F.
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or The setting is changed to the selected tem-
more) to change from the setting mode perature unit.
Refer to “Changing the function settings NOTE
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
tion)” on page 5-105. the unit setting is erased and is automatically
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter set to °F (°C). 3. Press and hold the multi-information
switch to select “ ” (temperature unit
more) to display “LANGUAGE” (lan-
setting). Changing the display language guage setting).
N00557300145 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
The language of the multi-information dis- switch to select the desired language.
play can be changed.

Type 1 Changing the amount of time until
more) to change the setting to the selected “REST REMINDER” is displayed
N00557500121
language.
The amount of time until the display appears
NOTE can be changed.
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the language setting is erased and is automat- Type 2 1. Press and hold the multi-information
ically set to ENGLISH. meter switch (for about 2 seconds or 5
 If “---” is selected in the language setting, a more) to switch from the setting mode
warning message is not displayed when there screen to the menu screen.
is a warning display or interrupt display. Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion)” on page 5-105.
Operation sound setting 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
N00557400104 3. Press and hold the multi-information switch to select “ALARM” (rest time set-
You can turn off the operation sounds of the meter switch (for about 2 seconds or ting).
multi-information meter switch and rheostat more) to switch in sequence from ON
Type 1
meter illumination button. (operation sound on)  OFF (operation
sound off)  ON (operation sound on).
1. Press and hold the multi-information The setting is changed to the selected con-
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or dition.
more) to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen. NOTE
Refer to “Changing the function settings  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of Type 2
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- the operation sound setting is erased and is
tion)” on page 5-105. automatically set to “ON” (operation sound
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter on).
 The operation sound setting only deactivates
switch to select “ ” (operation sound
the operation sound of the multi-information
setting). meter switch and rheostat meter illumination
button. The warning display and other
sounds cannot be deactivated.

3. Press and hold the multi-information 3. Press and hold the multi-information
Changing the turn signal sound
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
N00563500038
more) to display “ALARM” (rest time to switch in sequence from 1 (turn signal
setting). It is possible to change the turn signal sound. sound 1)  2 (turn signal sound 2)  1
(turn signal sound 1).
The setting changes to the selected turn
Type 1 Type 2 meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
signal sound.
to switch from the setting mode screen to
5 the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings Changing the momentary fuel con-
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- sumption display (Type 2)
tion)” on page 5-105. N00563600013
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter It is possible to change the bar graph setting
switch to select . (changing the turn of the momentary fuel consumption display.
signal sound)
4. Lightly press the multi-information meter Type 1 meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
switch to select the amount of time until to switch from the setting mode screen to
the display appears. the menu screen.
5. Press and hold the multi-information Refer to “Changing the function settings
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
more) to change the setting to the selected tion)” on page 5-105.
time. Type 2 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
NOTE switch to select . (changing the

 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
momentary fuel consumption display)
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
set to the “OFF”.
 The drive time is reset when the ignition
switch is in the “OFF” position.

switch to select “RESET” (return to the
NOTE
• Cooperative language setting: A
factory settings).
• Operation sounds: ON (Operation sound
Type 1 on)
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF
• Turn signal sound: Turn signal sound 1
• Momentary fuel consumption with the
green bar graph (Type 2): ON 5
Type 2
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
to switch in sequence from ON (with the
green bar graph)  OFF (without the
green bar graph)  ON (with the green
bar graph).
The setting changes to the selected bar
graph setting. 3. Press and hold the multi-information
more), the buzzer sounds and all of the
Returning to the factory settings function settings are returned to the fac-
N00557600148
tory settings.
All of the function settings can be returned to
their factory settings. NOTE
 The factory settings are as follows.
1. Press and hold the multi-information • Average fuel consumption and average
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
more) to change from the setting mode • Fuel consumption display unit: mpg (US)
screen to the menu screen. or (L/100 km)
Refer to “Changing the function settings • Temperature unit: °F (Fahrenheit) or {°C
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- (Centigrade)}
tion)” on page 5-105. • Display language: ENGLISH

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

N00557700035
Indicator and warning light list

N00557801323
Type A Type B
5
1- Position indicator P.5-123 7- Tire pressure monitoring system warn- 12- ECO mode indicator (if so equipped)
2- High beam indicator P.5-123 ing light P.5-84 P.5-102
3- Charging system warning light 8- Brake warning light P.5-124 13- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
P.5-125 9- Cruise control indicator (if so VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
4- Turn signal indicator/hazard warning equipped) P.5-81 engine light”) P.5-124
light P.5-123 10- Seat belt reminder/warning light 14- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
5- Front fog light indicator (if so P.4-10 indicator (if so equipped) P.5-78
equipped) P.5-123 11- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 15- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
6- Anti-lock braking system warning light warning light (if so equipped) P.5-78
P.5-74  P.4-26 16- Information screen display list
P.5-113

Information screen display list

N00557900024
When there is information to be announced, such as light reminders, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer
to the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “OFF” position)” on page 5-113.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-116.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-121. 5
NOTE
 In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of installed electronics (including after-market parts).
If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
have the system checked.
Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “OFF” position)

N00558000165
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)

 You have forgotten to remove the key  Remove the key.
from the ignition switch. Refer to “Key reminder system” on
page 5-36.


 You have forgotten to turn off the lights.  Refer to “Light auto-cutout function
(headlights and other lights)” on page
5-129.
 The theft-alarm system is operating.  Refer to “Theft-alarm system” on page

5 5-41.
 After turning off the engine, an attempt  Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
was made to open the driver’s door with (PUSH OFF) position.
the ignition switch in any position other Refer to “Ignition switch return
than “LOCK” (PUSH OFF). reminder system” on page 5-36.
 An attempt was made to lock all the  Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
doors and the trunk lid with the ignition (PUSH OFF) position.
switch in any position other than Refer to “Ignition switch turn-off
“LOCK” (PUSH OFF). reminder system” on page 5-20.


 There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key.  Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-12.

Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)

N00558101352
Screen type1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)

 There is a fault in the electric power  Have the vehicle inspected by an autho-
steering system (EPS). rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice as soon as
5 possible.
Refer to “Electric power steering sys-
tem (EPS)” on page 5-79.


 There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key.  Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-12.
 Immobilizer is registered.  Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system)” on page 5-4,
5-27.


 The brake fluid level is low.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and con-
 There is a fault in the brake system. tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
for assistance.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on
page 5-125.
5  There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed
system. driving, park the vehicle in a safe place,
and take corrective measures. Refer to
“Anti-lock braking system warning
light/display” on page 5-74.
 The tire pressure in one of the tires  Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
(except spare tire) is low. tem” on page 5-84.
 There is a fault in the Tire Pressure  Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
Monitoring System. tem” on page 5-84.
 One of the doors or the trunk lid is not  Close the door or trunk lid.
completely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display
The open door or open trunk lid is dis- (With ignition switch in the “OFF”
played. position)” on page 5-96.


 The engine hood is open.  Close the engine hood.
Refer to “Engine hood” on page 9-3.
 The engine is overheated.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures. 5
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page
8-4.
 The continuously variable transmission  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
(CVT) fluid temperature is increased. corrective measures.
Refer to “Continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT)” on page 5-59.
 The seat belt is not fastened when the  Fasten your seat belt properly. Refer to
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. “Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning
light and display” on page 4-10.
 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice to have the system checked.
 The vehicle is being driven with the  Release the parking brake. Refer to
parking brake still applied. “Brake warning display” on page
5-125.


 There is a fault in the engine oil circula-  Park your vehicle in a safe place as
tion system. soon as possible and contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the
system checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display”
5 on page 5-126.
 There is a fault in the charging system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as
soon as possible and contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assis-
tance.
Refer to “Charging system warning dis-
play” on page 5-126.
 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
seat belt pre-tensioner system. Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice to have the system checked,
immediately.
Refer to “SRS warning light/display”
on page 4-26.
 There is a fault in the Active Stability  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Control (ASC). Motors dealer or a repair facility of
Refer to “Active Stability Control
(ASC)” on page 5-76.


 There is a fault in the electronically  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
controlled 4WD system. Motors dealer or a repair facility of
Refer to “Electronically controlled
4WD system” on page 5-68.
 There is a fault in the CVT.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of 5
Refer to “Continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT)” on page 5-59.
 The electronically controlled 4WD sys-  Refer to “Electronically controlled
tem is hot. 4WD system” on page 5-68.
 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible. Refer to

“Fuel remaining display screen” on
page 5-102.
 The outside temperature is 37 °F (3 °C)  Be careful driving on frozen ground.

or less.  The ground may be frozen even when
this warning is not displayed, so drive
carefully.
Other interrupt displays (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)

N00558200239
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.


Screen type 1 Screen type 2 System operation status Reference
 When “2WD” drive mode is selected with  Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD
the drive mode selector. system” on page 5-68.
 When “4WD AUTO” mode is selected

5 with the drive mode selector.
 When “4WD LOCK” mode is selected

with the drive mode selector.
 When the Active Stability Control (ASC)  Refer to “Active Stability Control (ASC)
is operating. ”on page 5-76.
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Do this

Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details,
refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-103.

Indicators
The rest time can be set.
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Do this

Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the function settings (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” on
page 5-105. 5
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to
drive without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you to
take a rest.
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous
display screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer
encourage you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
• The multi-information meter switch is held (for about 2 seconds or more).
Indicators NOTE Front fog light indicator (if so

N00519900127  If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if equipped)
the indicator stays on without flashing, check
N00520201260
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
Turn signal indicators/Hazard turn signal connection. This indicator comes on while the front fog
warning lights lights are on.
N00520001255
The arrows will flash in time with the corre- High beam indicator Position indicator
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn N00520100086
N00551301052
signal lever is used. A blue light comes on when the headlights
This indicator light illuminates while the
are on high beam.
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn- parking lights are on.
ing flasher switch is pressed.

Warning lights
Warning lights CAUTION Engine malfunction indicator

N00520300147 • When the brake warning light does not go (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”
out even when the parking brake is
released. or “Check engine light”)
Brake warning light • When the brake warning light stays on N00520501830
N00520400467
while driving. This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-
When the ignition switch is turned to the • If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking nostic (OBD) system which monitors the
5 “ON” position, this indicator normally comes and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in emissions, engine control system or continu-
on and goes out a few seconds later. A warn- a safe place, and contact an authorized Mit- ously variable transmission (CVT) control
ing is also displayed in the multi-information subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of system. If a problem is detected in one of
display. your choice as soon as possible.
these systems, this indicator illuminates or
The warning light also illuminates after start-  The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to
ing the engine under the following condi- following manner when brake performance
the “ON” position, this indicator normally
is deteriorated.
tions: comes on and goes off after the engine has
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
you press down on the brake pedal harder started.
 When the parking brake is still applied.
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
 When the brake fluid level is low. This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
may go all the way to the floor.
 When the brake force distribution func- filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
tion is not operating correctly. indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
parking brake. ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise
is fully released and brake warning light is stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you. until you hear clicking sounds.)
off.  Do not suddenly apply the parking brake If this indicator does not go off after several
while driving. This may cause the rear seconds or lights up while driving, have the
CAUTION wheels to lock and cause an accident. system checked as soon as possible at an
 If the brake warning light and the anti-lock authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
braking system warning light are illuminated repair facility of your choice.
at the same time, the braking force distribu-
tion function will not operate, so the vehicle
may be destabilized during sudden braking
under the following conditions.

Information screen display
CAUTION NOTE Information screen display

 Driving for a long time with the engine mal-  Do not disconnect the battery cable when the N00558300025
function indicator on may cause more dam- engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE
age to the emission control system. This ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil- on.
Brake warning display
N00558400084
ity. The engine electronic control module stores
 If this indicator does not come on when the critical OBD information (especially exhaust Type 1
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position,
have the system checked at an authorized
emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
tery cable is disconnected while the engine
5
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
of your choice. difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
 If the engine malfunction indicator comes on lems.
while the engine is running, avoid driving at
high speeds. Type 2
During vehicle operation with the indicator Charging system warning light
on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you
N00520600296
depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi- This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal tion in the charging system or when the igni-
more firmly than usual since the engine tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi- (engine off). A warning is also displayed in This warning is displayed if the vehicle is
cle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to the multi-information display. When the being driven with the parking brake still
creep forward. engine is started, the light should go out. applied. The warning light in the instrument
Check to make sure that the light has gone cluster only comes on when the parking brake
out before driving. is applied.
CAUTION CAUTION
 If the warning light stays on while the engine  If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place parking brake, the brakes will overheat,
as soon as possible and contact an authorized resulting in ineffective braking and possible
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility brake failure.
of your choice to have the system checked. If this warning is displayed while driving,
release the parking brake.

Information screen display

Type 1 Type 2
CAUTION
 If the brake warning display, brake warning
light, and the Anti-lock braking system
warning light are illuminated at the same
time, the braking force distribution function
will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta-
bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden
Type 2 If there is a fault in the charging system, the
5 braking and high-speed driving. Park the
vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
warning display is displayed on the informa-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair tion screen in the multi-information display.
facility of your choice. The warning light in the instrument cluster
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the also illuminates.
following manner when brake performance
is deteriorated. CAUTION
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
“ON” position, if the brake fluid is low, this  If warnings are displayed while the engine is
you press down on the brake pedal harder
warning is displayed. running, park your vehicle in a safe place as
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
The warning light in the instrument cluster soon as possible and contact an authorized
may go all the way to the floor.
also illuminates. • Should the brakes fail, use engine braking of your choice to have the system checked.
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
CAUTION parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
 If this warning stays on and does not go out
stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you. Oil pressure warning display
while driving, there is a danger of ineffective N00558700045
braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a
Type 1
safe place, and contact an authorized Mit- Charging system warning dis-
your choice.
play
N00558600057
Type 1

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

Type 2
Combination headlights and
dimmer switch
N00522501850
Headlights
If the engine oil pressure drops while the
engine is running, the warning display is dis-
NOTE
5
played on the information screen in the multi-
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights
information display.
on for a long period of time when the engine
is not running. The battery will run down.
OFF All lights off
CAUTION  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
 If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is washed, the inside of the lens sometimes Parking, tail, front and rear side-
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn- becomes foggy. This is the same as when marker lights, license plate and
ing is displayed, the engine may overheat window glass mists up on a humid day, and instrument panel lights on
and damage may result. does not indicate a problem. When the light
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.
Headlights and other lights on
 If the warning is displayed while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place However, if water collects inside the light,
as soon as possible and check the engine oil have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi If your vehicle is equipped with daytime run-
level. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your ning lights, the combinations of switch opera-
 If this warning display comes on when the choice. tions and illuminated lights differ in
engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle accordance with the following conditions.
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Type 1 [When the engine is started after the parking
brake is released]
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
NOTE The daytime running lights illumi-
 The oil pressure warning display does not
OFF
nated
show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
checked using the dipstick.


The daytime running lights illumi- If your vehicle is equipped with daytime run-
NOTE ning lights, the combinations of switch opera-
nated  Once the daytime running light come on,
Parking (vehicles with daytime run- tions and illuminated lights differ in
they do not go out until the key is turned to
ning lights on the headlights), tail, accordance with the following conditions.
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
front and rear side-marker lights,
[When the engine is started after the parking
license plate and instrument panel
lights on
Type 2 brake is released]
5 Headlights and other lights on Rotate the switch to operate the lights. The daytime running lights illumi-
OFF
nated
NOTE The daytime running lights illumi-
 Once the daytime running light come on, nated (when it is light outside the
they do not go out until the key is turned to vehicle)
AUTO
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position. Headlights and other lights turn on
and off automatically in accor-
dance with outside light level.
[When the engine is not running, or when the
engine is started before the parking brake is The daytime running lights illumi-
released] nated
Parking (vehicles with daytime
OFF All lights off running lights on the headlights),
tail, front and rear side-marker
Parking, tail, front and rear side- OFF All lights off lights, license plate and instrument
marker lights, license plate and
Headlights and other lights turn on panel lights on
instrument panel lights on
AUTO and off automatically in accor- Headlights and other lights on
Headlights and other lights on dance with outside light level.
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and NOTE
NOTE instrument panel lights on  Once the daytime running light come on,
 Even if the daytime running lights are not on, they do not go out until the key is turned to
they will come on once the vehicle starts Headlights and other lights on the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
moving.


[When the engine is not running, or when the • If the driver’s door is opened after the
engine is started before the parking brake is
NOTE key is removed from the ignition switch,
 Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic
released] a high-pitched constant tone will sound
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to
to remind you to turn off the lights.
the windshield.
OFF All lights off • If the driver’s door is opened with the
Headlights and other lights turn on key in the ignition switch, a low-pitched
AUTO and off automatically in accor- tone will sound to remind you to remove
the key.
dance with outside light level. 5
Parking, tail, front and rear side- [When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
marker lights, license plate and engine]
instrument panel lights on • If the ignition switch is turned to the
Headlights and other lights on “LOCK” position and the driver’s door
 If the lights do not turn on or off with the is opened, a high-pitched constant
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually
buzzer will sound to remind you to turn
operate the switch and we recommend you to
NOTE have your vehicle checked.
off the lights.
 Even if the daytime running lights are not on, • If the ignition switch is turned to any
they will come on once the vehicle starts position other than “LOCK” and the
moving. Light auto-cutout function driver’s door is opened, a low-pitched
 Once the daytime running light come on, (headlights and other lights) constant buzzer will sound to remind
they do not go out until the key is turned to N00532601607 you to return the ignition switch.
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.  If the ignition key is turned to “LOCK” or
 The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con- “ACC” position or removed from the  If the ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”
trol can be adjusted. or “ACC” position with the driver’s door
ignition switch and the driver’s door is
For further information, please contact your closed and the combination headlights
opened with the combination headlights
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice. and dimmer switch in the “ ” or “ ” and dimmer switch in the “ ” or “ ”
position, the lights automatically turn off. position, the lights will stay on for about 3
minutes and then turn off automatically.
[When using a key to start the engine]


if the ignition switch is moved to the
NOTE NOTE “LOCK” position while the lights are on, the
 The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-  When the engine is started using the keyless
buzzer will sound to remind you to turn off
vated. operation function, if the driver’s door is
the lights.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors opened and the ignition switch is in the
dealer for details. “LOCK” position, the headlight reminder
In either case, the lights and buzzer will turn
buzzer intermittently emits a high-pitched
sound. If the ignition switch is in any posi-
off automatically.
Or you can turn the combination headlights
5 When you want to keep the lights tion other than “LOCK”, the ignition switch
on reminder buzzer intermittently emits a and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position to
on: low-pitched sound. stop the buzzer.
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is
If the combination headlights and dimmer closed. (A warning is also displayed in the
multi-information display.)
Dimmer (high/low beam
switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-
tion again after the engine is turned off, the
change)
about 3 minutes auto-cutout function Headlight reminder buzzer N00549900155
described above will not work. The lights (the N00549800196

To change the headlights from high beam to
parking lights, tail lights and license plate low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto- lever to fully toward you (1). Switch the
When using a key to start the
matically. headlights to low beam as a courtesy when-
engine ever there are oncoming vehicles, or when
there is traffic moving ahead of you. An illu-
NOTE If the driver’s door is opened with the key in minated blue light in the instrument cluster
 When the engine is started using the key, if the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed indicates when the headlights are on high
the driver’s door is opened and the key is from the ignition switch while the lights are beam.
removed, the headlight reminder buzzer
on, the buzzer will sound to remind you to
intermittently emits a high-pitched sound. If
the key is still in the ignition the key
turn off the lights.
reminder buzzer intermittently emits a low-
pitched sound. When using the F.A.S.T.-key to
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is
start the engine
closed. (A warning is also displayed in the
multi-information display.)
If the driver’s door is opened with the ignition
switch in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, or

Welcome light (for vehicles with NOTE

the theft-alarm system) • Push the LOCK button (B) on the remote
N00563201218
control transmitter.
This function turns on the front side-marker

and parking lights for about 30 seconds after
the UNLOCK button (A) on the remote con-
trol transmitter is pressed when the combina-
tion headlights and dimmer switch is in the
5
“OFF” or “AUTO” position (for vehicles
equipped with the automatic light control).
On vehicles equipped with the automatic light
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-
control, the welcome light function will oper-
Headlight flasher ate only when it is dark outside the vehicle. mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
N00550000198 • Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
You can flash the high beams by pulling the tion.
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
go back to normal when you let go. While the • The headlights can be set to come on in the
high beam is on, you will see a blue light on low beam setting.
the instrument panel. • The welcome light function can be deacti-
vated.
NOTE dealer.
 You can flash the high beams by pulling the
lever toward you, even if the combination
headlights and dimmer switch is off. Coming home light
N00547300054
 If you turn the lights off with the headlights
set to high-beam illumination, the headlights This function turns on the headlights in the
are automatically returned to their low-beam NOTE low beam setting for about 30 seconds after
setting when the combination headlights and  While the welcome light function is operat-
the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
ing, perform one of the following operations
dimmer switch is next turned to the “ ” position.
to cancel the function.
position.

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)

1. Turn the combination headlights and dim- 4. The headlights will come on in the low
mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO” beam setting for about 30 seconds. After Headlight leveling switch (if
position (for vehicles equipped with the the headlights go off, the headlights can so equipped)
automatic light control). be turned on again in the low beam setting N00537100088
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn
position. Also, if a key was used to start signal lever toward you within 60 seconds The direction of the headlight beam (the
the engine, remove the key from the igni- of turning the ignition switch to the direction in which the light shines) alters
tion switch. “LOCK” position. To turn on the head- according to the number of people and the
5 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition lights again after 60 seconds of turning load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle
switch to the “LOCK” position, pull the the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- if it is too high due to the number of people
turn signal lever toward you. tion, repeat the process from step 1. and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head-
lights’ glare does not distract the drivers of
approaching vehicles. First set the combina-
NOTE tion headlights and dimmer switch to the
 While the coming home light function is
“ ” position, then turn the headlight level-
operating, perform one of the following
operations to cancel the function.
ing switch knob to lower the beam. The
• Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
greater the number on the headlight leveling
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-
switch knob, the lower the beam will point.
Set the switch to the appropriate position so
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
that the headlight beam is level with the road.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion.
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• The time that the headlights remain on can
be changed.
• The coming home light function can be
deactivated.
dealer.

Turn signal lever
NOTE Hazard warning flasher

 Start adjusting when the knob is at the “0”
position (when the beam is at its highest).
switch
N00522700217
 Keep the knob in the “0” position except
when using the knob to lower the headlight
beam angle.
 Always return the knob to the “0” position
when the load is removed and the people
have left the vehicle.
5
Turn signal lever NOTE

N00522601545
 A light in the instrument panel flashes to
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual show when the front and rear turn signal
turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi- lights are working properly. If you press the flasher switch, the front and
tion (1). It will return to the neutral position If this light flashes faster than usual, check rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and
when you let go. Use the full position (2) for a burned out light bulb or malfunctioning so will the hazard warning lights. This is an
when making a normal turn. The lever will connection.
emergency warning system and should not be
If the panel light does not come on when the
return to the neutral position when the turn is used when the vehicle is in motion, except for
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
complete. There may be times when the lever burned out bulb in the panel. emergencies.
does not return to the neutral position. This Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
usually happens when the steering wheel is Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility will keep working after the ignition key is
turned only slightly. You can easily return the of your choice. removed.
lever by hand.  The turn signal light 3-flash function for lane
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly changes can be deactivated.
NOTE
then release it, the turn signal lights and indi- See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 If you keep the flashers on for several hours
cator light in the instrument cluster will flash dealer for details.
with the engine turned off, the battery will
three times.  You can adjust the time required to operate
run down.
the lever for the 3-flash function.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.

Front fog light switch (if so equipped)

and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
Front fog light switch (if so NOTE motor may be damaged.
 If the combination headlights and dimmer
equipped)
switch is rotated to the “OFF” or “ ” posi-
N00522801462
tion while the front fog lights are illumi-
The front fog lights illuminate only when the nated, they will automatically turn off. They
headlights are on low beam. can be turned back on again by rotating the
combination headlights and dimmer switch
Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”
5 position turns on the front fog lights as well back to “ ” position, and turning the knob
as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To in the direction of the “ON” position.
turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
the “OFF” position. Wiper and washer switch
The knob will return to the neutral position N00523000608
when it is released.
MIST- Misting function
CAUTION The wipers will operate once.
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the
OFF- Off
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
the glass with the defroster before using the LO- Slow
washer. HI- Fast
Windshield wipers To adjust intermittent intervals

N00569201034
N00542900013
With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive
Except for vehicle with rain sensor intermittent operation) position, the intermit-
tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the
NOTE N00569100010
knob (A).
 If the headlights are switched to high beam, The windshield wiper and washer can be
the front fog lights will go out; they will illu- operated with the ignition switch in the “ON”
minate again when the headlights are or “ACC” position.
switched back to low beam. If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted

Wiper and washer switch
1- Fast MIST- Misting function

2- Slow The wipers will operate once if the wiper The wipers will operate once.
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and OFF- Off
released. This operation is useful when it is AUTO- Auto-wiper control
NOTE drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to Rain sensor
 The speed-sensitive-operation function of operate while the lever is held in the “MIST” The wipers will automatically
the windshield wipers can be deactivated. position. operate depending on the amount
For further information, please contact your of moisture on the windshield.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Vehicle with rain sensor LO- Slow
repair facility of your choice. N00569400013 HI- Fast
The windshield wipers can be operated with
the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC”
Misting function Rain sensor (if so equipped)
position.
N00569300012
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or N00569501037
The misting function can be used when the rear window, do not operate the wipers until
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” Can only be used when the ignition switch is
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
position. “ON” position.
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the
rain sensor (B) will detect the extent of rain
(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the
wipers will operate automatically.


Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.
CAUTION NOTE
If your hands get trapped, you could suffer  The wipers may automatically operate when
Wiper operation under these conditions can
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. To things such as insects or foreign objects are
scratch the windshield and damage the wip-
deactivate the rain sensor, place the lever in affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
ers. the “OFF” position. sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
5 NOTE them. To operate the wipers again, move the
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this lever to the “LO” or “HI” position. Also, the
operation of the wipers does not take place wipers may operate automatically due to
even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” posi- strong direct sunlight or electromagnetic
tion when the vehicle is stationary and the wave. To stop the wipers, move the lever to
ambient temperature is about 32 °F (0 °C) or the “OFF” position.
lower.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker dealer or a repair facility of your choice
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put when replacing the windshield glass.
any water-repellent coating on the wind-
shield. The rain sensor would not be able to To adjust the sensitivity of the rain
CAUTION detect the extent of rain, and the wipers
sensor
 With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi- might stop working normally.
N00569601038
tion and the lever in the “AUTO” position,  In the following cases, the rain sensor may
the wipers may automatically operate in the be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor)
situations described below. at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity
• When cleaning the outside surface of the a repair facility of your choice. of the rain sensor by turning the knob (C).
windshield, if you touch the rain sensor. • When the wipers operate at a constant inter-
• When cleaning the outside surface of the val despite changes in the extent of rain.
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain • When the wipers do not operate even
sensor. though it is raining.
• When using an automatic car wash.
• A physical shock is applied to the wind-
shield.
• A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-
sor.


(D) is turned in the “+” direction when the
C ignition switch is “ON” position.
Windshield washer
N00504601370
To turn on the windshield washer, pull the

lever toward you with the ignition switch in
either the “ON” or “ACC” position. 5
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain When the wipers are not in operation or in
“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain The wipers will operate once if the lever is
intermittent operation, by pulling the lever
raised to the “MIST” position and released
toward you, the wipers will operate several
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
NOTE “ACC” position. The wipers will continue to
 It is possible to activate the following func- operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
tions. position.
• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive)
can be changed to intermittent operation
D
(vehicle speed-sensitive, or at adjustable
intervals).
For further information, please contact your
repair facility of your choice.
Misting function
N00569700016 NOTE
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow  It is possible to modify function so that the
and release, to operate the wipers once. The wipers will operate once if the lever is wipers cannot be operated when the washer
Use this function when you are driving in moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob fluid is sprayed. For details, consult an
mist or drizzle. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Electric rear window defogger switch
NOTE NOTE Electric rear window defog-

 It is possible to modify functions as follows:  Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
ger switch
• Intelligent washer can be activated.
N00523700315
Refer to “Intelligent washer” on page 5-138 wiper blades prematurely.
• The wipers can be set to operate again after  Before using the wipers in cold weather, The electric rear window defogger can be
about 6 seconds. check to be sure that the wiper blades are not used when the engine is running.
These functions are not activated when the frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers The indicator light (A) will come on when
5 vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti- while the blades are frozen could cause the
wiper motor to burn out.
you press the electric rear window defogger
vate or deactivate these functions, please switch. Electric current will flow through the
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors  If the moving wipers become blocked part- heating wires on the rear window to help
dealer. way through a sweep by ice or other deposits clear away moisture or frost.
on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop
operating to prevent the motor from over-
Intelligent washer heating. In this case, park the vehicle in a
safe place, turn the ignition switch to the
By releasing the lever soon after pulling it “OFF” position and then remove the ice or
toward you, the washer fluid will be sprayed other deposits. Because the wipers will start
several times while the wipers are operating operating again after the wiper motor cools
down, check that the wipers operate before
several times.
using them.
Intelligent washer will stop operating with
 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
any operation of the lever.
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer
when the fluid reservoir is empty or the
Precautions to observe when pump may fail.
 During cold weather, add a recommended
using wipers and washers washer solution that will not freeze in the
After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys-
N00523501293 tem will shut off automatically.
washer reservoir. Otherwise the washer may
not work or may be damaged. To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-
CAUTION  Replace the wiper blades when they are utes have passed, press the switch again. The
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the worn. Use the proper size replacement indicator light will go out and the defogger
washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might blades. If you have questions, ask your will turn off.
freeze, blocking your view. In cold weather, authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If you need the defogger for more than 20
heat the glass with the defroster before using minutes, press the switch again. This will add
the washer.
20 more minutes.

Horn switch
Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio” on page
CAUTION 7-41.
 The rear window defogger is not designed to
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
before using the rear window defogger.
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
 Use the rear window defogger only after the
engine has started and is running. Be sure to
turn the defogger switch off immediately Link System End User License
after the window is clear to save on battery
power.
Agreement 5
N00563801041
 Do not place stickers, tape, or other items
that are attached with adhesive over the grid You have acquired a device that includes soft-
wires on the rear window. ware licensed to Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a tion from Visteon Corporation, and their
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid Link System (if so equipped) subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a com-
wires. N00563701125 plete list of these 3rd party products and their
end user license agreements, please go to the
The Link System control of the devices con-
following website.
NOTE nected via the USB input terminal or the
http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis-
 If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir- Bluetooth® 2.0 interface; the system allows closure.pdf
rors, mist can also be removed from the out- the connected device to be operated by using
side rearview mirrors when the rear window the switches in the vehicle or voice com-
defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to mands. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so
“Heated mirror” on page 5-52.) See the following section for details on how equipped)
to operate. N00563901228
Horn switch Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak-
N00523801225 5-139. ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle
Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-160. using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone
To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark
Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB based on the wireless communication tech-
on the steering wheel.
Device” on page 7-35.
Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device nology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It
tracks via voice operation” on page 7-38. also allows the user to play music, saved in a

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Bluetooth® music player, from the vehicle’s WARNING NOTE
speakers.  Refer to and comply with all state and  For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
The system is equipped with a voice recogni- local laws in your area regarding cellular refer to the following website:
tion function, which allows you to make phone usage while driving. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
hands-free calls by simple switch operations You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
and voice command operations using a America website.
defined voice tree. NOTE [For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
5 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used
 If the ignition switch is left in the “ACC” You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
site.
position, the accessory power will automati-
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or cally turn off after a certain period of time Please read and agree to the “Warning about
“ACC” position. and you will no longer be able to use the Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”,
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory the websites mentioned above may connect
you to websites other than the Mitsubishi
Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- power comes on again if the ignition switch
is turned from the “ACC” position. Refer to Motors website.
face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
“ACC power auto-cutout function” on page
and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con- 5-53. ucts/index.html
necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and  Software updates by cellular phone/digital
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used
audio device manufacturers may
Bluetooth® device” on page 5-146. if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery change/alter device connectivity.
or the device power is turned off.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of  Hands-free calls will not be possible if your Steering control switch and microphone 
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. phone does not have service available. P.5-141
 Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible Voice recognition function  P.5-142
WARNING with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Useful voice commands  P.5-143
 You can confirm the Link System software Speaker enrollment function  P.5-144
 Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
allows you to make hands-free calls, if you
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3 Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
times (press and hold 2 times and then press
choose to use the cellular phone while the Bluetooth® device  P.5-146
briefly) within 10 seconds.
driving, you must not allow yourself to be Operating a music player connected via Blue-
distracted from the safe operation of your
tooth®  P.5-150
vehicle. Anything, including cellular
phone usage, that distracts you from the How to make or receive hands-free calls 
safe operation of your vehicle increases P.5-150
your risk of an accident. Phonebook function  P.5-153


• In such circumstances, you can press the
Steering control switch and Volume down button
button briefly to switch between callers.
microphone You will switch to the first caller and the
N00564001200 Press this button to decrease the volume. other caller will be put on hold.
• To establish a three-way call in such situ-
SPEECH button ations, press the SPEECH button to enter
voice recognition mode and then say
 Press this button to change to voice recog- “Join calls.”
nition mode. 5
While the system is in voice recognition
mode, “Listening” will appear on the
HANG-UP button
audio display.  Press this button when an incoming call is
 If you press the button briefly while in received to refuse the call.
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt  Press this button during a call to end the
prompting and allow voice command current call.
input. When another call is on hold, you will
Pressing the button longer will deactivate switch to that call.
the voice recognition mode.  If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
1- Volume up button  Pressing this button briefly during a call nition mode, the voice recognition mode
2- Volume down button will enable voice recognition and allow will be deactivated.
3- SPEECH button voice command input.
4- PICK-UP button
5- HANG-UP button NOTE
PICK-UP button
6- Microphone  When you press the SPEECH button to enter
voice recognition mode with a cellular phone
 Press this button when an incoming call is
paired to the system, current information on
received to answer the telephone.
the cellular phone, such as “remaining bat-
Volume up button  When another call is received during a tery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,”
call, press this button to put the first caller will be displayed on the audio display.*
Press this button to increase the volume. on hold and talk to the new caller. *: Some cellular phones will not send this
information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.

NOTE Voice recognition function Selecting the language

 Call waiting and three-way calls can be used N00564101171
1. Press the SPEECH button.
by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped 2. Say “Setup.”
possible to use those services with your cel-
with a voice recognition function. 3. Say “Language.”
lular phone.
Simply say voice commands and you can per- 4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan-
form various operations and make or receive guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa-
Microphone hands-free calls.
5 N00575800025
nese.” Say the desired language.
(Example: “English”)
Your voice will be recognized by a micro- With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec- 5. The voice guide will say “English (Span-
phone in the overhead console, allowing you ognition is possible for US English, North ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this
to make hands-free calls with voice com- American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap- correct?” Say “Yes.”
mands. anese. The factory setting is “English.” If you say “No,” the system will return to
Step 4.
NOTE NOTE
 If a cellular phone is within close proximity  If the voice command that you say differs NOTE
of the microphone, it may distort the sound from the predefined command or cannot be  The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
quality. In this case, place the cellular phone recognized due to ambient noise or some sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
as far as possible from the microphone. other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface rent language, and the second message is in
will ask you for the voice command again up the selected language.
to 3 times.  If many entries are registered in the vehicle
 For best performance and further reduction phonebook, changing the language will take
of ambient noise, the vehicle windows a longer time.
should be closed, lower the blower speed and  Changing the language deletes the mobile
refrain from conversation with your passen- phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0
gers while engaging the voice recognition interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
function. to import it again.
 Depending on the selected language, some
functions may not be available.


6. When the voice guide says “English When the security function is turned on, it is
Confirmation function setting
(Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,” necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit
N00564501074
the language change process will be com- passcode in order to use all functions of the
pleted and the system will return to the The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep-
main menu. with a confirmation function. tion.
With the confirmation function activated, you
are given more opportunities than normal to Setting the passcode
Useful voice commands confirm a command when making various
N00564200016
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This
Use the following procedure to turn on the 5
security function by setting a passcode.
allows you to decrease the possibility that a
Help function setting is accidentally changed.
N00564300017 1. Press the SPEECH button.
The confirmation function can be turned on 2. Say “Setup.”
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped or off by following the steps below. 3. Say “Passcode.”
with a help function. 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis-
If you say “Help” when the system is waiting 1. Press the SPEECH button.
abled. Would you like to enable it?”
for a voice command input, the system will 2. Say “Setup.”
Answer “Yes.”
tell you a list of the commands that can be 3. Say “Confirmation prompts.”
Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
used under the circumstances. 4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
passcode and return to the main menu.
prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to
5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.”
Canceling Answer “Yes” to change the setting or
digit passcode. Remember this passcode.
N00564401086 It will be required to use this system.”
answer “No” to keep the current setting.
There are 2 cancel functions. Say a 4-digit number which you want to
5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to set as a passcode.
prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys-
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. tem will return to the main menu.
guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass-
If you are anywhere else within the system,
code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. Security function Answer “No” to return to the passcode
N00564601189 input in Step 5.
NOTE It is possible to use a passcode as a security 7. When the registration of the passcode is
 You can return to the previous menu by say- function by setting a passcode of your choice completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
ing “Go Back.” code is enabled” and the system will
for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
return to the main menu.

NOTE NOTE Speaker enrollment function

 Passcode will be required to access the sys-  If you have forgotten your passcode, say N00564700011
tem after the next ignition cycle. “Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the
 It is required for a little time after engine then check with an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. speaker enrollment function to create a voice
stop that the entered passcode is actually
recorded in the system. If the ignition switch model for one person per language.
is made to “ACC” or “ON” or the engine is Disabling the passcode This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0
5 started immediately after engine stop, there
is a case when the entered passcode is not Use the following procedure to turn off the
interface to recognise voice commands said
by you.
recorded in the system. At this time, please security function by disabling the passcode. You can turn a voice model registered with
try to enter the passcode again. the speaker enrollment function on and off
NOTE whenever you want.
Entering the passcode
 System must be unlocked to disable the pass-
If a passcode has been set and the security code. Speaker enrollment
function is enabled, the voice guide will say N00564801178
“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass- 1. Press the SPEECH button. It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
code to continue” when the SPEECH button 2. Say “Setup.” speaker enrollment process.
is pressed to enter voice recognition mode. 3. Say “Passcode.” To ensure the best results, run through the
Say the 4-digit passcode number to enter the 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
passcode. enabled. Would you like to disable it?” ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
Answer “Yes.” there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect the passcode and return to the main menu. phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct 5. When the disabling of the passcode is interruption of the process.
passcode. completed, the voice guide will say “Pass- Use the following procedure for speaker
code is disabled” and the system will enrollment.
NOTE return to the main menu.
 You can reenter the passcode as many times
as you want.


1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
shift lever (manual transaxle) in the “N”
NOTE NOTE
 If you do not start the speaker enrollment  Completing the speaker enrollment process
(Neutral) position, or the selector lever
process within 3 minutes after pressing the will turn on the voice model automatically.
{continuously variable transmission
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment  The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not
(CVT)} in the “P”(PARK) position, and function will time out. work in this mode.
then pull the parking brake lever. The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll-
ment has timed out.” The system will then
NOTE
 Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the
beep and the voice recognition mode will be
deactivated.
Enabling and disabling the voice 5
vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the model and retraining
vehicle in a safe area before attempting N00564901111
speaker enrollment. 5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.

You can turn a voice model registered with
Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in
the speaker enrollment function on and off
table “Enrollment commands” on page
2. Press the SPEECH button. whenever you want.
5-160.
3. Say “Voice training.” You can also retrain the system.
The system will register your voice and
4. The voice guide will say “This operation Use the following procedure to perform these
then move on to the registration of the
must be performed in a quiet environment actions.
next command. Continue the process until
while the vehicle is stopped. See the all phrases have been registered. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
owner’s manual for the list of required
2. Say “Voice training.”
training phrases. Press and release the NOTE 3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-
SPEECH button when you are ready to  To repeat the most recent voice training com- ment process once already, the voice
begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can- mand, press and release the SPEECH button. guide will say either “Enrollment is
cel at any time.”  If you press the HANG-UP button anytime enabled. Would you like to disable or
Press the SPEECH button to start the during the process, the system will beep and retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled.
speaker enrollment process. stop the speaker enrollment process.
Would you like to enable or retrain?”
4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice
6. When all enrollment commands have model is on; when enrollment is “dis-
been read out, the voice guide will say abled,” the voice model is off. Say the
“Speaker enrollment is complete.” The command that fits your needs.
system will then end the speaker enroll-
ment process and return to the main
menu.


Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll- You can also change a Bluetooth® device to
ment process and recreate a new voice
NOTE
be connected.
model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on  The following procedure ( to ) can also
page 5-144.) be used instead of saying “Pair Device.”
To pair Replace this step 3 with the following proce-
dure if you prefer.
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 Say “Setup.”
To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
interface and Bluetooth® device tooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below.
Say “Pairing Options.”
5 N00565001379 The voice guide will say “Select one of
Before you can make or receive hands-free 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the the following: pair, edit, delete, list or set
shift lever (manual transaxle) in the “N” code.”
calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0
Say “Pair.”
interface function, you must pair the Blue- (Neutral) position, or the selector lever
 If 7 devices have already been paired, the
{continuously variable transmission
tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. voice guide will say “Maximum devices
(CVT)} in the “P” (PARK) position and
paired” and then the system will end the
pull the parking brake lever. pairing process. To register a new device,
NOTE delete one device and then repeat the pairing
 Pairing is required only when the device is NOTE process.
used for the first time. Once the device has (Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a
 You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- device” on page 5-148.)
face, all you need is to bring the device into the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
the vehicle next time and the device will cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®
device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, 4. The voice guide will say “Start pairing
connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto-
confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe procedure on the device. See the device
matically (if supported by the device).
location. manual for instructions.” and then will
say “The pairing code is <pairing code>.”
Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired
2. Press the SPEECH button. NOTE
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 3. Say “Pair Device.”
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are  Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific
pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or
ual for pairing code requirements and read
music player most recently connected is auto-
the next section “If your device requires a
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 specific pairing code” on page 5-147 to set
interface. the pairing code.


7. The voice guide will say “Pairing Com-
NOTE NOTE plete. Would you like to import the con-
 The pairing code entered here is only used  If you enter the wrong number, the voice
tacts from your mobile device now?”
for the Bluetooth® connection certification. guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will
Depending on the connection settings of the ing process will be cancelled.
Confirm the number is right, and try pairing say “Please wait while the contacts are
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be imported. This may take several minutes.”
it again.
entered each time you connect the Blue- Answer “No” to end the pairing process.
If your device requires a specific pairing
tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
face. For the default connection settings,
code, you need to set the pairing code. Refer
to the device manual for pairing code
5
refer to the instructions for the device. If your device requires a specific pairing
requirements and read the next section “If
code
your device requires a specific pairing code”
5. Enter in the Bluetooth® device the 4-digit on page 5-147.
If your device requires a specific pairing
number that has been read out in Step 4.
6. The voice guide will say “Please say the code, you need to set the pairing code. Follow
the procedures below.
NOTE name of the device after the beep.” You
 Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may can assign a desired name for the Blue- 1. Press the SPEECH button.
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue- tooth® device and register it as a device 2. Say “Setup.”
tooth® 2.0 interface. tag. Say the name you want to register 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- after the beep. 4. Say “Set Code.”
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide 5. The voice guide will say “Do you want
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair- NOTE the pairing code to be random or fixed?”
ing process will be cancelled.  When the confirmation function is on, after Say “Fixed.”
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup- repeating the device tag you have said, the 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number.
ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.
Answer “Yes.”
7. The voice guide will say “Pairing code set
To change the device tag, answer “No” and
to <pairing code>.”
then say the device tag again.
When the confirmation function is on, the
system will confirm whether the number
said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.”
Answer “No,” the system will return to
Step 6.


8. The voice guide will say “Do you want to When the confirmation function is on, the 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
pair a device now?” Answer “Yes,” the system will ask you again whether the the numbers of the music players and
system will proceed to Step 3 in the pair- phone that you want to connect to is cor- device tags of corresponding music play-
ing process. Refer to the “Pairing proce- rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con- ers will be read out in order, starting with
dure- Type 2.” nect to the cellular phone. the music player that has been most
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will recently connected.
Selecting a device say “Please say.” Say the number of the Say the number of the music player that
phone that you want to connect to. you want to connect to.
5 N00565101136
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are NOTE system will ask you again whether the
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or  You can connect to a phone at any time by music player that you want to connect to
music player most recently connected is auto- pressing the SPEECH button and saying the is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 number, even before all of the paired num- connect to the music player.
interface. bers and device tags of corresponding cellu- Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
You can connect to the other cellular phone or lar phones are read out by the system. say “Please say.” Say the number of the
music player by following setting change pro- music player that you want to connect to.
cedures. 5. The selected phone will be connected to
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice NOTE
To select a cellular phone guide will say “<device tag> selected”  You can connect to a music player at any
and then the system will return to the time by pressing the SPEECH button and
1. Press the SPEECH button. main menu. saying the number, even before all of the
2. Say “Setup.” paired numbers and device tags of corre-
3. Say “Select phone.” sponding music players are read out by the
To select a music player system.
4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
the numbers of the cellular phones and 1. Press the SPEECH button.
device tags of corresponding cellular 2. Say “Setup.” 5. The selected music player will be con-
phones will be read out in order, starting 3. Say “Select music player.” nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
with the cellular phone that has been most The voice guide will say “<device tag>
recently connected. selected” and then the system will return
Say the number of the cellular phone that to the main menu.
you want to connect to.


7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and To hear the list again from the beginning,
Deleting a device
then the system will end the device dele- answer “Yes.”
Use the following procedure to delete a tion process. When you are done, answer “No” to
paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue- return to the main menu.
NOTE
tooth® 2.0 interface.
 If the device deletion process fails for some
reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
NOTE
1. Press the SPEECH button.  If you press and release the SPEECH button
failed” and then the system will cancel delet-
2. Say “Setup.”
ing the device.
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the 5
3. Say “Pairing Options.” list is being read, the system will advance or
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of rewind the list.
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with
To check a paired Bluetooth® the next highest number or “Previous” to
Say “Delete.”
5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” device return to the phone with the previous num-
N00565201078 ber.
the numbers of the devices and device
 You can change the device tag by pressing
tags of corresponding devices will be read You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by and releasing the SPEECH button and then
out in order, starting with the device that following the steps below. saying “Edit” while the list is being read.
has been most recently connected. After it  You can change the phone to be connected
completes reading all pairs, the voice 1. Press the SPEECH button. by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-
guide will say “or all.” 2. Say “Setup.” ton and then saying “Select phone” while the
Say the number of the device that you 3. Say “Pairing Options.” list is being read.
want to delete from the system. 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of  You can change the music player to be con-
If you want to delete all paired phones the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” nected by pressing and releasing the
from the system, say “All.” Say “List.” SPEECH button and then saying “Select
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice 5. The voice guide will read out device tags music player” while the list is being read.
guide will say “Deleting <device tag> of corresponding devices in order, starting
<number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting with the Bluetooth® device that has been
all devices. Is this correct?” most recently connected. Changing a device tag
Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s). 6. After the device tags of all paired Blue- N00565301079
Answer “No,” the system will return to tooth® devices have been read, the system You can change the device tag of a paired cel-
Step 4. will say “End of list, would you like to lular phone or music player.
start from the beginning?” Follow the steps below to change a device
tag.


1. Press the SPEECH button. When the change is complete, the voice You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue-
2. Say “Setup.” guide will say “New name saved” and tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without
3. Say “Pairing Options.” then the system will return to the main dialing telephone numbers.
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of menu.
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” To make a call P.5-150
Say “Edit.” Send function P.5-152
5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and
Operating a music player con- Receiving calls P.5-152
read out the numbers of the Bluetooth®
nected via Bluetooth® Mute function P.5-152
5 devices and device tags of corresponding
N00565401142
Switching between hands-free mode and pri-
devices in order, starting with the Blue- For the operation of a music player connected vate mode P.5-153
tooth® that has been most recently con- via Bluetooth®, refer to the following sec-
nected. tions. NOTE
After all paired device tags have been  Hands-free calls may not operate correctly
For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM when you place or receive the call directly
read, the voice guide will say “Which
radio/CD player from your cellular phone, instead of using
device, please?” Say the number of the
device tag you want to change. Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio” on page the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
7-41.
NOTE
 You can press and release the SPEECH but- To make a call
For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY
ton while the list is being read, and immedi- N00565601144
AUDIO
ately say the number of the device tag you You can make a call in the following 3 ways
want to change.
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface:
Making a call by saying a telephone number,
6. The voice guide will say “New name, How to make or receive hands- making a call using the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
please.” Say the name you want to regis- face’s phonebook, and making a call by redi-
ter as a new device tag. free calls
N00565500074
aling.
voice guide will say “<New device tag>. You can make or receive hands-free calls Making a call by using the telephone
Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone number
Answer “No,” you can say the new device connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
tag you want to register again. You can make a call by saying the telephone
7. The device tag is changed. number.


1. Press the SPEECH button. If there are 2 or more matches, the voice
Making a call using a phonebook
2. Say “Dial.” guide will say “More than one match was
3. After the voice guide says “Number You can make calls using the vehicle phone- found, would you like to call <returned
please,” say the telephone number. book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® name>.” If that person is the one you want
4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num- 2.0 interface. to call, answer “Yes.”
ber recognized>.” Answer “No,” the name of the next
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then For details on the phonebooks, refer to matching person will be uttered by the
voice guide.
make the call.
“Phonebook function” on page 5-153.
5
system will confirm the telephone number 1. Press the SPEECH button. NOTE
again. To continue with that number, 2. Say “Call.”  If you say “No” to all names read by the sys-
answer “Yes.” tem, the voice guide will say “Name not
To change the telephone number, answer NOTE found, returning to main menu” and the sys-
 If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone- tem will return to the main menu.
“No.” The system will say “Number
please” then say the telephone number book and the mobile phonebook are empty,
the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone- 5. If only 1 telephone number is registered
again.
book is empty. Would you like to add a new under the name you just said, the voice
entry now?”
guide will proceed to Step 6.
NOTE Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say
If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis-
 In the case of English, the system will recog- “Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.”
You can now create data in the vehicle tered that match the name you just said,
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
phonebook. the voice guide will say “Would you like
number “0.”
Answer “No,” the system will return to the to call <name> at [home], [work],
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num- main menu. [mobile], or [other]?” Select the location
bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
to call.
 The maximum supported telephone number
length is as follows: 3. After the voice guide says “Name please,”
• International telephone number: + and tele- say the name you want to call, from those
phone numbers (to 18 digits). registered in the phonebook.
• Except for international telephone number: 4. If there is only 1 match, the system will
telephone numbers (to 19 digits). proceed to Step 5.

NOTE NOTE Receiving calls

 If the name you selected has matching data  When the confirmation function is on, the N00565800019
in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone system will check if the name and location of If an incoming phone call is received while
number is registered under the selected loca- the receiver are correct. If the name is cor- the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
tion, the voice guide will say rect, answer “Yes.” position, the audio system will be automati-
“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for To change the name or location to call,
cally turned on and switched to the incoming
<name>. Would you like to add location or answer “No.” The system will return to Step
call, even when the audio system was origi-
5 try again?”
Say “Try again,” and the system will return
3.
nally off.
to Step 3. The voice guide announcement for the
Say “Add location” and you can register an Redialing incoming call will be output from the front
additional telephone number under the passenger’s seat speaker.
selected location. You can redial the last number called, based If the CD player or radio was playing when
 If the name you selected has matching data on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- the incoming call was received, the audio sys-
in the mobile phonebook but no telephone lular phone. tem will mute the sound from the CD player
number is registered under the selected loca- or radio and output only the incoming call.
tion, the voice guide will say Use the following procedure to redial. To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button
“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
1. Press the SPEECH button. on the steering wheel control switch.
<name>. Would you like to try again?”
Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to 2. Say “Redial.” When the call is over, the audio system will
Step 3. return to its previous state.
Answer “No,” and the call making will be
Send function
cancelled. Start over again from Step 1.
N00565700018
Mute function
N00565900010
During a call, press the SPEECH button to
6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name> enter voice recognition mode, then say At any time during a call, you can mute the
<location>” and then the system will dial “<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF vehicle microphone.
the telephone number. tones. Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying
For example, if during a call you need to sim- “Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a function and mute the microphone.
response to an automated system, press the Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn
SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound off the mute function and cancel the mute on
send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel- the microphone.
lular phone.

Switching between hands-free Vehicle phonebook  To register by reading out a tele-

mode and private mode N00566101117 phone number
N00580600119
N00566600014 This phonebook is used when making calls
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch with the voice recognition function.
2. Say “Phonebook.”
between hands-free mode (hands-free calls) Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi-
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
and private mode (calls using cellular phone). cle phonebook per language.
the following: new entry, edit number,
If you press the SPEECH button and say Also, each entry has 4 locations associated
“Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you with: home, work, mobile and other. You can
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact.” Say “New entry.”
5
can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri- register one telephone number for each loca-
4. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
vate mode. tion.
Say your preferred name to register it.
To return to hands-free mode, press the You can register a desired name as a name for
SPEECH button again and say “Transfer any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle NOTE
call.” phonebook.  If the maximum number of entries are
Names and telephone numbers can be already registered, the voice guide will say
“The phonebook is full. Would you like to
Phonebook function changed later on.
delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
N00566000018
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all delete a registered name.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of paired cellular phones. If you say “No,” the system will return to the
unique phonebooks that are different from the main menu.
phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They
 To register a telephone number in
are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile 5. When the name has been registered, the
phonebook.
the vehicle phonebook voice guide will say “home, work,
N00580500020
These phonebooks are used to register tele- mobile, or other?” Say the location for
phone numbers and make calls to desired You can register a telephone number in the which you want to register a telephone
numbers via voice recognition function. vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways: number.
Reading out a telephone number, and select-
ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from
NOTE the phonebook of the cellular phone.
 Disconnecting the battery cable will not
delete information registered in the phone-
book.


To add another telephone number for a
NOTE new location for the current entry, answer
NOTE
 When the confirmation function is on, the  The maximum supported telephone number
“Yes.” The system will return to location
voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor- length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
selection in Step 5.
rect?” Answer “Yes.” 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
Answer “No” to return to location selection Answer “No” to end the registration pro- 19 digits.
in Step 5. cess and return to the main menu.  If telephone numbers contain characters
If a telephone number has been registered for other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
NOTE
5 the selected location, the voice guide will say
“The current number is <telephone number>,  When the confirmation function is on, after
are deleted before the transfer.
 For the connection settings on the cellular
number please.” repeating the telephone number you have phone side, refer to the instructions for the
If you do not want to change the telephone read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor- cellular phone.
number, say “cancel” or the original number rect?” Answer “Yes.”
to keep it registered. Answer “No” to return to telephone number 1. Press the SPEECH button.
registration in step 6. 2. Say “Phonebook.”
6. The voice guide will say “Number 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
please.” Say the telephone number to reg- the following: new entry, edit number,
 To select and transfer one phone- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
ister it.
book entry from the phonebook of import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
NOTE the cellular phone 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
N00580700093 to import a single entry or all contacts?”
 In the case of English, the system will recog-
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the You can select 1 phonebook entry from the Say “Single entry.”
number “0.” phonebook of the cellular phone and register The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become
it in the vehicle phonebook. ready to receive transferred phonebook
data.
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
number you have just read, and then reg- NOTE
ister the number.  Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is NOTE
parked. Before transferring, make sure that  If the maximum number of entries are
When the telephone number has been reg-
the vehicle is parked in a safe location. already registered, the voice guide will say
istered, the voice guide will say “Number “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
 All or part of data may not be transferred,
saved. Would you like to add another delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
number for this entry?” delete a registered name.
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
If you say “No,” the system will return to the
the device.
main menu.


5. After the voice guide says “Ready to Say the name you want to register for this You can also listen to the list of names regis-
receive a contact from the phone. Only a phonebook entry. tered in the vehicle phonebook.
home, a work, and a mobile number can
be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- NOTE NOTE
face will receive the phonebook data from  If the entered name is already used for other  The system must have at least one entry.
phonebook entry or similar to a name used
the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.
for other phonebook entry, that name cannot
be registered.
6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu-  Editing a telephone number
N00579900095
5
lar phone to set it up so that the phone-
8. The voice guide will say “Adding 1. Press the SPEECH button.
book entry you want to register in the
<name>.” 2. Say “Phonebook.”
vehicle phonebook can be transferred to
When the confirmation function is on, the 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. the following: new entry, edit number,
system will ask if the name is correct.
Answer “Yes.” edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
NOTE import contact”. Say “Edit number.”
Answer “No,” the voice guide will say
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- “Name please.” Register a different name. 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular 9. The voice guide will say “Numbers name of the entry you would like to edit,
phone or the connection takes too much saved.” or say list names.” Say the name of the
time, the voice guide will say “Import con- phonebook entry you want to edit.
10. The voice guide will say “Would you like
tact has timed out” and then the system will
cancel the registration. In such case, start
to import another contact?”
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue NOTE
over again from Step 1.
with the registration. You can continue to  Say “List names,” and the names registered
 Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
register a new phonebook entry from Step in the phonebook will be read out in order.
and holding the SPEECH button will cancel
Refer to “Listening to the list of registered
the registration. 5.
names” on page 5-156.
Answer “No,” the system will return to
7. When the reception is complete, the voice the main menu.
guide will say “<Number of telephone 5. The voice guide will say “Home, work,
numbers that had been registered in the  To change the content registered in mobile or other?” Select and say the loca-
import source> numbers have been the vehicle phonebook tion where the telephone number you
imported. What name would you like to N00579800023 want to change or add is registered.
use for these numbers?” You can change or delete a name or telephone
number registered in the vehicle phonebook.

When the confirmation function is on, the When the confirmation function is on, the
system will check the target name and
NOTE system will check if the name is correct.
 If the location where a telephone number
location again. Answer “Yes” if you want Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
was already registered has been overwritten
to continue with the editing. with the editing based on this information.
with a new number, the voice guide will say
Answer “No,” the system will return to “Number changed” and then the system will Answer “No,” the system will return to
Step 3. return to the main menu. Step 4.
6. The voice guide will say “Number, 6. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
please.” Say the telephone number you Say the new name you want to register.
5 want to register.  Editing a name 7. The registered name will be changed.
N00580100097 When the change is complete, the system
NOTE 1. Press the SPEECH button. will return to the main menu.
 If the telephone number is already registered 2. Say “Phonebook.”
in the selected location, the voice guide will 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of  Listening to the list of registered names
say “The current number is <current num- the following: new entry, edit number, N00580200085
ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or 1. Press the SPEECH button.
phone number to change the current number. import contact.” Say “Edit name.” 2. Say “Phonebook.”
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone name of the entry you would like to edit, the following: new entry, edit number,
number. or say list names.” Say the name you want edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
When the confirmation function is on, the to edit. import contact.” Say “List names.”
system will ask if the number is correct. 4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the
Answer “Yes.” NOTE entries in the phonebook in order.
Answer “No,” the system will return to  Say “List names,” and the names registered 5. When the voice guide is done reading the
the Step 3. in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer list, it will say “End of list, would you like
to “Listening to the list of registered names” to start from the beginning?” When you
8. Once the telephone number is registered,
on page 5-156.
the voice guide will say “Number saved” want to check the list again from the
and then the system will return to the beginning, answer “Yes.”
main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “Changing When you are done, answer “No” to
<name>.” return to the previous or main menu.


7. When the telephone number deletion is
NOTE NOTE complete, the voice guide will say
 You can call, edit or delete a name that is  Say “List names,” and the names registered
“<name> <location> deleted” and then
being read out. in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
the system will return to the main menu.
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to to “Listening to the list of registered names”
call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or on page 5-156. If all locations are deleted, the system will
“Delete” to delete it. say “<name> and all locations deleted”
The system will beep and then execute your and the name will be removed from the
5. If only one telephone number is registered phonebook. If numbers still remain under
command.
 If you press the SPEECH button and say in the selected phonebook entry, the voice the entry, the name will retain the other
5
“Continue” or “Previous” while the list is guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca- associated numbers.
being read, the system will advance or tion>.”
rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to If multiple telephone numbers are regis-
the next entry or “Previous” to return to the
 Erasing the phonebook
tered in the selected phonebook entry, the N00580400087
previous entry. voice guide will say “Would you like to
You can delete all registered information
delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other],
from the vehicle phonebook.
or all?”
 Deleting a telephone number Select the location to delete, and the voice
N00580300103 1. Press the SPEECH button.
guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca- 2. Say “Phonebook.”
tion>.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
2. Say “Phonebook.”
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number,
the following: new entry, edit number, NOTE edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or  To delete the telephone numbers from all import contact.” Say “Erase all.”
locations, say “All.” 4. For confirmation purposes, the voice
import contact.” Say “Delete.”
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the guide will ask “Are you sure you want to
name of the entry you would like to 6. The system will ask if you really want to erase everything from your hands-free
delete, or say list names.” Say the name of delete the selected telephone number(s) to system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.”
the phonebook entry in which the tele- go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all
phone number you want to delete is regis- Answer “No,” the system will cancel registered information in the phonebook
tered. deleting the telephone number(s) and then and return to the main menu.
return to Step 4.


5. The voice guide will say “You are about
to delete everything from your hands-free
NOTE NOTE
 Only the mobile phonebook transferred from  The maximum supported telephone number
system phonebook. Do you want to con-
the connected cellular phone can be used length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue.
with that cellular phone. 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all 19 digits.
 You cannot change the names and telephone
registered information in the phonebook numbers in the phonebook entries registered  If telephone numbers contain characters
and return to the main menu. in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
6. The voice guide will say “Please wait,
5 erasing the hands-free system phone-
and delete specific phonebook entries, either.
To change or delete any of the above, change
are deleted before the transfer.
 For the connection settings on the cellular
book” and then the system will delete all the applicable information in the source phone side, refer to the instructions for the
data in the phonebook. phonebook of the cellular phone and then cellular phone.
When the deletion is complete, the voice transfer the phonebook again.
guide will say “Hands-free system phone- 1. Press the SPEECH button.
book erased” and then the system will To import a devices phonebook 2. Say “Phonebook.”
return to the main menu. 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
Follow the steps below to transfer to the the following: new entry, edit number,
mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
Mobile phonebook the cellular phone. import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
N00566201118
4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- NOTE to import a single entry or all contacts?”
lular phone can be transferred in a batch and Say “All contacts.”
 Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
registered in the mobile phonebook. cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure 5. The voice guide will say “Importing the
Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. contact list from the mobile phonebook.
up to 1,000 names, can be registered.  The already stored phonebook in the mobile This may take several minutes to com-
phonebook is overwritten by the stored plete. Would you like to continue?”
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically phonebook in the cellular phone. Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile
converts from text to voice the names regis-  All or part of data may not be transferred, phonebook the phonebook stored in the
tered in the transferred phonebook entries, even when the cellular phone supports Blue- cellular phone will start.
and creates names. tooth®, depending on the compatibility of Answer “No,” the system will return to
the device. the main menu.
 Only a home, a work, and a mobile number
can be imported.


The antenna used for this transmitter must not
NOTE General information be co-located or operating in conjunction
 The transfer may take some time to complete N00566301122
with any other antenna or transmitter. End-
depending on the number of contacts. Model name: MMC or MDGMY10 users and installers must be provided with
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 or installation instructions and transmitter oper-
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel- NT8MDGMY10 ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable IC: 279B-MDGMY10 or 3043A-MDGMY10 compliance.
to transfer contact list from phone” and then
Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested
the system will return to the main menu.
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi- and found to comply with the limits for a
5
 If you press the HANG-UP button or press
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
and hold the SPEECH button during the data
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
the system will return to the main menu. Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This provide reasonable protection against harmful
 If an error occurs during the data transfer, all device complies with Part 15 of the FCC interference in a residential installation.
transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada This equipment generates, uses and can radi-
will say “Unable to complete the phonebook Rules. Operation is subject to the following ate radio frequency energy and, if not
import” and then the system will return to two conditions: installed and used in accordance with the
the main menu. instructions, may cause harmful interference
 If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the  This device may not cause harmful inter- to radio communications.
voice guide will say “There are no contacts ference. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
on the connected phone.”  This device must accept any interference ence will not occur in a particular installation.
received, including interference that may If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
6. When the transfer is complete, the voice cause undesired operation. ence to radio or television reception, which
guide will say “Import complete” and can be determined by turning the equipment
then the system will return to the main CAUTION off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
menu.  Changes or modifications made to this correct the interference by one or more of the
equipment not expressly approved by the following measures:
manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-
tion to operate this equipment.  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
The term “IC:” before the radio certification
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
number only signifies that Industry Canada
circuit different from that to which the
technical specifications were met.
receiver is connected.
USB input terminal

 Consult the dealer or an experienced Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device
radio/TV technician for help. tracks via voice operation” on page 7-38.
ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus *:“iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
complies with Canadian ICES-003. Inc. in the United States and other coun-
tries.
Enrollment commands
5 N00566401110
How to connect a USB memory

device
N00566801127
4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the USB input terminal (D).
tion.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
the center console box.
USB input terminal

N00566701113
You can connect your USB memory device or

iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
memory device or iPod.This section explains
how to connect and remove a USB memory CAUTION
device or iPod. See the following section for  Keep the lid of the center console box closed
details on how to play music files. while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-33. tents of the center console box could other-
3. Connect a commercially available USB wise cause injuries.
Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB
connector cable (C) to the USB memory
Device” on page 7-35.
device (B).

USB input terminal

3. Connect the connector cable to the iPod. 5. To remove the connector cable, turn the
NOTE ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
 Do not connect the USB memory device to
the USB input terminal directly.
NOTE first and perform the installation steps in
 Use a genuine connector cable from Apple reverse.
The USB memory device may be damaged.
Inc.
 When closing the center console box, be
careful not to trap the USB connector cable. Types of connectable devices
4. Connect the connector cable (B) to the
and supported file specifica-
5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn
USB input terminal (C).
tions 5
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- N00567001054
tion first and perform the installation steps
in reverse. Except for vehicles equipped with
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
How to connect an iPod N00583200073
N00566901173
For details about the types of connectable
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn devices and supported file specifications,
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- refer to the following pages and manuals.
tion.
For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
radio/CD player
the center console box. CAUTION
 Keep the lid of the center console box closed Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-33,
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con- “Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device” on
tents of the center console box could other- page 7-35 and “Audio Files
wise cause injuries. (MP3/WMA/AAC)” on page 7-20.
For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY

NOTE AUDIO
 When closing the center console box, be
careful not to trap the connector cable. Refer to the separate owner’s manual.

USB input terminal

panies”. The websites mentioned above may  File specifications
For vehicles equipped with the
connect you to websites other than the
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface Mitsubishi Motors website.
N00583500021
N00583300029
You can play music files of the following
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
For details about the types of connectable ucts/index.html ory device or other device supporting mass
devices and supported file specifications,
storage class. When you connect your iPod,
refer to the following section. *: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,”
playable file specifications depend on the
“iPod touch,” and “iPhone” are regis-
5  Device types tered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the
connected iPod.
N00583400020 United States and other countries.
Item Condition
Devices of the following types can be con-
MP3, WMA, AAC,
nected. File format
NOTE WAV
Model name Condition  Depending on the type of the USB memory Maximum number of
device or other device connected, the con- levels Level 8
Storage capacity of nected device may not function properly or
USB memory device (including the root)
256 Mbytes or more the available functions may be limited.
 It is recommended to use an iPod with firm- Number of folders 700
Models other than Digital audio player
USB memory supporting mass ware updated to the latest version. Number of files 65,535
devices and iPods storage class  You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
the USB input terminal when the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
For these connectable device types, “iPod*,”  Do not keep your USB memory device or
“iPod classic*,” “iPod nano*,” “iPod touch*” iPod in your vehicle.
and “iPhone*,” refer to the following web-  It is recommended that you back up the files
site: in case of data damage.
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]  Do not connect to the USB input terminal
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
America website. reader, etc.) other than the connectable
[For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico] devices specified in the previous section.
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web- The device and/or data may be damaged. If
site. Please read and agree to the “Warning any of these devices was connected by mis-
about Links to the Web Sites of Other Com- take, remove it after turning the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position.

Sun visors
Sun visors 12 V power outlet

N00524600308 N00525001696
Fold the sun visor downward (1) to reduce

front glare while driving. To reduce side CAUTION
glare, turn the visor to the side (2).  Be aware that using electronic equipment
with the engine off may run the battery
down.
 When the 12 V power outlet is not in use, be 5
sure to put on the plug or close the 12 V
power outlet cover. This will prevent the
12 V power outlet from becoming dirty and
possibly short-circuiting.
Card holder
12 V power outlets are located in inside of the
Cards can be slipped into the front (A) of the center console box (Type 1) and inside of the
lid of the vanity mirror. floor console box (Type 2).
NOTE
Vanity mirror  If your vehicle is equipped with two 12 V
power outlets, both power outlets can be
used simultaneously.
The vanity mirrors are located on the back of
the sun visors.
CAUTION
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
operating at 12 V and 120 W or less.
When using two 12 V power outlets or 12 V
power outlet and cigarette lighter simultane-
ously, make sure that the total power con-
sumption of these does not exceed 120 W at
12 V.

Interior lights
Type 1 Dome light (Front)/Reading

lights
The accessory can be operated when the igni- N00525801320
tion switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

To use a “plug-in” type accessory, pull out the Dome light (Front)
plug, then insert the plug in the socket.
5 The dome light can be turned on by sliding

the dome light switch.
Interior lights
N00525301657
Type 2 (if so equipped) 1- (DOOR)

The dome light comes on when any door
The accessory can be operated when the igni- is opened. When all the doors are closed,
tion switch is in any position. the dome light illuminates for about 30
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the seconds then goes off. However, the light
cover, then insert the plug in the socket. 1- Dome light (Front)/Reading lights goes off immediately if:
P.5-164  The door is closed while the ignition
2- Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped) switch is in the “ON” position.
P.5-165  The driver’s door is closed after all the
other doors are closed while the lock
knob of the driver’s door is in the lock
position.

Interior lights
 The door is closed and the power door that is pressed illuminates; when you press The dome light comes on.
lock switch is used to lock the doors. the lens again, the light goes off. 2- ()
 In vehicles equipped with the keyless The dome light comes on when any door
entry system, the keyless entry system is opened. When all the doors are closed,
remote control transmitter is used to the dome light illuminates for about 30
lock the doors. seconds then goes off. However, the light
 In vehicles equipped with the goes off immediately if:
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors are locked  The door is closed while the ignition
using the F.A.S.T.-key. switch is in the “ON” position.
5
 The driver’s door is closed after all
NOTE the other doors are closed while the
 When the engine is started using the key lock knob of the driver’s door is in
while the doors are closed, if you remove the the lock position.
key, the dome light will illuminate for about  The door is closed and the power
30 seconds before going off. door lock switch is used to lock the
 When the engine is started using the Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped) doors.
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors are closed, if  In vehicles equipped with the keyless
N00525401485
the ignition switch is moved to the “LOCK” entry system, the keyless entry sys-
position, the dome light will illuminate for The dome light can be turned on by sliding tem remote control transmitter is used
about 30 seconds before going off.
the dome light switch. to lock the doors.
 The time until the light goes off can be
 In vehicles equipped with the
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors are locked
Motors dealer for details.
using the F.A.S.T.-key.
2- (OFF) NOTE
The dome light goes off.  When the engine is started using the key
while the doors are closed, if you remove the
key, the dome light will illuminate for about
Reading lights 30 seconds before going off.
N00553800067
Regardless of the dome light switch position,

when you press the lens, the light on the side 1- (ON)

Storage spaces
NOTE NOTE
 When the engine is started using the  The interior light auto-cutout function can be
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors are closed, if deactivated. The time until the lights auto-
the ignition switch is moved to the “LOCK” matically go off can be adjusted. See your
position, the dome light will illuminate for authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
about 30 seconds before going off. details.
 The time until the light goes off can be
5 adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
Storage spaces
3- (OFF) N00526401570
1- Floor console box (if so equipped)

The dome light goes off. CAUTION P.5-167
 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans, 2- Center console box P.5-167
or spectacles in the cabin when parking the 3- Glove compartment P.5-166
Interior light auto-cutout func- vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will
tion (dome light and other become extremely hot, so lighters and other
flammable items may catch fire and
lights) unopened drink cans (including beer cans) Glove compartment
N00526301465
may rupture. The heat may also deform or N00551501302
If any of the interior lights are left on with the crack plastic spectacle parts. To open the glove compartment, pull the
ignition switch in the “LOCK” position, the  Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while lever (A).
lights go off automatically after about 30 driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
minutes. storage space could otherwise cause injuries
The lights come on again if the ignition during a sudden stop.
switch is turned to the “ON” or “ACC” posi-
tion, any door or the trunk lid is opened and
closed, or the keyless entry system or NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key is operated.  Do not leave valuables in any storage space
when leaving the vehicle.

Storage spaces
WARNING Center console box

 An open glove compartment door can N00546401114
cause a serious injury or death to the front To open, pull the lid.
passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
when driving.
5
Card holder
There is a card holder on the inside of the

glove compartment. Tissue holder
The tissue holder (A) is located on the under-

side of the floor console box lid.
NOTE
 The USB input terminal is located in the cen-
ter console box. For details, refer to “USB
input terminal” on page 5-160.
 Do not use the center console box as an ash-
tray.
This could cause a fire or damage the center
console box.
NOTE Floor console box with lid (if so

 Up to 2 cards will fit in the card holder. equipped)
N00551600188
To open the floor console box, lift the release

lever (A) and raise the lid.

Cup holder
Cup holder For the rear seat (if so equipped) NOTE

N00527301475 N00537000159  Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
This cup holder is located in the rear seat arm etc.
For the front seat rest (A).  Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
Pull the rear arm rest down to use the cup ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
The cup holder is located the middle of the holder. tles, etc.
5 floor console.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups There are bottle holders located on both sides
or drink-cans securely. of the front seats.
Bottle holder
N00502800049
CAUTION
 Do not drink beverages while driving your CAUTION Assist grip
vehicle.  Do not drink beverages while driving your N00559000029
This is distracting and could cause an acci- vehicle. This is distracting and could cause
dent. an accident. These grips are to support the body by hand
 Vibration and shaking while driving may while seated in the vehicle.
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.

Coat hook (if so equipped)
CAUTION WARNING
 Do not use the assist grips when getting into  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
or out of the vehicle. pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
The assist grips could detach and cause an tain airbag was activated, any such item
accident. could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Coat hook (if so equipped) Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
N00553600108 objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.
There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist
grip of the driver’s side.

Driving safety
Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4 6
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-5
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11
Fuel economy
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to
Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
N00628800165 N00628900052
help prevent the floor mat from moving for-
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent ward and possibly interfering with the opera-
Your personal driving habits can have a sig- causes of accidents. tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
nificant effect on your fuel use. Several rec- Your driving ability can be seriously impaired from moving forward and possibly interfering
ommendations for achieving the greatest fuel even with blood alcohol levels far below the with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi
economy are listed below. legal minimum. If you have been drinking, genuine floor mats are recommended.
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
 Whenever accelerating from a stop,
6 always accelerate slowly and smoothly.
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
To install the floor mat
 When parked for even a short period, do ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
N00628700050
not idle the engine. Shut it off. 1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
 Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary floorboard.
drugs affect your alertness, perception and
stops. 2. Align the floor mat with the installation
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- holes over the retaining clips.
pharmacist before driving while under the
mended pressures. 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
influence of any of these medications.
 When you drive on highways or dry
improved roads, set the drive mode-selec-
tor “2WD” or “4WD AUTO” position (if
WARNING
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
so equipped).
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
 For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when impaired.
traffic, roadway and weather conditions
safely permit.
 Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
lubricated according to the recommenda- Floor mat
tions in this manual. N00628600017
 Always keep your vehicle well main- The original equipment floor mat provided
tained. A poorly maintained engine with your vehicle was specifically designed NOTE
wastes fuel and costs money. for your vehicle. Always properly position  The shape of the mat and the number of
 Do not overload your vehicle. the floor mat and assure it does not interfere retaining clips may vary depending on the
with operation of the pedals. Always use the vehicle model.
6-2 Driving safety

Vehicle preparation before driving

 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as
WARNING possible, while still keeping good visibil-
 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
ity, and good control of the steering
properly installed, it can interfere with the
wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls.
operation of the pedals. Interference with
the pedals can cause unintended accelera- Check the instrument panel indicators and
tion and/or increased stopping distances multi-information display for any possible
resulting in a crash and injury. Always problem.
make sure the floor mat does not interfere  Move the front passenger seat as far back
with the accelerator or brake pedal. as possible.
 Always use the retaining clip on the
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
 Make sure that infants and small children 6
are properly restrained in accordance with
mat. all laws and regulations.
 Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down. Vehicle preparation before
 Never install a second mat over or under Defrosters
an existing floor mat.
driving
N00629001796
 Do not use a floor mat designed for Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
another model vehicle even if it is a Mit- For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always and set the blower switch on high. You should
subishi genuine floor mat. observe the following: be able to feel the air blowing against the
 Before driving, be sure to check the fol- windshield.
lowing:
• Periodically check that the floor mat is
Seat belts and seats (Refer to “Defrosting or defogging the wind-
shield and door windows” on page 7-8, 7-13.)
properly secured with the retaining clips.
 Before starting the vehicle, make certain
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
that you and all passengers are seated and
ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
wearing their seat belts properly (with
Tires
other reason, always check the condition
of the floor mat after it has been rein- children in the rear seat, in appropriate
stalled. restraints), and that all the doors are Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
• While the vehicle is stopped with the locked. uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,
engine off, check that the floor mat is not glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look
interfering with the pedals by depressing for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check
the pedals fully. the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires
(including spare tire) for proper pressures.
Driving safety 6-3

Safe driving techniques

Replace your tires before they are heavily can avoid an accident or injury. However, if Before driving the vehicle, check to see if
worn out. you give extra attention to the following the engine runs at the proper speed and if
As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- areas, you can better protect yourself and the headlights are as bright as normally.
sure monitoring system, there is a risk of your passengers: Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors During extreme cold weather, it is possi-
when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, ble that a very low battery could freeze.
replacement should, therefore, be performed road and weather conditions. Leave plenty
only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors of stopping distance between your vehicle WARNING
dealer. and the vehicle ahead.  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
 Before changing lanes, check your mir-
6 rors and use your turn signal light.
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-
tery to explode, which could cause serious
Lights  While driving, watch the behavior of injury or death.
other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians. Always wear protective clothes and a face
Have someone watch while you turn all the  Always obey applicable laws and regula- mask when working with your battery, or
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always let a skilled mechanic do it.
signal indicators and high-beam indicators on leave room for unexpected events, such as
the instrument panel. sudden braking.  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
 If you plan to drive in another country, ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
obey their vehicle registration laws and time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then
Fluid leaks
make sure you will be able to get the right drive your vehicle slowly.
fuel.  Stay at low speeds at first so that the
Check the ground under the vehicle after transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil
parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or have time to spread to all the lubrication
other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are Driving during cold weather points.
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need N00629401497
 Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in
to find out why immediately and have it  Check the battery, including terminals and
cold weather conditions. This is normal
fixed. cables. During extremely cold weather,
and shifting will get easier as the transaxle
the battery will not be as strong. Also, the
warms up.
battery power level may drop because
Safe driving techniques more power is used for cold starting and
 Check the engine antifreeze.
If there is not enough coolant because of a
N00629200111
driving.
leak or from engine overheating, add Mit-
Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and
subishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life
your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
Coolant Premium or equivalent.
6-4 Driving safety
Braking
Please read this section in conjunction
When driving in cold weather For vehicles with manual trans-
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.
axle
WARNING On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking
 Never open the radiator cap when the system, making the brakes less effective. Place the gearshift lever into the “R”
radiator is hot. You could be seriously While driving in such conditions, pay close (Reverse) position when parking on a down-
burned. attention to preceding and following vehicles hill slope, into the 1st position when parking
and to the condition of the road surface. From on an uphill slope.
time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal
Braking and check how effective the brakes are. For vehicles with continuously 6
N00629500446 variable transmission (CVT)
All the parts of the brake system are critical When driving downhill
to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a It is important to take advantage of the engine when parked and that the selector lever is in
repair facility of your choice at regular inter- braking by shifting to a lower gear while the “P” (PARK) position.
vals according to the “WARRANTY AND driving on steep downhill roads in order to When parking on a hill, it is important to set
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. prevent the brakes from overheating. the parking brake before moving the selector
lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
When brakes are wet vents loading the parking brake against the
Parking transaxle gear. When this happens, it is diffi-
N00629601356
cult to move the selector lever out of the “P”
Check the brake system while driving at a
(PARK) position.
low speed immediately after starting, espe- Parking on a hill
cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
they work normally. Parking with the engine run-
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
A film of water can be formed on the brake
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a ning
discs or brake drums and prevent normal
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
braking after driving in heavy rain or through
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. Never leave the engine running while you
large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed.
take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the
If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving
engine running in a closed or poorly venti-
slowly while lightly depressing the brake
lated place.
pedal.
Driving safety 6-5

Loading information
 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum
WARNING Loading information of -
 Leaving the engine running risks injury or N00629900349
(a) Curb weight;
death from accidentally moving the gear-
It is very important to know how much (b) Accessory weight;
shift lever (manual transaxle or the selec-
tor lever (CVT) or from the accumulation
weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and
of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger called the vehicle capacity weight and (d) Production options weight.
compartment. includes the weight of all occupants, cargo  Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi-
and non-factory-installed options. The tire cle with standard equipment including the
and loading information placard located on maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool-
6 Where you park the driver’s door sill of your vehicle will
show how much weight it may properly carry.
ant.
 Accessory weight: the combined weight
(in excess of those standard items which
Your front bumper can be damaged if you may be replaced) of automatic transmis-
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. WARNING
 Never overload your vehicle. Overloading sion, power steering, power brakes, power
Be careful when traveling up or down steep windows, power seats, radio, and heater,
slopes where your bumper can scrape the can damage your vehicle, adversely affect
vehicle performance, including handling to the extent that these items are available
road. as factory- installed equipment (whether
and braking, cause tire failure, and result
in an accident. installed or not).
WARNING  Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
 Do not park your vehicle in areas where It is important to familiarize yourself with the and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)*
combustible materials such as dry grass or following terms before loading your vehicle: times the vehicle’s designated seating
leaves can come in contact with a hot capacity.
exhaust, since a fire could occur.  Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load  Production options weight: the combined
on an individual tire that is determined by weight of those installed regular produc-
distributing to each axle its share of the tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
When leaving the vehicle maximum loaded vehicle weight and in excess of those standard items which
dividing by two. they replace, not previously considered in
When leaving the vehicle unattended, always  Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
carry the key and lock all doors. individual tire that is determined by dis- ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit tributing to each axle its share of the curb rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
area. weight, accessory weight, and normal
occupant weight and dividing by two.
6-6 Driving safety

Loading information
 Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)* well as “the combined weight of occupants Type 2
times the number of specified occupants. and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle
(In your vehicle the number is 3) capacity weight. The weight of roof road is
 Occupant distribution: distribution of included in the definition of “cargo” when
occupants in a vehicle as specified. (In determining the vehicle capacity weight. This
your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, placard also tells you the size and recom-
1 in second row seat) mended inflation pressure for the original
equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
*:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-
information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-14.
son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian
regulations. Type 1
6
Tire and loading information

Steps for Determining Correct
placard
N00630100309
Load Limit
N00630201235
The tire and loading information placard is
1. Locate the statement “The com-
located on the driver’s door sill.
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
This placard shows the maximum number of
occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
4. The resulting figure equals the NOTE
available amount of cargo and
 The above steps for determining
luggage load capacity. For exam-
correct load limit were written in
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
accordance with U.S.A. regula-
1400 lbs. and there will be five
tions.
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-
Your vehicle cannot tow a
cle, the amount of available cargo
trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
and luggage load capacity is 650
6 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650
lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of
this manual.
Driving safety 6-9

Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING WARNING

N00629700464  To reduce the risk of serious injury or  Make sure that the weight of luggage and
death, the combined weights of the driver, the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
passengers and cargo and must never mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load is exceeded, this could
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
To determine the cargo load capacity for your adversely affect vehicle performance, accident.
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may  The total weight of all occupants and lug-
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident. gage, including your roof load, must not
6 For added information, if needed, refer to  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to “Tire and load-
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move when your ing information placard” on page 11-3.
on page 6-7.
vehicle is in motion.  Roof load is determined by adding the
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Having either the rear view blocked, or weight of the roof carrier and the weight
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers your cargo being thrown inside the cabin of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
listed on the safety certification label (A) if you suddenly have to brake can cause a  For additional information, refer to
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door serious accident or injury or death. “Maximum roof load” on page 11-4.
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
weight. your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly. CAUTION
 Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
Loading cargo on the roof vehicle.
N00630400113 For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual provided with the roof carrier.
WARNING  Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
 Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity items on the bottom. Do not load items that
and adversely affect its handling charac- are wider than the roof carrier.
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
6-10 Driving safety

Trailer towing
CAUTION Refitting the covers

 Before driving and after traveling a short dis-
tance, always check the load to make sure it 1. With each cover, put the tabs (C) on the
is securely fastened to the roof carrier. cover in the holes (D) in the roof.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that 2. Slide the cover (B) toward the rear of the
the load remains secure. If the load is not vehicle to install it.
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-
ate a road hazard.
6
NOTE
 To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in Attaching the roof carrier
use.
 Before using an automatic car wash, check Slide each cover (B) toward the front of the
with the attendant to determine if the roof vehicle to remove it.
carrier should be removed.
 Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for raising the sunroof when installing
a roof carrier. (For vehicle with sunroof
only)
Trailer towing
N00629801332
Roof carrier mounting brackets

(if so equipped)
N00630600102
When installing the roof carrier, use the

brackets (A).
The brackets (A) are located under each cover
(B).
Driving safety 6-11

Trailer towing
WARNING
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
It may not be possible to maintain control
or adequate braking.
6-12 Driving safety

Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Automatic air conditioning with Fahrenheit scale
(if so equipped) ............................................................................7-4
Automatic air conditioning with Celsius scale (if so equipped).......7-9
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-14
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-15
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped).....................................7-15
7
Handling of Discs ..........................................................................7-18
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) ....................................................7-20
Important Points on Safety for the Customer ................................7-24
Operation Keys ..............................................................................7-24
Listen to Radio ...............................................................................7-28
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped) .......................................7-29
Listen to CDs .................................................................................7-31
Listen to MP3s ...............................................................................7-32
Listen to an iPod ............................................................................7-33
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device .........................................7-35
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation
(vehicles with Bluetooth 2.0 interface) ......................................7-38
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped) ....................................7-41
Display Indicator ...........................................................................7-43
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment ...........................7-44
System Settings ..............................................................................7-45
Troubleshooting .............................................................................7-49
Antenna ..........................................................................................7-51
Clock (if so equipped) ....................................................................7-52
General information about your radio ...........................................7-53
Vents
Vents Left Right Left Right

N00729900210
A- Knob A- Knob
7 1- Close 1- Close
2- Open 2- Open
1- Center vents
2- Side vents
Side vents NOTE
 On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
Air flow and direction adjust- Move the knob to make adjustments. air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
ments To close the vent, move the knob to the out-
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
indicate a problem.
N00730200301 side as far as possible.
 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
Center vents ing from operating normally.
Move the knob to make adjustments.

To close the vent, move the knob to the inside Changing the mode selection
as far as possible. N00736401689
To change the position and amount of air

flowing from the vents, turn the mode selec-
tion dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on
page 7-5, 7-11.
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-

*- if so equipped *- if so equipped
ger compartment. 7
NOTE Foot/Defroster position
 With the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and
to the upper part of the passenger compart- the door windows.
ment. With the mode selection dial between
the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows
mainly to the leg area.
Foot position
Air flows mainly to the leg area.

Foot/Face position
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger

compartment, and flows to the leg area.
*- if so equipped
Comfort controls 7-3

Automatic air conditioning with Fahrenheit scale (if so equipped)

3- Blower speed selection dial
NOTE Automatic air conditioning 4- Air conditioning switch
 With the mode selection dial between the
with Fahrenheit scale (if so 5- Mode selection dial
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly 6- Electric rear window defogger switch
to the leg area. With the mode selection dial equipped)
P.5-138
between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air N00731501382
flows mainly to the windshield and the door

windows.
The air conditioning can only be used while NOTE
the engine is running.  There is an interior air temperature sensor
(A) in the illustrated position.
Defroster position CAUTION Never place anything over the sensor, since
doing so will prevent it from functioning
7  The engine speed may increase when the air
conditioning is operating.
properly.
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the
With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehi-
door windows. cle will creep to a greater degree than with a
lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
Control panel
N00711801653
Blower speed selection dial

N00736900094
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion, select the blower speed by turning the
blower speed selection dial.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
1- Temperature control dial the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
2- Air selection switch will stop.

NOTE Mode selection dial

 While the engine coolant temperature is low, N00737100093
the temperature of the air from the heater To change the amount of air flowing from the
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
even if you have selected warm air with the “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
dial.
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting) 7
Outside air will be introduced and the air
Temperature control dial conditioning will stop. In this case, manual
N00737001419 operation is possible.
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
passenger compartment. Turn the temperature to the lowest setting)
control dial clockwise to make the air Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate. In this case, you
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
cannot select outside air and turn the air
air cooler. conditioning off. Air selection switch
N00737201394
The above indicates the factory settings. You Normally, use the outside air position to keep
can personalize the air selection switch and the windshield and side windows clear and to
air conditioning switch to match your per- quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
sonal preferences. shield.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a To change the air selection, simply press the
repair facility of your choice for assistance. air selection switch. A sound will be made
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning every time you press the switch.
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
page 7-7.  Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection Outside air is introduced into the passen-
(Changing the function setting)” on page 7-6. ger compartment.

 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} Press the air selection switch for about 10
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
NOTE seconds or longer.
 If the mode selection dial is set between
compartment. When the setting has changed, the system
“ ” and “ ”, you cannot turn the air con- will beep and the indicator light will flash.
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi- • When the setting has changed from
tion.
enabled to disabled, the system will beep
This prevents the windows from fogging up.
three times and the indicator will flash
 When the mode selection dial or the blower
speed selection dial is set to the “AUTO”
three times.
position again after manual operation, the air • When the setting has changed from dis-
selection switch will also be automatically abled to enabled, the system will beep
controlled. two times and the indicator light will
7 flash three times.
Personalizing the air selection NOTE

(Changing the function setting)  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
When the air conditioning turns on, the air N00760001116 control”.
selection is controlled automatically. When  While the mode selection dial is set between
You can change the following functions to
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection
match your preference. “ ” and “ ” position, the air selection
automatically goes back to the outside air will automatically change to the outside air
position.  Enable automatic air control: position, even if the system is set to “Disable
If high cooling performance is desired, or if When the mode selection dial or the automatic air control”, in order to prevent
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in blower speed selection dial is set to the windows from fogging up.
some way, use the recirculation position. “AUTO” position, the air selection switch
Switch to the outside air position every now will also be automatically controlled.
and then to keep the windows from fogging Air conditioning switch
up.  Disable automatic air control: N00737301438
Even when the mode selection dial or the Push the switch, and the air conditioning
CAUTION blower speed selection dial is set to the compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch indicator light (A) will come on.
cause the windows to fog up. will not be automatically controlled. A sound will be made every time you push
the switch.
 Changing the settings:


the system will beep two times and the
Personalizing the air conditioning
indicator light will flash three times.
switch (Changing the function set-
ting)
N00759800032
NOTE
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
You can change the following functions to conditioning control”.
match your preference.  While the mode selection dial is set between
 Enable automatic air conditioning control: “ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
When the mode selection dial or blower ing will run automatically, even if the system
is set to “Disable automatic air conditioning
speed selection dial has been set to the
control”, in order to prevent windows from
Push the switch again and the air condition- “AUTO” position or when the tempera- fogging up. 7
ing compressor will stop and the indicator ture control dial has been set to the mini-
light (A) goes off. mum temperature, the air conditioning
switch is automatically controlled.
Operating the air conditioning
NOTE  Disable automatic air conditioning con- system (automatic mode)
 If a problem is detected in the air condition- trol: N00731701498
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica- The air conditioning switch is not auto-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air matically controlled, unless the air condi-
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then tioning switch is used.
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
tioning indicator light does not blink there is  Changing the settings:
no problem. If it does blink, have it checked Press the air conditioning switch for about
10 seconds or longer.
a repair facility of your choice.
When the setting has changed, the system
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
and the air conditioning indicator light (A) • When the setting has changed from
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press enabled to disabled,
the air conditioning switch once to turn the the system will beep three times and the
In normal conditions, use the system in the
system off, then once more to turn it back on. indicator will flash three times.
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will • When the setting has changed from dis-
stop. abled to enabled,


1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the selection dial and the mode selection dial to
For ordinary defrosting
“AUTO” position. the desired positions. To return to automatic
2. Select the temperature control dial to the operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi- Use this setting to keep the windshield and
desired temperature. The temperature can tion. door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
be set within a range of around 61 to 89. leg area heated (when driving in rain or
The temperature will increase as the dial Defrosting or defogging (wind- snow).
is turned to the right.
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
shield, door windows)
N00732401535
“AUTO” position.
CAUTION
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view
7 speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will through all the windows.
be controlled automatically.
To remove frost or mist from the windshield

NOTE and door windows, use the mode selection
 Set the temperature at about 75 under normal
dial (“ ” or “ ”).
conditions.
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, position.
even if you have selected warm air with the 2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows ing the blower speed selection dial.
from fogging up, the vent mode will be 3. Select your desired temperature by turn-
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower ing the temperature control dial.
speed will be reduced.

system (manual mode)
N00731800072
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed

Automatic air conditioning with Celsius scale (if so equipped)

For quick defrosting
NOTE Control panel
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature N00711801666
control dial to the maximum cool position.

This will blow cool air on the window glass
and fog it up.
Automatic air conditioning

with Celsius scale (if so
equipped)
N00731501395
7
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
The air conditioning can only be used while
position. 1- Temperature control dial
the engine is running.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 2- Air selection switch
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- 3- Blower speed selection dial
tion. CAUTION 4- Air conditioning switch
 The engine speed may increase when the air 5- Mode selection dial
conditioning is operating.
NOTE 6- Electric rear window defogger switch
With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehi-
 While the mode selection dial is set between cle will creep to a greater degree than with a
P. 5-138
“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition- lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake
ing compressor will run automatically. The pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
outside air position will also be selected
automatically.
 If the mode selection dial is set between
“ ” and “ ” you cannot turn the air con-
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi-
tion. This prevents the windows from
fogging up.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.

NOTE NOTE
 There is an interior air temperature sensor  While the engine coolant temperature is low,
(A) in the illustrated position. the temperature of the air from the heater
Never place anything over the sensor, since will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
doing so will prevent it from functioning even if you have selected warm air with the
properly. dial.
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
7 after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
Temperature control dial • Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
N00737001422 to the highest setting)
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the Outside air will be introduced and the air
passenger compartment. Turn the temperature conditioning will stop.
Blower speed selection dial control dial clockwise to make the air • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
N00736900111 to the lowest setting)
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- air cooler. conditioning will operate.
tion, select the blower speed by turning the
blower speed selection dial.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the The above indicates the factory settings. You
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock- can personalize the air selection switch and
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to air conditioning switch to match your per-
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow sonal preferences.
will stop. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
page 7-12.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)” on page


7-11. Outside air is introduced into the passen-
Personalizing the air selection
ger compartment.
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} (Changing the function setting)
Mode selection dial N00760001129
N00737100136
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment. You can change the following functions to
To change the amount of air flowing from the match your preference.
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.  Enable automatic air control:
When the mode selection dial or the
blower speed selection dial is set to the
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch
will also be automatically controlled.
7
 Disable automatic air control:
Even when the mode selection dial or the
blower speed selection dial is set to the
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch
will not be automatically controlled.
When the air conditioning turns on, the air
selection is controlled automatically. When  Changing the settings:
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection Press the air selection switch for about 10
automatically goes back to the outside air seconds or longer.
Air selection switch position. When the setting has changed, the system
N00737201408 If high cooling performance is desired, or if will beep and the indicator light will flash.
Normally, use the outside air position to keep the outside air is dusty or contaminated in • When the setting has changed from
the windshield and side windows clear and to some way, use the recirculation position. enabled to disabled,
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- Switch to the outside air position every now the system will beep three times and the
shield. and then to keep the windows from fogging indicator will flash three times.
up. • When the setting has changed from dis-
To change the air selection, simply press the abled to enabled,
air selection switch. A sound will be made the system will beep two times and the
every time you press the switch.
CAUTION
 Using recirculated air for a long time may indicator light will flash three times.
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} cause the windows to fog up.


Push the switch again and the air condition- When the mode selection dial or blower
NOTE ing compressor will stop and the indicator speed selection dial has been set to the
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
light (A) goes off. “AUTO” position or when the tempera-
control”.
ture control dial has been set to the mini-
 While the mode selection dial is set to the
NOTE mum temperature, the air conditioning
“ ” position, the air selection will auto- switch is automatically controlled.
matically change to the outside air position,  If a problem is detected in the air condition-
even if the system is set to “Disable auto- ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
 Disable automatic air conditioning con-
matic air control”, in order to prevent win- tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then trol:
dows from fogging up.
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi- The air conditioning switch is not auto-
tioning indicator light does not blink there is matically controlled, unless the air condi-
7 Air conditioning switch no problem. If it does blink, have it checked tioning switch is used.
N00737301441
a repair facility of your choice.  Changing the settings
Push the switch, and the air conditioning  Sometimes, for example after using a high- Press the air conditioning switch for about
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, 10 seconds or longer.
indicator light (A) will come on. and the air conditioning indicator light (A) When the setting has changed, the system
A sound will be made every time you push blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press will beep and the indicator light will flash.
the switch. the air conditioning switch once to turn the • When the setting has changed from
system off, then once more to turn it back on. enabled to disabled,
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
the system will beep three times and the
stop.
indicator will flash three times.
• When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled,
Personalizing the air conditioning the system will beep two times and the
switch (Changing the function set- indicator light will flash three times.
ting)
NOTE
N00759800029
You can change the following functions to  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
match your preference. conditioning control”.
 Enable automatic air conditioning control:


2. Select the temperature control dial to the operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi-
NOTE desired temperature. The temperature can tion.
be set within a range of around 18 to 32.
“ ” position, the air conditioning will run The temperature will increase as the dial
automatically, even if the system is set to Defrosting or defogging (wind-
is turned to the right.
“Disable automatic air conditioning control”,
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
shield, door windows)
in order to prevent windows from fogging N00732401548
up.
“AUTO” position.
CAUTION
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view
Operating the air conditioning speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will through all the windows.
system (automatic mode) be controlled automatically.
N00731701502
To remove frost or mist from the windshield
7
NOTE and door windows, use the mode selection
 Set the temperature at about 25 under normal
dial (“ ” or “ ”).
conditions.
 While the engine coolant temperature is low, For ordinary defrosting
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, Use this setting to keep the windshield and
even if you have selected warm air with the door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows leg area heated (when driving in rain or
from fogging up, the vent mode will be
snow).
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
speed will be reduced.
In normal conditions, use the system in the

AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the system (manual mode)
“AUTO” position. N00731800098
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection dial and the mode selection dial to
the desired positions. To return to automatic

Important air conditioning operating tips

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” 3. When running the air conditioning, make
NOTE sure the air intake, which is located in
position.
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the out- front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
“ ” position, the air conditioning com- tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
side air position.
pressor will run automatically. The outside the air-intake chamber may reduce air
3. Select your desired blower speed by turn- air position will also be selected automati-
ing the blower speed selection dial. flow and plug the water drains.
cally.
4. Select your desired temperature by turn-
 While the “ ” position is selected, you
ing the temperature control dial. Air conditioning system refrig-
cannot turn the air conditioning off or select
For quick defrosting

the recirculation position. erant and lubricant recommen-
This prevents the windows from fogging up.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
dations
7 side vents toward the door windows.
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature If the air conditioning seems less effective
control dial to the maximum cool position. than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
This will blow cool air on the window glass leak.
and fog it up. Have the system inspected by your authorized
of your choice.
Important air conditioning
operating tips
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” N00733700280
position. 1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever

2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- vehicle interior extremely hot which then
tion. requires more time to cool. If it is neces-
sary to park in the sun, open the windows
for the first few minutes of air condition-
ing to expel the hot air.
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed
when the air conditioning is in use. The
entry of outside air through open windows
will reduce cooling efficiency.
Air purifier
The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and
CAUTION dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace
NOTE
 The air conditioning system in your vehicle  To listen to the audio system while the
it periodically. For the maintenance interval,
must be charged with the refrigerant HFC- engine is not running, turn the ignition
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56. switch to the “ACC” position.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will NANCE MANUAL”. If the ignition switch is left in the “ACC”
cause severe damage and may require replac- position, the accessory power will automati-
ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning NOTE cally turn off after a certain period of time
system.  Operation in certain conditions such as driv- and you will no longer be able to use the
The release of refrigerant into the atmo- ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the audio system. The accessory power comes
sphere is not recommended. air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser- on again if the ignition switch is turned from
The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi- vice life of the filter. When you feel that the the “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power
cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone
layer. However, it may contribute slightly to
air flow is lower than normal or when the auto-cutout function” on page 5-53. 7
windshield or windows start to fog up easily,  If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
global warming. replace the air filter. it may create noise in the audio equipment.
It is recommended that the old refrigerant be Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a This does not mean that anything is wrong
saved and recycled for future use. repair facility of your choice for assistance. with your audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far away
as possible from the audio equipment.
During a long period of disuse AM/FM radio/CD player (if
 If foreign objects or water get into the audio
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor
so equipped) comes from it, immediately turn off the
The air conditioning should be operated for at audio system and have it checked at an
N00734302098
least five minutes each week, even in cold authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
weather. This includes the quick defrosting The audio system can only be used when the repair facility of your choice. Never try to
mode. Operating the air condition system ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys-
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres- tem until it is inspected by a qualified per-
position.
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning son.
in the best operating condition.  If the audio system is damaged by foreign
objects, water, or fire, have the system
checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors
Air purifier technician.
N00733800151
The air conditioning system is equipped with

an air filter to remove pollen and dust.

AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)
NOTE Trademarks NOTE

 The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is N00715300066
 For vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
located under the front left seat.  Product names and other proper names the types of devices that can be connected
Do not subject the amplifier to a strong are the trademarks or registered trade- may vary.
impact. marks of their respective owners. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
It could damage the amplifier or malfunc-  Furthermore, even if there is no specific For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
tioning could result. North America website.
denotation of trademarks or registered
trademarks, these are to be observed in [For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
Important Points on Usage their entirety.
website. Please read and agree to the “Warn-
N00715000021
ing about Links to the Web Sites of Other
7 Companies”. The websites mentioned above
iPod/iPhone Playback Function (if may connect you to websites other than the
so equipped) “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” Mitsubishi Motors website.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
mean that an electronic accessory has
ucts/index.html
 This product supports audio playback been designed to connect specifically to
from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif- iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been
fering versions mean that playback cannot certified by the developer to meet Apple
be guaranteed. performance standards.
 Please be aware that depending on the iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and
iPod/iPhone model or version, operation iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
may differ. registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Apple is not responsible for the operation
How to Clean of this device or its compliance with
N00715200023
safety and regulatory standards.
 If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a
soft cloth. NOTE
 If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in  iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual
neutral detergent diluted in water, and users to privately reproduce and play back
then wrung out. Do not use benzene, thin- non- copyrighted material as well as material
ners, or other chemical wipes. This may that may be legally copied and reproduced.
harm the surface. Infringement of copyright is prohibited.

AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)
5th generation 5th generation 160GB (2009) 160GB (2007) 80GB

(video) (video)
60GB 80GB 30GB
7
6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

8GB 16GB (video camera) 8GB 16GB
8GB 16GB
3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminum) 1GB 2GB 4GB
4GB 8GB 2GB 4GB 8GB

Handling of Discs
4th generation 3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

8GB 32GB 64GB 32GB 64GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
7
16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB
N00715400025
handling of discs.
Handling of Discs This explains care that should be taken in the

Handling of Discs
 If discs are not going to be used for a long Maxi-
Important Points on Handling
period of time, remove these from the mum Com-
product. Type Size
 Fingerprints or other marks on the read playback ments
surface of the disc may result in its con- time
tent being more difficult to read. When Disc Playback Environment CD-DA 5 inches 74 minutes —
holding the disc, grip both edges, or one (12 cm)
edge and the center hole, in order that the In cold environments such as in mid-winter
read surface is not touched. when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn-
 Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- ing the heater on and immediately trying to CD-TEXT 5 inches 74 minutes —
wise damage the disc. use the product may cause condensation (12 cm)
 Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is (water droplets) to form on the disc and inter-
already within the device. This can result nal optical components, and this may prevent 7
in damage to discs, or malfunction. the product from operating correctly. CD-R/RW 5 inches — •Disc
(12 cm) contain-
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait ing MP3
Cleaning a short time before use. files
 Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright
disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a cir-
cular motion. Instead, wipe gently out- Actions such as unauthorized reproduction,
wards from the center of the disc to the broadcast, public performance, or rental of
outer edge. discs that comprise other than personal use Discs That May Not Be Played Back
 New discs may have burring around the are prohibited by law.
outer edge or in the hole in the center.  Playback of discs other than those
Ensure you check for these. If there are described in “Types of Disc That Can Be
burrs, these may lead to faulty operation,
Types of Disc That Can Be Played Back” is not guaranteed.
therefore ensure these are removed. Played Back  3 inches (8 cm) discs may not be used.
N00715500026  Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for
The following marks are printed on the disc example, heart-shaped), as these may
Important Points on Storage
label, package, or jacket. result in malfunction. Additionally, discs
 When not using discs, ensure these are that have transparent portions may not be
kept in cases, and stored out of direct sun- played back.
light.

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

 Discs that have not been finalized cannot • There may be noise during playback.
be played back. • There may be jumping in the audio.
CAUTION
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
 Even if recorded using the correct format • The disc may not be recognized.
play back MP3 format audio files.
on a recorder or computer, application • The first track may not be played back.
 Actions such as copying audio CDs or files
software settings and environments; disc • It may take longer than usual until start
and either distributing these to others for free
peculiarities, damage, or marking; or dirt of playback of tracks. or for charge, or uploading files via the Inter-
or condensation on the lens inside the • Playback may start from within the net or other means to servers is an infringe-
product may render the disc unplayable. track. ment of the law.
 Depending on the disc, some functions • Some parts may not be played back.  Do not append the file extensions “.mp3”,
may not be used, or the disc may not play • Tracks may freeze during playback. “.wma”, or “.m4a”, to other than
back. • Tracks may be displayed erroneously. MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
7  Do not use discs with cracks or warps. discs with these types of files recorded upon
 If the disc has stickers affixed, remains them may cause the files to be incorrectly
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe-
Audio Files identified for playback, which may lead to
sive, then do not use the disc. (MP3/WMA/AAC) loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or
accident.
 Discs that have decorative labels or stick- N00715600027
ers may not be used. This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC
format audio files recorded on CD-ROM, NOTE
Nonstandard CDs CD-R/RW, and USB devices.  Depending on the condition of the disc
recorder or recording software used, correct
This product will play back audio CDs, how- There are limitations on the files and media playback may not be possible. In these cases,
ever please be aware of the following points that can be used, therefore read the following refer to the user manual for your product or
regarding CD standards. prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format software.
audio files on discs or USB devices.  Depending on your computer’s operating
 Ensure that you use discs with on the Additionally, ensure you read the user manu- system, version, software, or settings, files
label surface. als for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing may not have a file extension appended. In
 Playback of other than standard CDs is software, and ensure these are used correctly. these cases, append the file extensions
not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files “.mp3”, “.wma”, or “.m4a” when copying
includes title information or other data, then the files.
played back, the audio quality cannot be
this can be displayed.  Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be
guaranteed.
played back.
 When playing back other than standard
CDs, the following may occur.

Data Formats That Can Be Speci-

ROOT Name fica- Explanation
Played Back Folder
tion
N00715700028
Audio file
Format ISO96 Level 1 Maximum 8
Data formats that can be played on discs
specifica- 60 character file
(CD-ROM, CD-R/RW) and USB devices dif-
tions name, and 3
fer.
character file
extension.
Data format DISC USB device
(single-byte
MP3 alphanumeric
WMA X
capital letters,
numerals, “_”
7
1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level
AAC X may be used)
ISO96 Joliet Files names up
60 to a maximum
Folder Structure exten- 64 characters
N00715800029 sion can be used.
Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized. Multises- Not supported (only first session
You can create a folder structure as in Genre - sion supported)
Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st
format audio files) for management of tracks. mum level)
number
of levels
Maxi- 700 folders (including root)
mum
folder
number


Speci- What Is MP3? Item Details
Name fica- Explanation N00715900020 Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
tion
MP3 is an abbreviation of “MPEG-1 Audio MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on Layer 3”. MPEG is an abbreviation of
mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA, Sampling MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48
“Motion Picture Experts Group”, and this is a
num- and AAC files not included) frequency MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24
video compression standard used in video
[kHz]
ber*1 CDs, etc.
MP3 is one of the audio compression meth- Bit rate MPEG-1: 32 to 320
File Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni-
ods contained in the MPEG audio standard, [kbps] MPEG-2: 8 to 160
name and code, 32 characters), files/ fold-
folder ers with file/ folder names and reduces the quality of sounds that are
VBR (vari- Support
7 name longer than this will not be dis- beyond the auditory resolution of the human
able bit rate)
restric- played or played back. ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
creating high-quality data with a lower data Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual
tions
size. mode channel/ Monaural
USB sup- The recommended file system is Because this can compress CD audio to File exten- mp3
ported FAT32. approximately 1/10 its original data size with- sion
formats 1 partition only out perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs
Supported ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,
can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.
tag informa- Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4
*1:Do not include other than
MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if stor- tion (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni-
ing many tracks within the same folder, CAUTION code)), Titles, Artist name,
these may not be recognized even if less  MP3 files different to the standards at right Album name
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
than the maximum number of tracks. In Maximum 64 characters
names may not be displayed correctly.
these cases, divide the tracks up into mul- number of
tiple folders. characters
that can be
Standards for MP3 Files That Can
indicated on
NOTE Be Played Back the display
 The order in which folders and audio files
are displayed on this product may be differ- Specifications for MP3 files that can be
ent to how they are displayed on a computer. played are as below.

What Is WMA? Item Details CAUTION

N00716000028 Specification Windows Media Audio  AAC supports digital rights management
WMA is an abbreviation of Windows Media Version7.0/8.0/9.0 (DRM). This product cannot play back AAC
files protected using this system.
Audio, and this is an audio compression for- Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48
 AAC files different to the standards at right
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression quency [kHz]
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
format that has a higher compression ratio
Bit rate [kbps] 48 to 320 names may not be displayed correctly.
than MP3.
VBR Support
(variable bit rate)
NOTE Standards for AAC Files That Can
 Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Channel mode Stereo/Monaural
Be Played Back
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor- File extension wma 7
poration (USA) and in other countries.
Supported tag WMA tags Specifications for AAC files that can be
information Title name, Artist name, played are as below.
Album name
CAUTION
 WMA supports digital rights management Maximum num- 64 characters Item Details
(DRM). This product cannot play back ber of characters Specification Advanced Audio
WMA files protected using this system. that can be indi- Coding
 WMA files different to the standards at right cated on the dis- MPEG4/AAC-LC
may not play back correctly, or file/folder play MPEG2/AAC-LC
names may not be displayed correctly.
 “Pro”, “Lossless”, and “Voice” are not sup- Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
ported. What Is AAC? fre- 24/32/44.1/48
N00716100029
quency MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
[kHz] 24/32/44.1/48
AAC is an abbreviation of Advanced Audio
Standards for WMA Files That Coding, and this is an audio compression Bit rate MPEG4 8 to 320
Can Be Played Back standard used in “MPEG-2” and “MPEG-4”. [kbps] MPEG2 8 to 320
This features 1.4x the compression of MP3,
Specifications for WMA files that can be with comparable audio quality. VBR Support
played are as below. (variable bit rate)
Channel mode Stereo/Monaural

Important Points on Safety for the Customer

Item Details WARNING WARNING
File extension m4a  The driver should not perform compli-  During thunderstorms, do not touch the
cated operations while driving. antenna or the front panel.
Supported tag AAC tags or ID3 tags
Performing complicated operations while This may lead to electrical shock from
information Title, Artist name,
driving may prevent the driver looking lightning.
Album name where they are going, and cause an acci-
Maximum number 64 characters dent.
of characters that Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca- CAUTION
can be indicated on tion before performing such operations.  Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks
the display  Do not use during malfunctions, such as on the product.
when no sound is audible. Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may
7 This may lead to accident, fire, or electric prevent heat from escaping from within the
Important Points on Safety shock. product, leading to fire or malfunction.
 Ensure water or other foreign objects do
for the Customer not enter the product.
 Do not turn the volume up to the extent that
you cannot hear sounds from outside the
N00716200020 This may lead to smoking, fire, electric vehicle while driving.
This product features a number of pictorial shock, or malfunction. Driving without being able to hear sounds
indications as well as points concerning han-  Do not insert foreign objects into the disc from outside the vehicle may result in an
dling so that you can use the product cor- slot. accident.
rectly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent This may lead to fire, electric shock, or  Do not insert your hand or fingers into the
malfunction. disc slot.
injury or damage to yourself, other users, or
 In the event of abnormalities occurring This may result in injury.
property.
when foreign objects or water enter the
product, resulting in smoke or a strange
WARNING smell, immediately stop using the product,
 The driver should not pay close attention and consult an authorized Mitsubishi Operation Keys
to the display while driving. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your N00716300021
This may prevent the driver looking choice.

where they are going, and cause an acci- Continuing to use the product may result Turn the Power ON/ OFF
dent. in accident, fire, or electric shock.
N00716400022
 Do not disassemble or modify the product.
1. Press the PWR/VOL key.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or elec-
tric shock.

Operation Keys
Disc slot
Disc
*Label side
AFA109400 AFA109413
Turn the power on, and resume playback Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to Push the disc in a certain amount, and the 7
from the previous status. increase, and counterclockwise to product will pull the disc in, and playback
2. Press the PWR/VOL key. decrease the volume. will start.
Turn the power OFF. 2. Press the key.
NOTE This will eject the disc from the product,
NOTE  The maximum value for volume is 45, and
so remove the disc.
 Hold down the steering MODE key to also
the minimum is 0.
turn the audio function ON/OFF.
 The initial setting for volume is “17”. CAUTION
 When replacing discs, first ensure that the
vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
Adjust Volume Insert/Eject Discs ping is permitted.
N00716500023
N00716600024  Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the vol- objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
ume. injury, smoking, or fire.
label surface up.
 3 inches (8 cm) CDs are not supported.

Operation Keys
Explanation of Buttons
N00716700083
This explains names and functions of each part.
1- key 5- RADIO key 9- CAT key

Use to eject a disc. Switch the radio and the band. CAT (category content) searches and
6- PWR/VOL key scans can be performed while receiving
2- 3 key/4 key
Adjust the volume, and turn the power radio RBDS broadcasts.
For audio, rewind/fast forward.
ON/OFF. Search channels in the satellite radio*1.
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4.
7- MEDIA key 10- SCAN key
3- 2RDM key
Switch between CD and other sources. For audio, play scan playback; for
For audio, play random playback; for
Hold down the key to switch to AUX. radio, scan for stations.
radio, use as preset key 2.
8- INFO key 11- Disc slot
4- 1RPT key
Switch the content of the display. 12- PAGE key
For audio, play repeat playback; for
radio, use as preset key 1. Display indicator page advance.

Operation Keys
13- 5 key 3- MODE key
Steering wheel audio remote
Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*2, and use Hold down to turn the audio function
control switches ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is
as preset key 5 for radio. N00716800084
pressed, this switches the audio source.
14- 6 key
The order of switching is as shown
Return during audio track search, and
below.
stop Bluetooth Audio*2. If devices are not connected, then these
For radio, use as preset key 6. are to be skipped, and the next source
15- key/ key selected.
For audio, select audio track/file; for
radio, perform automatic station selec-
tion. CD or MP3 7
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. 1
iPod* or USB device
16- MENU key
Bluetooth Audio*2
Switch to Menu mode. 1- Vol + key, - key
Adjust audio functions and the mobile AM
17- /SEL key
Adjust audio quality and select items. phone function volume. FM1, 2
For radio, manually select stations. 2- CH key, key SIR1, 2, 3, 4*3
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. Select CD and other audio source tracks
1
* : Requires a satellite tuner connection. and radio stations.
Hold down to skip up and down through *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- required.
tooth-capable audio device in equip- tracks.
Hold down to switch the satellite radio *2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
ment by type (vehicles with a tooth-capable audio device (vehicles
band during satellite radio reception.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
* : Requires a satellite tuner connection.
3

Listen to Radio
2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
Listen to Radio /SEL key Increases the frequency
(clockwise) being received. key to the 6 key.
N00716900072
This explains how to listen to AM and FM key Release the button to start A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is
radio broadcasts. (hold down) seek station selection, and registered.
when a station is received,
key scanning stops.
To Listen to the Radio (hold down) NOTE
 The preset memory can register a maximum
Press the RADIO key to switch the band. of 6 stations for each band.
Scan Station Selection  If a preset key that already has a station reg-
Switch between AM and FM bands. istered is selected, then this is overwritten
7 The selected band is indicated on the display. Collective search for stations that can be with the new preset.
received.  Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered frequency.
NOTE Press the SCAN key.
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
SIR1*, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*. When a station is received, this is played for 5
 If no signal is received, bands will not be
CAT Search
seconds, then the product searches for the
switched to SIR2, SIR3, or SIR4. next station.
During RBDS broadcast reception, select
*: When a satellite tuner is connected CAT (category content), and automatically
NOTE scan for stations.
 Press this button again while receiving the
Manual/Seek Station Selection station to return to normal reception. 1. During FM reception, press the CAT key.
This switches to the CAT selection mode.
2. Press the CAT key to select CAT.
Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis-
Preset Memory 3. Press the key or key.
ten to.
The CAT (category content) indicator will
Register the broadcast station in advance, and flash, and station selection will automati-
/SEL key Reduces the frequency cally start.
being received. select this at a later time.
(counter- When a station is received, the frequency
clockwise) 1. Tune in to the frequency to register. is displayed.

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)

*:If no signal is received, bands will not be
NOTE Listen to Satellite Radio (if so switched.
 This receives the station detected first.
equipped)
 10 seconds after reception, CAT search mode
N00717000067
will be cancelled.
 To receive a different station, press the This section explains how to listen to satellite Select a Station
key or key again. radio.
Press the key or key to select the sta-
NOTE tion.
CAT Scan  A subscription is required to listen to satel-
lite radio. Satellite radio cannot be received Go down one step from the
During RBDS broadcast reception, select after the free trial period has expired. key
channel being received. 7
CAT (category content) to perform a collec-  If no subscription has been made when the
Go up one step from the
free trial period expires, the display will key
tive search for stations. channel being received.
alternate between “CALL” and “888-539-
1. During FM reception, press the CAT key. SIRI”. While the key is held down,
key
This switches to the CAT selection mode. it will cycle down through
(Hold down)
2. Press the CAT key to select CAT. the channels being received.
3. Press the SCAN key. To listen to Satellite Radio While the key is held down,
When a broadcast station is received, this key it will cycle up through the
is played for 5 seconds, then the product (Hold down)
Press the RADIO key to switch the band. channels being received.
searches for the next station.
Switches between SIR1, SIR2, SIR3, and
SIR4 bands. NOTE
NOTE The selected band is indicated on the display.  When cycling up/down through channels, the
 Press this key again while receiving the sta- channel number display in the upper level of
tion to return to normal reception. the display changes.
NOTE
 When channel number “000” is selected, the
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
SIRIUS ID (12 digits) is displayed.
SIR1, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*.
 Switch satellite radio bands by holding down
the key or key on the steering remote
control switch.

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)
Scan Station Selection NOTE Channel Search

 Press the SCAN key or CAT key again while
Channels are received in order and take 10 receiving the channel to return to normal Other channels can be selected while listen-
reception.
seconds each. ing to a channel.
 Turning the /SET key will cancel.
1. Press the CAT key.
Scan All Channels Switches to the category search mode,
Preset Memory and the category name is indicated on the
Press the SCAN key. display.
All of the channels are scanned. Register the channel in advance, and select 2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
7 this at a later time. gory.
3. Press the /SEL key.
NOTE 1. Tune in to the channel to register. Switches to channel search mode.
 Press this key again while receiving the 2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
channel to return to normal reception. 4. Turn the /SEL key to select the chan-
key to the 6 key. nel.
 Selecting a channel will cancel this.
A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is 5. Press the /SEL key.
registered. A “Beep” sounds, and the selected chan-
Scan Category Channels nel is received. (Channel preliminary set-
NOTE ting mode)
1. Press the CAT key.  The preset memory can register a maximum The channel name shown on the display
Switches to the category search mode, of 6 stations per band. flashes.
and the category name is indicated on the  If a preset key that already has a channel reg- Press the /SEL key again to cancel the
display. istered is selected, then this is overwritten search mode and return to normal recep-
2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- with the new preset. tion.
gory.  Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered channel. 6. To continue the search, turn the /SEL
3. Press the SCAN key. key to select the channel.
The preset channels on the display are shown
The channels in the selected category are The selected channel is received.
as “P1” though “P6”.
scanned.
Cancels the search mode and returns to
normal reception.

Listen to CDs
NOTE Listen to CDs Switch Playback Mode

 After making preliminary settings in the N00717100026
channel search mode, this will switch to the Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
This explains how to listen to audio CDs
channel being received.
(CD-DA/CD-TEXT). playback are possible.
 Channel number “000” is for the SIRUS ID
display, so it cannot be searched.
 If the “CAT ALL” category is selected, all Play CDs Repeat Playback (RPT)
channels can be searched in the channel
search mode. Press the 1RPT key.
Insert the disc.
 In the category mode, press the CAT key to
cancel search mode. Repeat playback of the track currently being
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
 In the channel search mode, press the 6  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-25) played. 7
key to return to the category search mode. If a disc is already within the product, press
 In the channel preliminary setting mode, the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the NOTE
press the 6 key to return to the category source.  Pressing again will cancel.
search mode without returning to the previ-  Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding,
ous channel search mode. or rewinding will cancel.
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds, the Select the Track
search mode will be cancelled.
Press the key or key to select the Random Playback (RDM)
track.
Initialize the CODE (Passcode)
This enables selection of the next or previous Press the 2RDM key.
The CODE required for changing the LOCK track.

Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.
settings in the satellite settings is initialized.
(The factory setting is “1111”.) Fast Forward or Rewind NOTE
When the power is off, press the PWR/VOL  Pressing again will cancel.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.  Ejecting will cancel this.
key while holding down the /SEL key.
 “Turn the Power ON/OFF” (P7-24) Fast forward/rewind is possible.

Listen to MP3s
If a disc is already within the product, press
Scan Playback (SCAN) Repeat Playback (RPT)
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
source.
Press the SCAN key. Press the 1RPT key.
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks NOTE Repeat playback of the track currently being
on the whole disc in order.  Depending on the file structure, it may take played.
some time to read the contents of the disc.
NOTE NOTE
 Press this button again during playback if  Pressing again will cancel.
you wish to hear that track, and that track Select the Track (File)  Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or
7 will play normally. rewinding will cancel.
Press the key or key to select the
track.
Listen to MP3s Folder Repeat Playback
N00717200027
This enables selection of the next or previous
track. Hold down the 1RPT key.
This explains how to listen to audio files on a
disc.
Fast Forward or Rewind Repeat playback of the tracks within the
folder currently being played.
CAUTION
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
play back MP3 format audio files.
NOTE
Fast forward/rewind is possible.  Pressing again will cancel.
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
playback will not be cancelled.
To Listen to MP3s Switch Playback Mode
Insert the disc. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Random Playback (RDM)
playback are possible.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-25) Press the 2RDM key.

Listen to an iPod
Play the tracks in the folder in a random
order.
Search Tracks Listen to an iPod
N00717300060
Search folders and files, and select a track. By connecting commercially-available

NOTE
iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can
 Pressing again will cancel.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. play back tracks on these through the product.
Folder Random Playback Files within the selected folder are dis-
CAUTION
 Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in
played.
the vehicle.
Hold down the 2RDM key. 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.  Never hold these devices in your hand to
Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran- 4. Press the /SEL key. operate while driving, as this is dangerous. 7
dom order.  No indemnification for data loss resulting
This plays the selected file (track). when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
product will be possible.
NOTE  Depending on how the devices are handled,
 Pressing again will cancel.
NOTE audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
 While the folder is selected, press the 6 it is recommended that data be backed up.
key to cancel track search mode.
Scan Playback (SCAN)  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
selecting the folder, then track search mode NOTE
will be cancelled.
Press the SCAN key.  Depending on the generation, model, or soft-
 Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks key to start playback from the first track in on this product may not be possible.
that folder. (P.7-16) Additionally, playback as
in the folder currently being played in order.
 While the file is selected, press the 6 key explained in this document may not be possi-
to return to the previous operation. ble.
NOTE  While the file is selected, hold down the
 Press this button again during playback if
6 key to cancel track search mode.
you wish to hear that track, and that track
 If there is no operation for five seconds after
will play normally.
selecting the file, that file is played back.
 Disc operations such as selecting a track will
cancel track search mode.

Listen to an iPod
NOTE NOTE Select the Track (File)

 For vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,  iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may
the types of devices that can be connected mean that connection is not possible, or
may vary. result in differences in operation or display.
track.
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]  Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone,
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors track information may not be displayed cor-
North America website. rectly.
track.
[For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]  Depending on the status of the vehicle and
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
website. Please read and agree to the “Warn- after starting the engine. Fast Forward or Rewind
ing about Links to the Web Sites of Other  Data containing copyright information may
7 Companies”. The websites mentioned above not play back.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
may connect you to websites other than the  It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone
Mitsubishi Motors website. equalizer settings be set to flat.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- Fast forward/rewind is possible.
 Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
ucts/index.html this product.
 Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone,  If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth Switch Playback Mode
refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
5-161. not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
 When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a cable. Connection using both methods will
Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
commercially-available iPod connection result in erroneous operation. possible.
cable.  If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod- Repeat Playback (RPT)
actions, such as plugging in the connection uct, reset, then reconnect.
cable are taken while driving.
 When inserting and removing the Press the 1RPT key.
iPod/iPhone, for safety’s sake first stop the Play iPod
vehicle. Repeat playback of the track currently being
 Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone, played.
Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the
it may take some time until the device is rec- source.
ognized, or playback starts. NOTE
 Buttons on the product will not operate while The selected source is indicated on the dis-  Pressing again will cancel.
iPod/iPhone is connected. play.

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device
Shuffle Playback (RDM) 2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or

tracks within the selected category are
Listen to Audio Files on a
displayed. USB Device
Press the 2RDM key. N00717400074
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
Play tracks in the category currently being gory or track. By connecting commercially-available USB
played in a random order. 4. Press the /SEL key. devices such as USB memory to this product,
Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks. you can play back audio files on these
through the product.
NOTE Select the track, and press the /SEL
 Pressing again will cancel. key to play.
CAUTION
NOTE
 Do not leave the USB device unattended in
the vehicle.
7
Album Shuffle Playback
 While the category (1st level) is selected,  Never hold these devices in your hand to
press the 6 key to cancel track search operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
Hold down the 2RDM key. mode.  Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem-
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after ory readers, as damage may occur to these or
Play back the album in a random order
selecting the category, then track search to the data contained therein. If these are
(tracks in any order on the album). mode will be cancelled. erroneously connected, then turn the ignition
 Select the category, and hold down the switch to the “LOCK” position, then remove.
NOTE /SEL key to start playback from the first  Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom-
 Pressing again will cancel. track in that category. mended that files be backed up.
 No guarantee is made as regards damage to
 While the track is selected, press the 6
the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam-
key to return to the previous operation.
age to data contained therein.
Search Tracks  While the track is selected, hold down the
 Depending on how the devices are handled,
6 key to cancel track search mode. audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
Search categories or track names, and select a  If there is no operation for five seconds after it is recommended that data be backed up.
track. selecting the track, that file is played back.
 iPod operations such as selecting a track will
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- cancel track search mode. NOTE
gory.  Digital audio players that support the mass
storage class specifications can be con-
nected.

NOTE NOTE Select the Track (File)

 For details regarding the types of USB  Depending on audio data in the USB device,
devices that can be connected and the types track information may not be displayed cor-
of files that can be played back in vehicles rectly.
® track.
with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface, refer to  Depending on the status of the vehicle and
“Types of connectable devices and supported device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
file specifications” on page 5-161. after starting the engine.
track.
 Regarding how to connect USB devices,  Data containing copyright information may
refer to “How to connect a USB memory not play back.
device” on page 5-160.  This product can play back MP3, WMA, and Fast Forward or Rewind
 When connecting a USB device, use a con- AAC format audio files.
7 nection cable. Failure to use a connection  Depending on the type of USB device, usage
cable when connecting may place undue load may not be possible, or functions that can be
on, or damage the USB connector. used may be restricted.
Fast forward/rewind is possible.
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe  The recommended file system for USB
actions, such as plugging in the connection memory is FAT32.
cable are taken while driving.  The maximum supported capacity for USB Switch Playback Mode
 When inserting and removing the USB memory is 32GB.
device, for safety’s sake first stop the vehi-  Operate the USB device containing recorded
cle.
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
audio files while connected to this product.
 Do not insert other than audio devices into
the USB port. Damage to the device or
equipment may result. Play Back of Audio Files on a Repeat Playback (RPT)
 Depending on the status of the USB device, USB Device
it may take some time until the device is rec-
Press the 1RPT key.
ognized, or playback starts.
Press the MEDIA key to set USB as the
 Depending on USB devices, buttons on the Repeat playback of the track currently being
source.
product will not operate while the USB
played.
device is connected.
The selected source is indicated on the dis-
 USB device specifications and settings may
play.
mean that connection is not possible, or NOTE
result in differences in operation or display.  Pressing again will cancel.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 Selecting a file will cancel this.  Cycling up/down through files will cancel  Press this button again during playback if
However, it will not be cancelled in vehicles this. you wish to hear that track, and that track
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.  Even if the file is selected, folder random will play normally.
playback will not be cancelled.
Folder Repeat Playback

All Folder Random Playback Folder Scan Playback
Hold down the 1RPT key.
Hold down the 2RDM key. Hold down the SCAN key.
Repeat playback of the tracks within the
Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in
folder currently being played. Play the tracks in all folders in a random
each folder on the USB device in order.
7
order.
NOTE NOTE
 Pressing again will cancel. NOTE
 Pressing again will cancel.  Press this button again during playback if
 Selecting a folder will cancel this.
you wish to hear that track, and that track
 Cycling up/down through files will cancel  Selecting a folder will cancel this.
will play normally.
this.  Cycling up/down through files will cancel
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat this.
playback will not be cancelled.  Even if the file is selected, all folder random
playback will not be cancelled. Search Tracks
Folder Random Playback (RDM) Search folders and files, and select a track.
Scan Playback (SCAN)
Press the 2RDM key. 1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder.
Press the SCAN key. 2. Press the /SEL key.
Play tracks in the folder currently being
played in a random order. Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks Files within the selected folder are dis-
on the whole USB device in order. played.
NOTE 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.
 Pressing again will cancel. 4. Press the /SEL key.
 Selecting a folder will cancel this.

To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth 2.0 interface)
This plays the selected file (track). terminal can be selected and played via voice
operation.
NOTE
For information concerning the voice recog-  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
NOTE nition function or speaker registration func- ing the connected device.
 While the folder is selected, press the 6 If the connected device cannot be recognized
tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on
key to cancel track search mode. or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
page 5-139.
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
selecting the folder, then track search mode The following explains how to prepare for guide. Follow the voice guide.
will be cancelled. voice operation and play the tracks.
 Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL 2. After the voice guide says “Would you
key to start playback from the first track in Preparation for voice operation like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
7 that folder. N00772101084
Genre?,” say “Artist”.
 While the file is selected, press the 6 key To use the voice operation, press the
to return to the previous operation. SPEECH button first. NOTE
 While the file is selected, hold down the
 If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip
6 key to cancel track search mode. step 3.
 If there is no operation for five seconds after
selecting the file, that file is played back.
 Operations such as selecting a track will can- 3. After the voice guide says “What Artist
cel track search mode. would you like to play?,” say the artist
name.
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
To play iPod/USB memory ceeds to step 6.
5. If there are two or more matches, the
device tracks via voice oper- voice guide will say “More than one
ation (vehicles with Blue- match was found, would you like to play
1- SPEECH button <artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
tooth 2.0 interface) 2- PICK-UP button tem proceeds to step 6.
N00772001041
If you say “No,” the next matching artist
When connected to the USB input terminal, is uttered by the system.
desired tracks on the iPod/USB memory To search by artist name
device which is connected to the USB input N00772201027
1. Say “Play” on the main menu.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 If you say “No” to three or all artist names  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-  If you say “No” to three or all album titles
uttered by the system, the voice guide will ing the connected device. uttered by the system, the voice guide will
say “Artist not found, please try again” and If the connected device cannot be recognized say “Album not found, please try again” and
the system returns to step 2. the system returns to step 2.
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
 Search time is dependant on the number of 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
songs on your connected device. Devices guide. Follow the voice guide.
containing a large number of songs may take 6. After the voice guide says “Playing
longer to return search results. <album title>,” the system creates a playl-
2. After the voice guide says “Would you ist index for the album title.
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
6. After the voice guide says “Playing <artist
name>,” the system creates a playlist
Genre?,” say “Album”. NOTE 7
 If the confirmation function is active, the
index for the artist.
NOTE voice guide confirms if the album title is cor-
rect. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”.
 If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip
NOTE step 3.
If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says
 If the confirmation function is active, the “Album not found, please try again,” the sys-
voice guide confirms if the artist name is tem returns to step 2.
correct. If the artist name is correct, say 3. After the voice guide says “What Album
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide would you like to play?” say the album
says “Artist not found, please try again,” the 7. The system exits the voice recognition
title.
system returns to step 2. mode and starts playback.
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
ceeds to step 6.
7. The system exits the voice recognition 5. If there are two or more matches, the To search by playlist
mode and starts playback. voice guide will say “More than one N00772401029
match was found, would you like to play 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
<album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
To search by album title tem proceeds to step 6.
N00772301028
If you say “No,” the next matching album
1. Say “Play” on the main menu. is uttered by the system.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-  If you say “No” to three or all playlist names  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
ing the connected device. uttered by the system, the voice guide will ing the connected device.
If the connected device cannot be recognized say “Playlist not found, please try again” and If the connected device cannot be recognized
the system returns to step 2.
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
guide. Follow the voice guide. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing guide. Follow the voice guide.
<playlist>,” the system creates an index
2. After the voice guide says “Would you for the playlist. 2. After the voice guide says “Would you
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
7 Genre?,” say “Playlist”. NOTE Genre?,” say “Genre”.
 If the confirmation function is active, the
NOTE voice guide confirms if the playlist name is NOTE
correct. If the playlist name is correct, say
 If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip  If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide
step 3. 3.
says “Playlist not found, please try again,”
If the device has no playlist, the voice guide
the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Con-
will say “There are no playlists stored on
firmation function setting” on page 5-143. 3. After the voice guide says “What Genre
device” and the system returns to step 2.
would you like to play?,” say the music
7. The system exits the voice recognition type.
3. After the voice guide says “What Playlist 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
would you like to play?,” say the playlist mode and starts playback.
ceeds to step 6.
name. 5. If there are two or more matches, the
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- To search by genre voice guide will say “More than one
ceeds to step 6. N00772501020 match was found, would you like to play
5. If there are two or more matches, the 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. <genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system
voice guide will say “More than one proceeds to step 6.
match was found, would you like to play If you say “No,” the next matching genre
<playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the system is uttered by the system.
proceeds to step 6.
If you say “No,” the next matching playl-
ist name is uttered by the system.

Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)
NOTE CAUTION NOTE

 If you say “No” to three or all genres uttered  Never hold these devices in your hand to  Depending on the status of the vehicle and
by the system, the voice guide will say operate while driving, as this is dangerous. device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
“Genre not found, please try again” and the  Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device after starting the engine.
system returns to step 2. unattended in the vehicle.
 Depending on how the devices are handled,
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
Connect a Bluetooth-capable
6. After the voice guide says “Playing
<genre>,” the system creates an index for it is recommended that data be backed up. Audio Device
the genre.
Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth
NOTE NOTE device, refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth®
 If the confirmation function is active, the  Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable 2.0 interface and Bluetooth device” on page
7
audio devices, usage may not be possible, or
voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. 5-146.
functions that can be used may be restricted.
If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say Operation methods below describe situations
“No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not  Confirm together with the user manuals for
once connection has been completed.
found, please try again,” the system returns the commercially-available Bluetooth-capa-
to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function ble audio devices.
setting” on page 5-143.  Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable NOTE
audio devices, volume levels may differ.  If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth
There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
7. The system exits the voice recognition to use, it is recommended that you turn the not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
mode and starts playback. volume down. cable. Connection using both methods will
 “Adjust Volume” (P.7-25) result in erroneous operation.
 Depending on the status of the Bluetooth
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if audio device, it may take some time until the
so equipped) device is recognized, or playback starts.
 Bluetooth audio device specifications and
Play Bluetooth Audio
N00717500020
settings may mean that connection is not
1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth
This product can play back tracks on com- possible, or result in differences in operation
or display.
Audio as the source.
mercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio
devices.  Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth
The selected source is indicated on the
audio device, track information may not be
display.
displayed correctly.

Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)

2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth Audio play- Repeat Playback (RPT) NOTE
back starts.
 Press this button again during playback if
Press the 1RPT key. you wish to hear that track, and that track
NOTE will play normally.
Repeat playback of the track currently being
 Hold down the 5 key to pause.
played.
 Press the 6 key to stop.
NOTE
 Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this
Select the Track (File) switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track
7 repeat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF.
track.
Random Playback (RDM)
track.
Press the 2RDM key.
Fast Forward or Rewind Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device
in a random order.

NOTE
Fast forward/rewind is possible.  Pressing again will cancel.
Switch Playback Mode Scan Playback (SCAN)

Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
Press the SCAN key.
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
on the whole Bluetooth Audio device in
order.

Display Indicator
Display Indicator
N00717700022
This explains content of the display indicator.
Change the Display Mode CAUTION During FM Reception

N00717800065  The operation of changing display contents
You can change the content of the display may impede safe driving, therefore check This switches in the order “Frequency”, “Sta-
safety before operation. tion name”, and “Radio text”.
indicator.
Press the INFO key to switch the display con-
tent.
NOTE NOTE
 Radio text has a maximum display of 64
Each time the INFO key is pressed, the dis-  Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one
characters.
play content changes. time. To display 12 or more characters, press
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters  If there is no text information to display, then
will be displayed. “NO MESSAGE” is displayed.

Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment
During Satellite Radio Reception NOTE NOTE

(if so equipped)  If there is no text information to display, then  If there is no text information to display, then
“NO TITLE” is displayed. “NO TITLE” is displayed.
 Displayed genre name in equipment by type
This switches in the order “Channel name”,
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
“Category name”, “Artist name”, “Track
name”, and “Composer name”.
Display the ID3tag  The genre name display may not be possible.
Hold down the INFO key.

NOTE During Bluetooth® 2.0 Audio Play-
 The channel and category have a maximum This switches the ID3tag display.
display of 8 characters. The other items have
back (if so equipped)
7 a maximum display of 36 characters.
Each time INFO key is pressed, this switches
in the order “Album name”, “Track name”,
N00718300025
“Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and “Operat- Operating details are the same as in “During
ing status”. iPod Playback” (P.7-44).
During CD-DA playback
*:Displayed when playing back audio
This switches in the order “Disc title”, “Track files on a USB device (vehicles with a Audio Quality and Volume
title”, and “Operating status”. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). Balance Adjustment
N00718400042
NOTE Change audio quality settings.

 If there is no text information to display, then NOTE
“NO TITLE” is displayed.  During display of the ID3tag, hold down the
INFO key to switch to the folder title display.
Adjust Audio Quality and Vol-
 The genre name display may not be possible. ume Balance
During MP3/WMA/AAC Play-
1. Press the /SEL key to select settings
back items.
During iPod Playback
N00718200024
This switches in the order “Folder title”, “File Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
title”, and “Operating status”. This switches in the order “Albums”, “Track
switches in the order BASS, TREBLE,
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”, and
FADER, BALANCE, SCV (speed com-
“Operating status”.
pensated volume), and Cancel.

System Settings
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust. 2. Press the /SEL key to select settings
items.
Adjust-
Turn counter- Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
ment Turn clockwise
clockwise switches in the order Satellite radio set-
items
BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6 tings*1, Gracenote DB*2, PHONE set-
(low low-pass (high low-pass tings, Adjust time, and Cancel.
volume) volume) 3. Turn the /SEL key to set.
TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6 4. Press the /SEL key to determine.
BLE (Low high-pass (High high-pass
volume) volume)
This completes settings, and displays the
next settings item.
7
FADER CENTER to FRONT 11 to
REAR 11 CENTER
*1: Displayed when a satellite tuner is con-
(emphasize (emphasize nected.
REAR) FRONT)
*2:Displayed when playing back audio files
BAL- LEFT 11 to CENTER to (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
ANCE CENTER RIGHT 11
(emphasize (emphasize
LEFT) RIGHT)
SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH
(SCV effect is (SCV effect is
OFF/low) middle/high)
System Settings
N00718500131
Change system settings such as product time.
1. Press the MENU key.

System Settings
Satellite Radio Settings (if so equipped)
Change each satellite radio setting.
Settings
Settings name Settings item Settings content
value
SIRIUS ID — — This displays the SIRIUS ID.
SKIP SETTING SKIP SETTING ON SKIP can be set for each channel. Channels for which SKIP is set are excluded
SELECT CH*1 OFF from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
7 They can be received when selecting channels using the preset keys or searching
for a station.
SKIP SETTING — When “YES” is selected, the SKIP settings for all channels are turned off.
ALL RESET
LOCK SETTING LOCK SETTING ON LOCK can be set for each channel. Channels for which LOCK is set are
SELECT CH*2 OFF excluded from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
If a channel for which LOCK is set is selected when selecting channels using the
preset keys or searching for a station, “CH LCKED” is displayed within about 2
seconds after the channel text is displayed. The sound is muted.
LOCK SETTING — When “YES” is selected and the CODE for settings is input, the LOCK settings
ALL RESET for all channels are turned off.
LOCK SETTING — The CODE required for the LOCK settings is changed. (The factory setting is
EDIT CODE “1111”.)
If the input code is incorrect, “LOCK SETTING WRG LC” is displayed.
*1:Each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select, Change SKIP settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel SKIP setting”, press the 6 key.

System Settings
*2:Once the CODE (passcode) of your choice is entered, each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select,
Change LOCK settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel LOCK setting”, press the 6 key. Input the CODE from the 1 RPT key to the 6 key.
This completes the adjustment.

Time Setting NOTE
 Depending on the distance between the prod-
Set the time manually. NOTE uct and the mobile phone, the conditions
 In order to finish adjusting the time, hold within the vehicle, and types of screening,
down the /SEL key until the seconds are connection may not be possible. In these
reset to “00”. cases, situate the mobile phone as close as
possible to the product.
 The time can also be set using another proce-
 Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile 7
H M dure.
Refer to “CLOCK” on page 7-52. phone, characteristics and specifications may
/SEL mean that correct operation may not be pos-
sible.
 For safety’s sake, do not operate the mobile
PHONE Settings phone while driving. When operating the
mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe
Change the mobile phone voice cut- in set- location.
 Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
tings and the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface lan-
1. Select “YES” at the “Adjust time” screen, phone, phone specifications and settings may
guage. result in differences in display, or prevent
and press the /SEL key. Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings correct operation.
2. Press the various keys to adjust. may not be possible.  Some models may not be confirmed as con-
H - “Hour” setting nected, or may not connect.
Press this key to fast-forward the NOTE Supported profiles
“hours”.  Cancel functions such as the mobile phone
“dial lock”, and connect while on the Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
M - “Minutes” setting
Press this key to fast-forward the standby screen. Phonebook
OPP(v1.1), PBAP(v1.0)
“minutes”.  While connected, mobile phone (receiving transfer
calls, etc.) operations may not function cor-
rectly.

System Settings
Vehicles without a Bluetooth® 2.0 Inter- Vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 Interface
face
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
A hands-free kit (available separately) is default settings.)
required.
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory Settings Settings
Settings content
default settings.) name value
HFM ENG- Change the hands
Settings voice lan- LISH free module voice
Settings content
value guage set- FRENCH language.
7 PHONE Do not use mobile phone voice tings
SPANISH
OFF cut-in.
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- JAPA-
MUTE in, mute the audio. NESE
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-

ATT in, output audio from all speak- Gracenote DB (Vehicles with a
ers.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
IN-L in, output sound from the left The version number can be confirmed.
front speaker.
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- 1. Select “Gracenote DB” and press the
IN-R in, output sound from the right /SEL key.
front speaker. 2. Turn the /SEL key and select “DB Ver-
During mobile phone voice cut- sion”.
PHONE
in, output sound from the left 3. Press the /SEL key.
IN-LR
and right front speakers. The DB Version is displayed.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
N00718600031
Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.
If This Message Appears...
A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.
Mode Message Cause Response

CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up. 7
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and
insert the disc again. If the problem persists, con-
sult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal tempera-
ture to return to normal.

Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
 “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-20)
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT  “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-20)
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
7 DEVICE
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.
VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
speakers. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...
Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.
Symptoms Cause Response

There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.
sound.  “Adjust Volume” (P.7-25)
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.
 “Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance” (P.7-44)

Antenna
Symptoms Cause Response
The disc cannot be A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc.
inserted.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-25)
There is no disc in the product, but the prod- Press the eject button once.
uct says it is loading.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-25)
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
same place. 7
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs, their charac-
the disc is inserted. data cannot be read. teristics may render them unable to be played.
Antenna NOTE
N00734200426 • When covering your vehicle with a car
cover
• When driving into a structure that has a low
Roof antenna (except for vehi- ceiling
cles with SIRIUS satellite radio)
Roof antenna (for vehicles with
To remove SIRIUS satellite radio)
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise. For securing the best satellite reception, the
NOTE angle of the antenna is fixed.
To install  Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the
following cases:
• When using an automatic car wash
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base
(B) until it is securely retained.
Clock (if so equipped)
NOTE Time Setting

 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the
following cases:
• When entering a place with low clearance
• When using an automatic car wash
• When covering your vehicle with a car H M PAGE
cover
/SEL
Clock (if so equipped)

7 N00755001219
To remove The time is displayed when the ignition

switch is in ON or ACC. 1. Press and hold the PAGE key until the
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise. clock display flashes.
NOTE 2. Press the various keys to adjust.
To install  Reset the time after the battery terminals are H - “Hour” setting
disconnected and reconnected. Press this key to fast-forward the
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base “hours”.
(B) until it is securely retained. M - “Minutes” setting
Press this key to fast-forward the
“minutes”.
3. Press the PAGE key to finish adjusting the

time. When the adjustment is complete,
the clock display stops flashing.
NOTE
 If the PAGE key is pressed and held when
the time adjustment is finished, the seconds
will be reset to “00”.

General information about your radio
NOTE Signal transmission Reflection

 The time can also be set using another proce-
dure. FM signals do not follow the earth surface The reason why one can hear FM but not AM
Refer to “System Settings” on page 7-45. nor are they reflected by the upper atmo- in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected
be received over long distances. AM signals by solid objects such as buildings, etc.
General information about follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by Because FM signals are easily reflected by
your radio the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
N00733901478 broadcasts can be received over longer disturbances.
Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and tances. The direct signal from the broadcast station
reaches the antenna slightly before the
FM stations.
The quality of your reception is affected by reflected signal. This time difference may 7
FM AM cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
 The device may not cause harmful inter- 25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius
(40 to 64 km) (160 km)
ference.
 This device must accept any interference
recieved, including interference that may
cause undesirable operation. Weak reception (fading)
CAUTION Because of the limited range of FM signals

 Changes or modifications not expressly and the way FM waves transmit, you may
approved by the party meeting the above experience weak or fading FM reception.
conditions could void the user’s authority to When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
operate the equipment. or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
turbed.

General information about your radio
Cross modulation Causes of disturbances

If one listens to a weak station and is in the FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
vicinity of another strong station, both sta- tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
tions might be received simultaneously. those without an electronic noise suppression
device. The disturbance is even greater if the
station is weak or poorly tuned.
FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tive to electrical disturbances such as power
lines, lightning and other types of similar
7 electrical phenomena.
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Tools and jack ..................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-12
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-14
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-15 8
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine CAUTION

N00836300161 N00836401808  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the
both systems can be damaged.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. 3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.
slowly, with the hazard lights flashing, until Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the cle. Put an automatic transaxle, CVT in
WARNING “P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N”
flashers flashing.  When using jumper cables to start a vehi- (Neutral). Turn the ignition key to the
cle, follow the procedures and be very cau-
“LOCK” position.
If the engine stops/fails tious.
8 WARNING
If the engine stops, there will be no power  Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” posi-
assist to the steering and brakes, making these
CAUTION tion on both vehicles. Make sure that the
 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or
difficult to use. cables or your clothes cannot be caught by
towing. Vehicles with continuously variable
the fan or drive belt. Personal injury
transmission (CVT) cannot be started this
 The brake booster will not work, so the could result.
way. Pushing or towing a vehicle that has a
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal
manual transaxle may overheat and damage
will be harder to press than usual. the catalytic converter. Also, there is more
 Since there is no power steering assist, the risk of an accident when a vehicle is being NOTE
steering wheel will be hard to turn. pushed or towed.  Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries.
When the engine fails at the 1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
intersection bands or bracelets that might make an
accidental electrical contact. 4. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at
2. Position the vehicles close enough the proper level. (Refer to “Checking bat-
Get help from your passengers, bystanders, together so that the jumper cables can tery electrolyte level” on page 9-12.)
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
zone. touching each other.
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine
WARNING NOTE CAUTION

 If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or  Use the proper cables suitable for the battery  Make sure that the jumper cable will not be
looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP size. caught in the cooling fan or other moving
STARTING!! Otherwise heat damage to the cables could parts in the engine compartment.
The battery might split open or explode if result.
the temperature is below the freezing  Check the jumper cables for damage and cor- 7. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
point or if it is not filled to the proper rosion before use.
level.
the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
6. Connect one end of the other jumper cable utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
to the negative (-) terminal of the booster with the low battery.
5. Connect one end of one jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (B), and the other end to the
engine block of the vehicle with the low NOTE
battery (A), and the other end to the posi-
battery (A) at the point farthest from the  If the engine is started with the air duct
tive (+) terminal of the booster battery
(B). battery. removed, the noise produced as air is drawn 8
into the engine will be greater than when the
duct is installed.
WARNING
 Be sure to follow the proper order when
connecting the batteries, of: 8. After the engine is started, disconnect the
   .
cables in the reverse order from the way
you connected them.
 Make sure that the connection is made
to the engine properly. If the connection is
directly made to the negative side of the
WARNING
battery, the flammable gases from inside  Charging your battery while it is still in
the battery might catch fire and explode, your vehicle might cause the battery to
causing personal injury. catch fire and explode. If you have to
 When connecting the jumper cable, do not charge it while in the vehicle, disconnect
the negative terminal.
NOTE connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
 Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away
tive (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks can
 Open the terminal cover before connecting from the battery because the battery may
make the battery explode.
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of explode.
the battery.  Keep your work area well vented when
(Refer to “Disconnection and connection” on charging or using the battery in an
page 9-13.) enclosed space.
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
5. If you do not see steam or spray coming
WARNING Engine overheating from under the hood, leave the engine on
 Remove all the caps before charging the N00836500323
until the bar graph for the engine coolant
battery.
When the engine has overheated, the infor- temperature warning display on the multi-
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is corrosive
mation screen in the multi-information dis- information display goes down. When it
diluted sulphuric acid. If electrolyte comes
in contact with your hands, eyes, clothes,
play will be interrupted and the engine is in the middle of the normal zone, you
or the painted surface of your vehicle, coolant temperature warning display will can start driving again. If the bar graph
thoroughly flush with water. If electrolyte appear. The screen will then change to the stays in the red zone, turn off the engine.
gets in your eyes, flush them immediately engine coolant temperature display screen
and thoroughly with water, and get and “ ” will flash. If this happens: WARNING
prompt medical attention.  Before raising the engine hood, check to
 Always wear protective clothing and gog- 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on see if there is steam or spray coming from
gles when working near the battery. the hazard warning flashers. under the hood. Steam or spray coming
8  Keep the battery out of the reach of chil- 2. With the engine still running, carefully from an overheated engine could seriously
dren. raise the engine hood to vent the engine scald you.
Do not open the hood until there is no
compartment.
steam or spray.
As your vehicle has anti-lock 3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If
brakes the fan is not turning, stop the engine
immediately and contact an authorized 6. When you do not see any more steam or
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- spray, open the hood. Look for obvious
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery ity of your choice for assistance. leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
charge, after the engine has been started by careful as components will be hot. Any
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire. WARNING leak source must be repaired.
This can cause the anti-lock braking system 7. If there is no obvious leak source, check
 To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,
warning light to blink on and off. This is only jewelry and clothes away from the cooling the coolant level in the reserve tank. If
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a fan. The cooling fan can start at any time. there is none, or if it is too low, slowly add
problem with the brake system. If this hap- coolant.
pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the 8. If the reserve tank needs coolant, you will
4. If you see steam or spray coming from
charging system is operating properly. probably also need to add coolant to the
under the hood, turn off the engine.
radiator. Do not loosen or remove the
radiator cap until the engine has cooled
down.
8-4 For emergencies

Tools and jack
WARNING Tools and jack Tools

 Removing the radiator cap could scald N00836600265 N00832600124
you with escaping hot water or steam.

When checking the radiator level, cover
the cap with a cloth before trying to
Storage
remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
wise, without pressing down, to the first The tools and jack are stowed in the trunk.
notch. The pressure in the system will then
be let out. When the pressure is COM-
PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
keep turning the cap counterclockwise
until it will come off.
9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, 1- Tool bag 8

up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use 2- Bar
plain water if you have to (and replace it 3- Wheel nut wrench
with the right coolant as soon as possible).
10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it
1- Tools
fully. Check the engine coolant tempera- Jack
ture display on the multi-information dis- 2- Jack
N00832700255
play. You can start driving again when the
Before removing the jack, lift up the luggage
bar graph for the engine coolant tempera-
floor board.
ture display returns to the normal zone.
For front-wheel drive vehicles, pull the lug-
11. Have your vehicle checked by your autho-
gage floor board (A) rearward to release the
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
hooks (B), and then lift it up.
facility of your choice.
For emergencies 8-5

How to change a tire

On vehicles with continuously variable
transmission (CVT), move the selector
lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and turn
tion.
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
warning triangle, flashing signal light,
etc., at an adequate distance from the
vehicle, and have all your passengers
leave the vehicle.
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
it is raised on the jack, place chocks or
blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally
8 To remove How to change a tire opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
N00836901858 ing.
Turn the shaft end (1) so that the jack con-
tracts, then remove it from the storage bracket WARNING
(C).  The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
 Never get under the vehicle or put any
To store portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.
Turn the shaft end (2) by hand to expand the
jack until it is held firmly in position. Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle
in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground. WARNING
2. Set the parking brake firmly.  Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
3. On vehicles with manual transaxle, turn correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
tion, and move the gearshift lever to the jack could slip out of position, leading to
“R” (Reverse) position. an accident.
8-6 For emergencies

NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

 The chocks shown in the illustration do not  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the  Do not drive through automatic car washes
come with your vehicle. It is recommended inflation pressure should be checked at least and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep once a month to assure that it remains at the age the underside of your vehicle. Because
them in the vehicle for use if needed. recommended inflation pressure. See the tire the compact spare tire is smaller than the
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use and loading information placard attached to original tire, there is less clearance between
stones or any other objects that are large the driver’s door sill. the ground and your vehicle.
enough to hold the wheel in position. Refer to “Tire and loading information plac-  Because the compact spare tire is designed
ard” on page 11-3. only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can other vehicle.
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench cause an accident. If you have no choice but  Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
ready. to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-5. your speed down and avoid sudden steering snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could 8
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to damage these parts or other parts on your
Spare tire information “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17. vehicle.
N00849600298
 The compact spare tire should be used only  Do not use snow chain with your compact
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage
Compact spare tire being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys- to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
tem will not function properly. Have the tire
replaced or repaired at an authorized Mit-
The compact spare tire is designed to save To remove the compact spare
space in the trunk. Its lighter weight makes it
easier to use if a flat tire occurs.
your choice as soon as possible. tire
 If your vehicle has aluminum type wheels, N00849701339
you can use the same wheel nuts on the com- 1. Lift up the luggage floor board.
WARNING pact spare tire wheel. For front-wheel drive vehicles, pull the
 Tires, including spare tire, degrade over  Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv- luggage floor board (A) rearward to
time with age even when they are not ing with the compact spare tire.
release the hooks (B), and then lift it up.
being used. It is recommended that tires  Avoid fast starting and braking when driving
over 6 years generally be replaced even if with the compact spare tire.
damage is not obvious.
For emergencies 8-7


2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
the jacking point closest to the tire you
wish to change.
2. To remove the spare tire, remove the

installation clamp (C) by turning it coun-
8 terclockwise.
To change a tire
N00849801486
1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first

remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov- WARNING
ers” on page 8-11). Then loosen the wheel  Set the jack only at the positions shown
nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do not here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
remove the wheel nuts yet. it could dent your vehicle or the jack
might fall over and cause personal injury.
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
NOTE under the jack base.
 The clamp cannot be used for a normal size
tire. Store a normal size tire under the lug- 3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange
gage floor board.
portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
 Put the spare tire under the vehicle body near
of the jack.
the jack. This makes it safer if the jack slips
out of position.
8-8 For emergencies


6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-
WARNING face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
mount the spare tire.
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Never get under the vehicle or put any
portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
4. Make sure that the flange portion at the with your vehicle.
jacking point fits in the groove at the top  The jack should not be used for any pur-
of the jack. Insert the bar (D) into the pose other than to change a tire. 8
wheel nut wrench (E). Then put the end of  No one should be in your vehicle when
using the jack.
the bar into the shaft’s jack end, as shown
in the illustration.  Do not start or run the engine while your WARNING
vehicle is on the jack.  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires (I) facing outboard. If you cannot see the
the tire is raised slightly off the ground
that are still on the ground could turn and valve stem (I), you have installed the
surface. make your vehicle fall off the jack. wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
installed backwards can cause vehicle
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
damage and result in an accident.
wrench, then take the wheel off.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
For emergencies 8-9


Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts
(flange nuts) until their flange section
CAUTION
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
comes in contact with the wheel and it is
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
no longer loose.
NOTE
 Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
compact spare or steel wheel, but return
them to the original wheel and tire as soon as
possible.
 If all four wheels are changed to steel
7. [Vehicle with steel wheels] wheels, use tapered nuts.
• Normal wheels and compact spare wheel
8 Install the wheel nuts (tapered nuts) with 8. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating the
their tapered ends facing inward, then wheel nut wrench counterclockwise until
tighten by hand until the wheel is no lon- • Compact spare wheel the tire touches the ground.
ger loose. Install the wheel nuts with their tapered
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand
until the wheel is no longer loose.
9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the

[Vehicle with aluminum wheels] illustration until each nut has been tight-
• Normal wheels ened to the torque listed here.
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m)
8-10 For emergencies

To store the flat tire or spare

tire, jack, bar and wheel nut
wrench
N00850000120
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-

ing the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and
wheel nut wrench.
Refer to “To remove the compact spare tire”
on page 8-7 and “Tools and jack” on page
8-5.
CAUTION CAUTION
 Never use your foot or a pipe extension to  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can Wheel covers (if so equipped) 8
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench cause an accident. If you have no choice but N00849400209
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and your speed down and avoid sudden steering
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the To remove
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17.
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it. Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec- deeply into the notch provided in the wheel
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle cover, and pry the cover away from the
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
is listed on the tire and loading informa- come loose. wheel.
tion placard attached to the driver’s door  If the steering wheel vibrates when driving Using the same procedure at the other wheel
sill as shown in the illustration. after changing the tire, have the tire checked cover notches, work the wheel cover away
Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page for balance at your nearest authorized Mit- from the wheel to remove it completely.
9-17. subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice.
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.
For emergencies 8-11

Towing
2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover
into the wheel.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel
cover and hold them in place with both
knees.
4. Gently tap the top (H) of the wheel cover.
Ensure the wheel cover is securely
installed around its entire outer circumfer-
ence.
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel

NOTE cover notch (D).
8  The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
ful when prying it off.
CAUTION
 Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
your bare hands can seriously injure your
fingers.
Towing
To install N00837001915
CAUTION NOTE If your vehicle needs to be

 Before installing the wheel cover to the
 Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) towed
provided on the reverse side to show the air
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
valve location.
back of the wheel cover correctly engage the If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
Before installing the wheel cover to the
ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
wheel, make sure that the opening with the
coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air vice.
has broken tabs.
valve.

Towing
When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cle using a tow truck. Type A Towing the vehicle by a tow
Incorrect towing equipment could damage truck
your vehicle.
CAUTION
CAUTION Type B  This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi- truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
Towing manual transaxle vehicles with rear
cle with a rope. A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
wheels off the ground.
Do not tow continuously variable transmis- age the bumper and front end.
sion (CVT) vehicles or all-wheel drive  Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
NOTE vehicles with this style. front or rear wheels on the ground (Type B or
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle. Type C) as illustrated. This could result in
the driving system damage or vehicle may
jump at the carriage. 8
There may be local regulations concerning If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
Type C
towing in your area. Obey the regulations of D or Type E equipment.
the area where you are driving your vehicle. Towing with front wheels off the ground.
 Do not tow continuously variable transmis-
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with
sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels
this style.
on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the
vehicle is towed like this, the continuously
variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not
reach all parts of the transmission, thus dam-
Type D
aging it.
If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E
equipment.
 If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or
damaged, transport the vehicle with the driv-
Type E ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as
illustrated.

Operation under adverse driving conditions

the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the
CAUTION Towing with front wheels off the
transaxle before trying again.
 [For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with ground (Type C) If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-
the active stability control (ASC)]
ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
Release the parking brake. service.
switch in the “ON” position and only the
front wheels or only the rear wheels raised
Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral”
position (manual transaxle) or the selector
off the ground, the ASC may operate, result-
lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
WARNING
ing in an accident. When towing the vehicle  When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
with only the front wheels or only the rear (CVT).
stuck position, make sure that there are no
wheels raised, keep the ignition switch in the people nearby. The rocking motion can
“LOCK” or “ACC” position.
WARNING make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward
 [For vehicle equipped with the Electronically or backward, and injure any bystanders.
 To prevent entry of exhaust gas from the
controlled 4WD system]
towing vehicle, set the selection switch to
8 Even in “2WD” mode, the vehicle cannot be
the recirculation position.
towed with the front or the rear wheels on
the ground. On wet roads
Towing manual transaxle vehicles Operation under adverse

CAUTION
with rear wheels off the ground driving conditions  Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
(Type B) N00837200662
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
by driving into flood water.
Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral” If your vehicle becomes stuck in  When driving in rain, on water-covered
roads, or through a car wash, water could get
position. sand, mud or snow into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” posi- porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
tion and secure the steering wheel in a If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
straight-ahead position with a rope or tie- or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly
down strap. Never place the ignition switch in motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to several times while driving to dry the brake
the “LOCK” position when towing. free it. pads or linings, then check them again.
Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

 Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock
CAUTION braking system (ABS), hold the brake
CAUTION
 When driving in rain, a layer of water may  The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and
pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
form between the tires and the road surface other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:
Do not pump the brake pedal which will
(aquaplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip • driven over a step (for example, at the
on the road, making it difficult to steer or result in reduced braking performance.
entrance or exit of a parking lot);
brake properly. When driving on a wet road:  After parking on snowy or icy road, it
• parked too closely against a curb or parking
• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. may be difficult to move your vehicle due block, or by the side of a road with curb-
• Do not drive on worn tires. to freeze-up of the brake. Depress the stones;
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla- accelerator pedal little by little to move • driven on a steep slope;
tion pressures. the vehicle after confirming safety of the
vehicle.
Fuel Pump Shut-off System
On snowy or icy roads N00860600044
CAUTION 8
 When driving on a road covered with  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly. WARNING
snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains The vehicle could start moving when it  Before attempting to restart the engine
cannot be used on your vehicle. There breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in after a collision, always inspect the ground
may be state or local regulations about an accident. under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel
using snow tires. Always check the regu- leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do
lations in your local area before using not restart the engine.
them. Refer to the section entitled “Snow On a bumpy or rutted road  Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
tires” on page 9-20 and “Tire chains” on vehicle be inspected by an authorized
page 9-20.  Drive as slow as possible when driving on Mitsubishi Motors dealer after any colli-
 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts bumpy or rutted roads or over potholes sion.
or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the etc.
brakes. In the event of a collision causing frontal air-
 Allow extra distance between your vehi- CAUTION bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
 Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
avoid sudden braking. holes can damage the tires and wheels. engine.
 If a skid occurs when the accelerator Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the age.
skid.

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2 Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-41

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-2 Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-42
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-3 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-43
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8
Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ...............................................9-9
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................9-10 9
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) ...........................................9-10
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) ........................................9-10
Washer fluid ...................................................................................9-10
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so equipped)........................................9-11
Power steering fluid (if so equipped)..............................................9-12
Battery ............................................................................................9-12
Tires ...............................................................................................9-14
Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-20
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-21
Parking brake lever stroke .............................................................9-21
Parking brake break-in ...................................................................9-21
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-21
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-22
General maintenance .....................................................................9-23
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-24
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-24
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-25
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-29
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING

N00937301430  After performing the maintenance work,
make sure that no tools or cloths are left
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-
behind in the engine compartment. If they
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- are left behind, a fire or damage to the
sible. vehicle may occur.
 The fan can turn on automatically even if
You can do some of the maintenance work
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- tion switch to the “LOCK” position to be
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors safe while you work in the engine com-
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. partment.
If you discover a malfunction or other prob-  Do not smoke or allow open flames around
lem, have it corrected by an authorized Mit- fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma- Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of ble. Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
your choice.  Be extremely careful when working supplements your new vehicle warranties.
9 This section describes the maintenance around the battery. It contains poisonous
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so and corrosive sulfuric acid.
for details.
desire. Follow the instructions and precau-  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on
tions for each procedure. a jack.
Always use properly rated automotive Catalytic converter
jack stands.
WARNING  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
N00937400131
 When checking or servicing the inside of als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask The catalytic converter requires you to use
the engine compartment, be sure the an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
engine is stopped and has had a chance to or a repair facility of your choice if you destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
cool down. have questions. the converter.
 If you need to work in the engine compart-
ment with the engine running, be espe- Normally, the catalytic converter does not
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. require maintenance. However, it is important
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts, to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
or other moving parts. verter to continue to work properly.
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

Engine hood
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as Engine hood
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
when performing diagnostic tests. N00937501591
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
 Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers, is idling roughly or otherwise obviously To open
have it serviced promptly. Running your malfunctioning.
vehicle when it is overheated may result in  To prevent the catalytic converter from Use the engine hood release lever (located
damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not under the instrument panel near the driver’s
race the engine when turning off the igni- door) to unlock the engine hood.
tion switch.
WARNING  Stop driving the vehicle if you think the Pull the lever toward you to release the
 Do not park or run your vehicle in areas performance is less than normal, the engine hood latch.
where combustible materials such as dry engine is running oddly or there is any
grass or leaves can come in contact with a other engine trouble, such as with the
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
 Do not put undercoat paint on the cata- driving immediately, slow down and drive
9
lytic converter. for only a short time. Have an inspection
made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con- dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
verter damage: soon as possible.
 In unusual situations involving major
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of engine problems, a burning odor may
the type of recommended in “Fuel selec- indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
tion”. converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
level. Running out of gas could damage the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
WARNING
the catalytic converter.  Never use the release lever to unlatch the
immediately take your vehicle to a dealer
 Do not try to start the engine by pushing engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
or a repair facility of your choice for ser-
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is  Do not drive your vehicle unless the
vice.
engine hood is locked.
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
properly start the engine.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
Release the safety lever and lift the engine Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
hood. Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
To close
under the hood marked with an arrow. Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and
put it back in its retainer.
9 NOTE
 To prevent damage to the engine hood and CAUTION Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting  Always insert the support prop into the hole (20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.
position when you open the engine hood. specially made for it. Propping the engine
hood at any other place could cause the prop
to slip out and lead to an accident. CAUTION
 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is  Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
lifted by a strong wind. when closing the engine hood.
 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
before driving.
If you drive without the engine hood com-
pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
ing.
NOTE
 If this does not close the engine hood prop-
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
position.

View of the engine compartment
NOTE View of the engine compart- Engine oil and oil filter
 Do not push down strongly on the engine
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
ment N00937702066
N00937601752
you push down, you could create a dent in
the vehicle body.
To check and refill engine oil
 For vehicles equipped with the theft-alarm
system, if you drive with the engine hood left It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may
open, warning display is displayed on the need to add oil between the recommended oil
information screen in the multi-information change intervals. Before starting the engine,
display. check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.
Type 1 To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,
wipe it off, and gently insert it all the way
into the crankcase. Slowly remove it again.
The oil level must not go above the line on
1- Power steering fluid reservoir (if so the dipstick.
9
equipped)
Type 2 2- Air cleaner filter If the level does not reach the line, which
3- Brake fluid/Clutch fluid reservoir (if so shows the smallest amount of oil required,
equipped) remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve
4- Engine coolant reservoir cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.
5- Windshield washer fluid reservoir
6- Engine oil level dipstick
Except for vehicles with engine cover
7- Radiator cap
8- Engine oil filler cap
Good
9- Battery

Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
Vehicles with engine cover NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
Good
example, repeated operation on rough roads, API service symbol
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark

CAUTION
 Overfilling the crankcase will cause oil aera- Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only
tion and loss of oil pressure, which could 1- The top portion shows the quality of
engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-
9 damage the engine. bol on the front of the container.
the oil.
2- The center portion shows the SAE
grade of the oil viscosity.
WARNING ILSAC certification symbol
 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
age your skin. Prolonged and repeated Recommended engine oil vis-
contact may cause serious skin disorders,
including dermatitis and cancer. Don’t let
cosity
N00955001149
used oil touch your skin. Wash thoroughly
after working with it. Use engine oil with the proper thickness for
 Keep used oil out of the reach of children. the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving.
NOTE If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-

 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced fication symbol, use an API classification SN
by payload, engine speed, etc. or higher oil with the following label.

Engine coolant
require that the filter can withstand a pressure
of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi
To add coolant
oil filter is the best replacement filter.
Follow the installation instructions printed on Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
the filter. Life Coolant Premium” or an equivalent*.
* : similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
Engine coolant nitrate and non-borate coolant with long
N00937801611
life hybrid organic acid technology
To check the coolant level

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic
The coolant reserve tank (A) lets you quickly excellent protection against corrosion and
Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
see when you need to add coolant. When the rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
economy and cold weather starting.
engine is cold, the level in the reserve tank num, and prevents blockages in some parts of
If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-
should be between the “FULL” and “LOW” engine. 9
thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
marks. The radiator usually stays full so there If you need to add coolant often, or if the
grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
is no reason to remove the radiator cap (B) level in the reserve tank does not drop when
can be used. However, Mitsubishi Motors
except when you check the coolant freeze the engine cools, the cooling system should
Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil should
point or replace the antifreeze coolant. be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
be used at the next oil change to maintain
cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
optimum fuel economy and cold weather
or a repair facility of your choice for testing.
starting.
CAUTION
To replace the oil filter FULL
 Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
N00955100042
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or LOW the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND parts.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
Only use high quality replacement filters on
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters *- Front of the vehicle

Air cleaner filter
CAUTION WARNING Air cleaner filter

 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-  Wait for the engine to cool down before N00937901508
fers depending on the expected ambient tem- opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
perature. steam or boiling coolant could spray up
Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration from the radiator and scald you.
from use and not filter properly. Replace it
of anti-freeze with a new filter using the schedule in the
Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60% concentration “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
of anti-freeze MANUAL”.
You can check the concentration level with a
Points to remember
gauge from an automotive supply store, or 1. Remove the clips (A), then remove the
 Do not overfill the reserve tank. duct (B).
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
service station can check it for you.
 Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration
that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow
of coolant. from the reserve tank back to the radiator
 Do not top off the tank with plain water only. when the engine cools down. If you need
9 Water by itself boils at a lower temperature to change the cap, use the exact same
and does not stop rust or freezing. If the kind.
water freezes, it will damage your cooling  Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause ator with the proper gauge, and only when
corrosion and rust. it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
tents of the reserve tank must be protected
Radiator cap against freezing.
 Keep the front of the radiator and con-
denser clean. 2. While holding down the tab (C), pull out
The radiator cap must be tight sealed to pre- the connector (D).
 If the temperature of the engine coolant
vent losing coolant which may result in
does not rise after the engine is warmed-
engine damage. Only use a Genuine Mitsubi-
up, take your vehicle to an authorized
shi Parts radiator cap, or an approved equiva-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
lent.
ity of your choice to have the thermostat
checked, and replaced if necessary.

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)
NOTE
 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make
sure the harness is firmly set so that the air
cleaner hook (E) and the marking tape (F) on
the harness are located as shown in the illus-
tration.
3. Remove the harness from the air cleaner 5. Install the air cleaner filter and put the
hook (E). cover back on in its original position.
NOTE  Make sure that the connector is properly 9

 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom- reconnected.
mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make 6. Put the duct back on in its original posi-
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover tion.
are firmly set.
Manual transaxle oil (if so

equipped)
N00938200165
4. Unclamp and take out the air cleaner fil- Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is
ter. checked, add oil to maintain the proper level,
if necessary.
Refill or change the oil according to the table.

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped)
Oil type CAUTION Rear axle oil (All-wheel

 Using the improper transmission fluid may
damage the transaxle.
drive models)
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine N00915200227
Lubricant NEW MULTI GEAR OIL API Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as
Classification GL-3 necessary to maintain the proper level.
Special additives
Viscosity Fill or change oil according to the table.
SAE 75W-80
range
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not rec-
ommend the addition of any fluid additives to Oil type
Continuously variable the transmission.
transmission (CVT) fluid (if Lubri- Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD
so equipped)
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive cant gear oil or equivalent
models)
9 N00938101116
N00938400239
Washer fluid
The continuously variable transmission Whenever the transfer oil level is checked, N00938601397
(CVT) should be maintained and serviced by add oil as necessary to maintain the proper
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a The windshield washer fluid reservoir is in
level. Fill or change the oil according to the the engine compartment.
repair facility of your choice to obtain the table.
best performance and longest life. It is impor-
tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
correct level. Oil type
Fluid type Lubri- Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD

cant gear oil or equivalent
Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-
mum transmission performance.

Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so equipped)

Check the washer fluid level at regular inter- If the fluid level falls markedly in a short
vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec- Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so length of time, it indicates leaks from the
essary. equipped) brake system.
Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid N00938700186 If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
level with the dipstick. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
The brake fluid and the clutch fluid share the repair facility of your choice.
reservoir tank.
Fluid type
To check the fluid level
Use the recommended brake fluid conform-
The fluid level must be between the “MAX” ing to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir. must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water
out.
CAUTION 9
 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
MAX mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This
During cold weather will damage the seals.
 Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
damage painted surfaces.
When freezing weather is anticipated, flush MIN
 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different
out the water in the reservoir by operating the
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.
the system for a few seconds to flush out the The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the  Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
residual water. brake pads, but this does not indicate any the brake fluid from evaporating.
abnormality.
The fluid in the master cylinder should be

checked when doing other work under the
engine hood. The brake system should also be
checked for leaks at the same time.

Power steering fluid (if so equipped)
Power steering fluid (if so Battery

equipped) N00939100783
N00939000388 The condition of the battery is very important

for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s
electrical system working properly. Check the
To check the fluid level battery regularly.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir while WARNING

the engine is idling.  An SRS airbag sensor is located in the
Check to make certain that the power steering front of the engine compartment near the
fluid level is always between the “MAX” and battery.
“MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir When checking or replacing the battery, WARNING
and refill the fluid, if necessary. or when working around this area, do not  If the battery goes flat, be sure to check
strike or damage this sensor. the battery electrolyte level before con-
9 necting booster cables.
 After checking the battery electrolyte
level, make sure the caps are fitted
Checking battery electrolyte securely.
level  If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace
N00901501109 the battery.
The electrolyte level must be between the
limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of During cold weather
the battery is divided into several compart- N00901600015
ments. Take the cap off of each compartment The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.
and fill to the mark. This has to do with its chemical and physical
Do not fill above the top line because a spill
Fluid type properties and is why a very cold battery,
during driving could cause damage. especially one with a low charge, will have a
hard time starting your vehicle.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine It is recommended that you have your battery
Lubricant
Power Steering Fluid and charging system checked by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
Battery
facility of your choice before the start of cold
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
WARNING WARNING
 Never disconnect the battery while the  If you are quick-charging your battery,
will guarantee more reliable starting, and lon-
engine is running, or you could damage first disconnect the battery cables.
ger battery life.
the vehicle’s electrical parts.  In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure
 Never short-circuit the battery. This could to disconnect the negative (-) terminal
Disconnection and connection cause it to overheat and be damaged. first, and reconnect it last.
N00901701143  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away  If the electrolyte level is very low, have the
from the battery because the battery could battery checked at an authorized Mitsubi-
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
explode. shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal your choice.
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon- sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on  Battery terminals and related accessories
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+) nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, color them. And if gets on your skin or in hands after handling.
before starting the vehicle. your eyes, it can cause burns or blindness.
Please observe the following handling
NOTE instructions: NOTE 9
• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or  Check each battery terminal for corrosion.
 Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft You can stop more corrosion by washing
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of with a solution of baking soda and water.
nal of the battery.
water and neutral detergent then imme- Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or
diately rinse the affected parts with tightening them.
plenty of water.  Check to see that the battery is securely
• If electrolyte gets on your hands or installed and cannot be moved. Also check
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If each terminal for tightness.
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them  If you will not be driving your vehicle for a
with water immediately and get immedi- long period of time, remove the battery and
ate medical attention. store it in a place where the battery fluid will
 Open doors and windows in any closed not freeze. Memory data for settings made
space where you may be charging or by the user may be erased when the battery is
working with the battery. removed. If this happens, reset the settings
 Always wear protective clothing and gog- again using the relevant procedures. The bat-
gles when working with the battery, or tery only should be stored with a full charge.
have a skilled automobile technician do it.  Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the
filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.

Tires
 Recommended inflation pressure: the  Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
Tires inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor- tread and bead.
N00939201563
mance.  Section width: the linear distance between
 Intended outboard sidewall: the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
WARNING • The sidewall that contains a whitewall, inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
 Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
bears white lettering or bears manufac- labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
or improperly inflated is dangerous.
These type tire conditions will adversely
turer, brand, and/or model name molding  Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
affect vehicle performance. that is higher or deeper than the same steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
These type tire conditions can also cause a molding on the other sidewall of the tire, cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
tread separation or blowout which may or  Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel
result in an accident causing serious • The outward facing sidewall of an asym- cords.
injury or death. metrical tire that has a particular side  Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
 Tires, including spare tire, degrade over that must always face outward when tire.
time with age even when they are not mounted on a vehicle.  Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire
being used. It is recommended that tires  Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use and tube assembly upon which the tire
9 over 6 years generally be replaced even if on passenger cars, multipurpose passen- beads are seated.
damage is not obvious.
ger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross  Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 bead seat.
It is important to familiarize yourself with the pounds or less.  Groove: the space between two adjacent
following terms:  Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by tread ribs.
its manufacturer as primarily intended for
 Cold tire pressure: use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
• The measured pressure after the vehicle passenger vehicles.
has been parked for at least three hours,  Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
or contact with the road.
• The measured pressure when the vehicle  Tread rib: a tread section running circum-
is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after ferentially around a tire.
having been parked for three hours.  Tread separation: pulling away of the
 Maximum inflation pressure: the maxi- tread from the tire carcass.
mum permissible cold tire inflation pres-  Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
sure for this tire. and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
bears the load.

Tires
Tire Markings Construction code NOTE

•“R” means radial construc-  LT (Light Truck) -metric tire
R tion. sizing is based on U.S.A. design
•“D” means diagonal or bias standards. The size designation
construction. for LT-metric tires is the same as
15 Rim diameter in inches (in) for P-metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into
NOTE the sidewall preceding the size
 European/Japanese metric tire designation. Example:
sizing is based on European/Jap- LT235/85R16.
anese design standards. Tires  Temporary spare tires are high
designed to these standards have pressure compact spares

Size Designation designed for temporary emer- 9
the tire size molded into the
sidewall beginning with the sec- gency use only. Tires designed
EXAMPLE:P215/65R15 tion width. The letter “P” is to this standard have the letter
Passenger car tire size based absent from this tire size desig- “T” molded into the sidewall
P preceding the size designation.
on U.S.A. design standards nation. Example: 215/65R15
96H. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Section width in millimeters
215
(mm.)
Service Description
Aspect ratio in percent (%)
65 Ratio of section height to sec- EXAMPLE: 95H
tion width of tire.
Load index
A numerical code associated
95
with the maximum load a tire
can carry.

Tires
Speed symbol EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD

WARNING 1504
A symbol indicating the range  Overloading of your tire is
of speeds at which a tire can Department of Transporta-
dangerous. Overloading can
carry a load corresponding to tion
cause tire failure, affect vehi-
its load index under certain This symbol certifies that
cle handling, and increase
operating conditions. the tire is in compliance
your stopping distance. Use DOT
H The maximum speed corre- with the U.S. Department
tires of the recommended load
sponding to the speed symbol of Transportation tire safety
capacity for your vehicle.
should only be achieved under standards, and is approved
Never overload them.
specified operating condi- for highway use.
tions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehi- Code representing the tire
cle loading, road conditions Maximum Pressure MA manufacturing location. (2
9 and posted speed limits) digits)
Maximum Pressure indicates the Code representing the tire
Maximum Load maximum permissible cold tire infla- L9 size. (2 digits)
tion pressure for this tire. ABCD Code used by tire manufac-
Maximum load indicates the maxi- turer. (1 to 4 digits)
mum load this tire is designed to Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Number representing the
carry.
The TIN may be found on one or 15 week in which the tire was
both sides of the tire but the date manufactured. (2 digits)
code may only be on one side. Look Number representing the
for the TIN on the outboard side of 04 year in which the tire was
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the manufactured. (2 digits)
TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

Tires
Treadwear, Traction and Temper- under controlled conditions on speci- Tire inflation pressures
ature Grades fied government test surfaces of N00939301968
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for
C may have poor traction perfor- the safe and satisfactory operation of your
Treadwear
mance. vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause
The treadwear grade is a comparative problems in three major areas:
rating based on the wear rate of the Temperature  Safety
tire when tested under controlled Too little pressure increases flexing in the
The temperature grades are A (the
conditions on a specified government tire and can cause tire failure. Too much
highest), B and C, representing the pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability
test course. For example, a tire
tire’s resistance to the generation of to cushion shock. Objects on the road and
graded 150 would wear one and one-
heat and its ability to dissipate heat potholes could then cause tire damage that
half (11/2) times as well on the gov- when tested under controlled condi- may result in tire failure.
ernment course as a tire graded 100. tions on a specified indoor laboratory  Economy 9
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven
The relative performance of tires test wheel. Sustained high tempera- wear patterns in the tire tread. These
depends upon the actual conditions ture can cause the material of the tire abnormal wear patterns will reduce the
of their use, however, and may depart to degenerate and reduce tire life, and tread life, and the tire will have to be
significantly from the norm due to excessive temperature can lead to replaced sooner.
variations in driving habits, service sudden tire failure. The grade C cor- Too little pressure also makes it harder for
practices and differences in road the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.
responds to a level of performance  Ride comfort and vehicle stability
characteristics and climate. which all passenger car tires must The superior riding experience built into
meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- your vehicle partly depends on the correct
Traction cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an
B and A represent higher levels of uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little
The traction grades, from highest to pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to
performance on the laboratory test
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those respond.
wheel than the minimum required by Unequal tire pressures can make steering
grades represent the tire’s ability to
law. your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.
stop on wet pavement as measured

Tires
The correct tire pressure for your vehicle is Cold inflation pressure must not go above the
listed on the placard attached to the sill of the maximum values molded into the tire side-
Replacing tires and wheels
N00939600368
driver’s door. wall. After driving several miles, your tire
(Refer to “Tire and loading information plac- inflation pressure may increase 14 to 41 KPA, CAUTION
ard” on page 11-3.) 2 to 6 PSI from the cold inflation pressure.
 Avoid using different size tires and wheels
The recommended inflation pressures should Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the from the ones listed, and avoid the combined
be used for the tires listed below. specified cold pressure, or your tire pressure use of different types of tires and wheels.
will be too low. Using different size or type tires and wheels
Item Tire size Front Rear Check your tires each time you refuel. If one may affect driving safety.
P205/60 250 KPA, 250 KPA, tire looks lower than the others, check the Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.
R16 36 PSI 36 PSI pressure for all of them.  For All-wheel drive vehicles, always use
Normal tires of the same size, same type, and same
You should also take the following safety pre-
tire P215/45 240 KPA, 240 KPA, brand, and which have no wear differences.
cautions:
R18 35 PSI 35 PSI Using tires that differ in size, type, brand or
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- the degree of wear, will increase the differen-
T125/70
9 Compact D16 mended pressures. (See the tire and load- tial oil temperature, resulting in possible
420 KPA, 60 PSI ing information placard attached to the sill damage to the driving system. Further, the
spare tire T125/90 drive train will be subjected to excessive
D16 of the driver’s door.)
loading, possibly leading to oil leakage,
 Stay within the recommended load limits. component seizure, or other serious prob-
 Make sure that the weight of any load in lems.
Tire pressures should be checked, and
your vehicle is evenly distributed.  Even if a wheel has the same rim size and
adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
 Drive at safe speeds. offset as the specified type of wheel, its
Pressures should be checked more often
 After filling your tires to the correct pres- shape may prevent it from being fitted cor-
whenever weather temperatures change
sure, check them for damage and air rectly. Consult an authorized Mitsubishi
severely, because tire pressures change with
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed on choice before using wheels that you have.
valve stems.
the placard are always “cold inflation pres-  Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels
sure”. should be used, because your vehicle is
Cold inflation pressure is measured after the equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
vehicle has been parked for at least three tem.
hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
after having been parked for three hours. and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.

Tires
Many states have laws requiring that you sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,
Tire maintenance replace your tires at this point. wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe
N00939700154
These indicators are molded into the bottom braking.
The following maintenance steps are recom- of the tread grooves and will appear when the Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
mended: tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
(1.6 mm). find out the reason for uneven tread wear.
 Check tire pressures regularly. When the bands appear next to one another in
 Have regular maintenance done on the two or more places, replace your tires. The first tire rotation is the most important
wheel balance and front and rear suspen- one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.
sion alignment.
 Rotate your tires regularly as described in NOTE
Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation
the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-19.  Tire wear indicators can have different marks
direction
and locations depending on the tire manufac-
turer.
Tread wear indicators Front
N00939800214
9
Tire rotation Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction
N00939900390
To even out the wear on your tires and make

them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at Front
the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
However, the timing for tire rotation may
vary according to your vehicle condition,
road surface conditions, and your own per- CAUTION
1- Location of the tread wear indicator sonal driving habits. Any time you notice  A compact spare tire can be installed tempo-
2- Tread wear indicator unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos- rarily in place of a tire that has been removed
sible. during the tire rotation. However, it must not
Tread wear indicators are built into the origi- be included in the regular tire rotation
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear, sequence.
nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal
you know when your tires should be replaced. wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)
CAUTION Snow tires Tire chains

 If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the N00940000359 N00940100129
correct direction of rotation, swap the front In some areas of the country, snow tires are
and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
required for winter driving. If snow tires are
CAUTION
vehicle and the front and rear tires on the  Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
required in your area, you must choose snow
right-hand side of the vehicle separately. The clearance between the chains and the
Keep each tire on its original side of the tires of the same size and type as the original
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
the arrows point in the direction in which the should also be installed on all four wheels. aged.
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the can be reduced.
wrong direction will not perform to its full Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
potential. should not be operated at sustained speeds
Clutch pedal free play (if so
over 75 mph (120 km/h). equipped)
9
N00940201097
Front
CAUTION To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn
 If flange nuts are used on your vehicle, off the engine and press the pedal until you
change to tapered nuts when using snow tires feel resistance.
with steel wheels.
 Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels Clutch pedal free play:
should be used, because your vehicle is .2 to .4 inch (4 to 9 mm)
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
CAUTION
 Avoid the combined use of different types of
tires. Using different types of tires can affect
vehicle performance and safety.

Brake pedal free play

This procedure is described in the vehicle ser-
Brake pedal free play Parking brake lever stroke vice manual and can be carried out by an
N00940301333 N00940400180
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn Check the parking brake lever travel occa-
off the engine and press the brake pedal sev- sionally. To check this, pull the lever up
eral times with your foot. Then press the slowly and count the number of clicks of the Wiper blades
pedal down with your fingers until you first ratchet. N00940700170
feel resistance. Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean

Parking brake lever stroke: them regularly to remove deposits of salt and
Brake pedal free play: 3 to 5 notches
road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild
.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
the ratchet after pulling. blades and glass areas.
Replace the blades if they continue to streak
or smear.
9
NOTE
 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long
time. This wears out the rubber and can
scratch the glass.
During cold weather

If the free play is not within these limits, take
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
choice for adjustment. Parking brake break-in the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
N00936201067 otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
Break-in the parking brake linings whenever
the brake performance of the parking brake is
insufficient or whenever the parking brake
linings and/or discs are replaced, in order to
assure the best brake performance.

Emission-control system maintenance

choice following the schedule in the “WAR-
Emission-control system RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN-
NOTE
maintenance UAL”.  Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine
specifications” on page 11-5 or plugs that are
N00940800201 You should also have an inspection and ser-
exactly the same. Other plugs could cause
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission- vice any time you suspect a malfunction. engine damage, performance problems or
control system that meets all the requirements radio noise.
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency NOTE
and Environment Canada. The emission-con-  To meet government regulations and pro-
trol system is made of: mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped Fuel hoses
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD). N00941000037
 a positive crankcase ventilation system The engine electronic control module that
 an evaporative emission-control system controls OBD functions stores various data Check the hose surfaces for any heat and
 an exhaust emission-control system (especially about the exhaust emissions). mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
This data will be erased if the battery cable is cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
The maintenance services listed in the disconnected, which could make a rapid cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat
9 “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check
battery cable when the engine malfunction all the hose connections, such as clamps and
MANUAL” must be performed at the times
indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or couplings, to make sure they are secure and
or mileages listed to keep the emission-con- “Check engine light”) is on.
trol system working properly. These, and all that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or
the other “general” maintenance services damage, replace the hoses immediately.
listed in this manual, need to be performed to
Spark plugs
keep your vehicle running properly and reli-
N00940900215
Intake valve clearance
ably. N00950100050
Spark plugs must fire properly for good
You may need more frequent maintenance if Have the valve clearance checked at an
engine performance and emission-control.
you drive your vehicle in harsh conditions authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the
Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
such as dusty areas or do a lot of start-and- Change them at the mileage listed in the mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
stop driving. MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have
MANUAL”.
To be sure the emission-control system works adjustments made by an authorized
properly, have your vehicle inspected and Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi

General maintenance
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL”.
Brake hoses
connection, and fuel tank filler N00941700047
cap) Brake hoses and tubing should be checked

N00941300085
General maintenance for:
N00941500159
Check these regularly for damage or leaks in  Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn
The next pages list the maintenance service
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is
recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay showing through any cracks or worn spots
ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to in the rubber hose cover, the hose should
that needs to be performed at the times listed,
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani- be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
there are other parts which do not usually
fold. hose wears through.
need regular maintenance.
But, if any of these parts stops working prop-  Improper installation may cause twisting,
WARNING erly, your vehicle performance could suffer. or wheel, tire or chassis interference.
 If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel, Have these items checked if you notice a
do not run the engine. Any spark (includ- problem with them. Ball joint, steering linkage seals 9
ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
material could cause an explosion or fire. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer and drive shaft boots
Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors for assistance, if you have any questions. N00941800077
dealer or a repair facility of your choice Check the following parts for damage and
for assistance.
grease leaks:
Disc brake pads, rear drum
brake linings and rear wheel  Ball joint boots of the front suspension
Evaporative emission control cylinders and steering linkage
system (except evaporative N00941600033
 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
emission canister) Good brakes are essential to safe driving.
N00941400116 Check the brake pads and brake linings for Exhaust system
If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam- wear and check the rear wheel cylinders for N00942200108
aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol- leaks. For good braking performance, replace
luting the air. the brake pads with the same type pads as the WARNING
originals.  Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s
Have the system checked at an authorized
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these
Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec- fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.

For cold and snowy weather

The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
from entering inside your vehicle is to have
Hood lock release mechanism Additional equipment (For
the engine exhaust system properly serviced. and safety catch regions where snow is encoun-
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com- N00942500114
tered)
plete exhaust system and nearby body areas The hood lock release mechanism and hood
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-
sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- oiled when needed for easy movement and to handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
ing: stop rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
 A change in the sound of the exhaust sys- of the hood latch and release lever. Work the snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for
tem grease into the hood lock mechanism until all the windshield, side and rear window are also
 The smell of exhaust fumes inside the the movable surfaces are covered.
vehicle useful.
Also, put a light coat of the same grease on
 The underside or rear of the vehicle is the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
damaged Fusible links
9 N00942700259
Also check the exhaust system each time the For cold and snowy weather The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if
vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes, N00942600102
a large current attempts to flow through cer-
or required service. Any open seams or loose
tain electrical systems.
connections could let dangerous exhaust Ventilation slots In case of a melted fusible link, see your
fumes seep into the luggage compartment and
passenger compartments.
The ventilation slots in front of the wind- repair facility of your choice for inspection
shield should be brushed clear after a heavy and replacement.
Check for any of the following snowfall so that the operation of the heating For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
conditions: and ventilation systems will not be impaired. load capacities” on page 9-26.
 Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks

caused by corrosion or damage. Weatherstripping WARNING
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any
 Check the joints and connections for
other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
looseness or exhaust gas leaks. To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,
 Check the rubber hangers and brackets for on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should property destruction and serious or fatal
damage. be treated with silicone grease. injuries at any time.

Fuses
1. Open the fuse lid and pull to remove it.
Fuses WARNING
N00942800801  When changing fuses, do not damage the
driver’s knee airbag harness or acciden-
tally strike the airbag area with hard
Fuse block location objects. Improper work methods could
result in an accidental driver’s knee air-
To prevent damage to the electrical system bag deployment or could make the
from short-circuiting or overloading, each driver’s knee airbag inoperable. Either of
individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The these situations could result in serious
fuse blocks are located in the passenger com- injury or death.
partment and in the engine compartment.
2. For vehicles with the bottom cover, use NOTE

Passenger compartment  When finished, be sure to return the puller to
the puller to loosen the 2 clips (A) and
the fuse block in the engine compartment.
push down the bottom cover. The puller is 9
in the fuse block in the engine compart-
ment. Refer to “Fuse replacement” on 3. To put back the fuse lid, line up the fuse
page 9-28. lid hook (B) with the clamp (C) on the
instrument panel and push the lid back in.
A- Main fuse block

B- Sub fuse block
The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-

ment are located behind the fuse lid on the
driver’s side as shown.

Fuses
Engine compartment Passenger compartment fuse loca- Sym- Capac-

No. Electrical system
tion table bol ity
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is 4 Windshield wiper 30 A
located as shown in the illustration.
Passenger compartment fuse location 5 Optional 10 A
6 Door locks 20 A
Main fuse block Sub fuse block 7 Radio 15 A
8 Control unit relay 7.5 A
Interior lights
9 15 A
(Dome lights)
Hazard warning
10 15 A
flasher
9 11 Rear window wiper 15 A
1. Push the lock lever. 12 Gauges 7.5 A

2. Remove the fuse block cover. Cigarette
13 lighter/Accessory 15 A
Fuse load capacities socket
N00954801368 14 Ignition switch 10 A
This fuse list shows the names of the electri- 15 Sunroof 20 A
cal systems and their fuse capacities.
There are spare fuses in the cover of the fuse Sym- Capac- Outside rearview
No. Electrical system 16 10 A
block in the engine compartment. Always bol ity mirrors
replace a blown fuse with one of the same All-wheel drive sys-
1 Heater 30 A* 17 10 A
capacity as the original. tem
Stop lights
2 15 A 18 Back-up lights 7.5 A
(Brake lights)
3 Rear fog light 10 A 19 Accessory socket 15 A

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Engine compartment fuse location Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity table bol ity
Power window con- 3 Automatic transaxle 20 A
20 30 A*
trol Engine compartment fuse location
4 Horn 10 A
21 Defogger 30 A*
5 Alternator 7.5 A
Heated
22 outside rearview 7.5 A 6 Headlight washer 20 A
mirrors
7 Air conditioning 10 A
23 115V Power outlet 15 A
/ ETV/Oil cooler fan
25 (20) *
8 15 A
24 Power seats (Twin Clutch SST)
A
9 Security horn 20 A
25 Heated seats 30 A
10 Wiper deicer 15 A 9
*- Fusible link Behind the fuse block cover 11 — — —
 Some fuses may not be installed on your 12 Power gate 30 A
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model Daytime running
* 13 10 A
or specifications. lights
 The table above shows the main equip-
ment corresponding to each fuse. Headlight
14 10 A
(high beam) (left)
*- Front of the vehicle Headlight
15 10 A
(high beam) (right)
Sym- Capac- Head-
No. Electrical system light
bol ity Dis-
16 (low/high 20 A
1 Front fog lights 15 A charge
beam)
2 Engine 7.5 A (left)

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac- Replace the borrowed fuse with a fuse that
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system has the correct capacity as soon as possible.
bol ity bol ity
Head- Anti-lock braking
27 30 A* Identification of fuse
light system
Dis-
17 (low/high 20 A Air conditioning con-
charge 28 30 A*
beam) denser fan motor Capacity Color
(right)
29 Radiator fan motor 40 A* 7.5 A Brown
Headlight
(low 30 IOD IOD 30 A 10 A Red
18 Halogen 10 A
beam) 31 Audio amplifier 30 A 15 A Blue
(left) 20 A Yellow
32 Diesel 30 A
Headlight 25 A Natural (White)
(low 33 — Spare fuse 10 A
19 Halogen 10 A Green (fuse type)/Pink (fusible
9 beam) 34 — Spare fuse 15 A 30 A
link type)
(right)
35 — Spare fuse 20 A 40 A Green
ENG/
20 10 A
POWER *- Fusible link
21 Ignition coil 10 A Fuse replacement
 Some fuses may not be installed on your
N00954900027
ENG/ vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
20 A 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
22 POWER or specifications.
the electrical item connected to the fuse
Fuel line heater 25 A  The table above shows the main equip-
and turn the ignition switch to the
ment corresponding to each fuse.
“LOCK” position.
23 Fuel pump 15 A
2. There is a fuse puller (A) in the engine
There are no 7.5 A, 25 A or 30 A spare fuses.
24 Starter 30 A* compartment fuse block.
If a fuse of one of these capacities blows,
25 Valve lift control 40 A* replace it temporarily by borrowing one of
the fuses indicated below.
Anti-lock braking
26 40 A* 7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse
system
25 A: 20 A spare fuse
30 A: 30 A audio amplifier fuse

Replacement of light bulbs

4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
matching tables, to check the fuse that is
CAUTION
 If the replacement fuse blows again after a
related to the problem. If the fuse is not
short time, have the electrical system
blown, something else must be causing
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
the problem. Contact an authorized Mit- dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility find and correct the cause.
of your choice to have the problem
checked.
N00942901375
Before replacing a bulb, be sure the light is

3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your
block. skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy
the bulb when it gets hot.
9
CAUTION
 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
B- Fuse is OK being turned off.
C- Blown fuse When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool
sufficiently before touching it. You could
otherwise be burned.
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity  Do not install commercially available LED-
securely into the appropriate slot. type bulbs.
Commercially available LED-type bulbs
could adversely affect the operation of the
CAUTION vehicle, such as by preventing the lamps and
 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than other vehicle equipment from operating
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire, properly.
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring
to heat up and could cause a fire.

CAUTION NOTE Front

 For vehicles with high intensity discharge  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
headlights, the headlight bulbs on this vehi- washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
cle are high intensity discharge bulbs which becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same
contain mercury. phenomenon as when window glass mists up
If you need to have your vehicle disposed of, on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-
you should remove the high intensity dis- tional problem.
charge headlights before disposal. When the light is switched on, the heat will
The removed high intensity discharge head- remove the fog. However, if water gathers
lights should be disposed of or recycled in inside the light, please have it checked by an
accordance with the applicable laws. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
[For vehicles sold in Canada] ANSI
For more information on safe handling, dis- Trade No.
posal, and recycling of the product, and the Bulb capacity Description Wattage
or Bulb
9 measures to be taken in case of accidental
breakage, please visit
N00943000099
type
The bulb should only be replaced with a new Front turn sig-
<http://www.ec.gc.ca/mercure-mercury/>. 1- 21 W WY21W
bulb with the same rating and type. The type nal light
and rating are listed on the base of the bulb.
Headlight, high 9005
NOTE 2- 60 W
beam HB3
 If you are unsure of how to carry out the Outside
Headlight, low
work as required, it is recommended that N00950302056
these procedures be carried out by an autho- beam/

[Except for vehicles with high intensity dis-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair Daytime run-
charge headlights] 9006
facility of your choice. 3- ning light 51 W
HB4
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body (Type 2)
when removing a light and lens. (if so equipped)
(Halogen bulb)
Front fog light
4- 19W H16
(if so equipped)


ANSI Front
ANSI
Trade No. Trade No.
Description Wattage Description Wattage
or Bulb or Bulb
type type
Parking light Side turn signal
(Type 1)/ light (on out-
6- — —
Daytime run- side rear-view
5- — —
ning light mirror)
(Type 1)(if so
equipped)
WARNING
Front side-  Check with an authorized Mitsubishi
ANSI
marker light/ Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Trade No.
6- Parking light 5W W5W Description Wattage choice when it is necessary to repair a dis-
or Bulb
(Type 2) (if so charge headlight or to replace the bulb.
equipped)
type The power circuit, bulb and electrodes 9
Front turn sig- generate high voltages that may cause a
Side turn signal 1- 21 W WY21W severe electrical shock.
nal light
light (on
7- 5W — Headlight,
fender) (if so
equipped) low/high beam
2-
(Discharge
35 W — NOTE
Side turn signal  The side turn signal light (on outside rear-
bulb)
light (on out- view mirror), front side-marker and parking
8- side rear-view — — 3- Front fog light 19 W H16 light (Type 1) and daytime running light
mirror) (if so Parking light (Type 1) uses LEDs rather than bulbs.
equipped) For repair and replacement, contact an
(Type 1)/
4- Daytime run- — — repair facility of your choice.
[For vehicles with high intensity discharge ning light  It is not possible to repair or replace only the
headlights] (Type 1) bulb for the side turn signal light (on fender).
Front side- Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
5- 5W WY5W dealer or a repair facility of your choice
marker light
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.

Rear NOTE Headlights (low beam, except

 The high-mounted stop light uses LEDs for vehicles with high intensity
rather than bulbs. For repair and replace-
ment, contact an authorized Mitsubishi discharge headlights)
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your N00943101895
choice. 1. Turn the bulb (A) counterclockwise, and

then remove the headlight bulb with
holder.
Inside
N00950401728
ANSI
Trade No.
Description Wattage
or Bulb
9 type
High-mounted
1- — —
stop light
License plate
2- 5W W5W *- Front of the vehicle
light
3- Back-up light 21 W 7440
2. While holding down the tab (B), pull out
4- Tail light 5W W5W Description Wattage the bulb (C).
Tail and stop 1- Trunk area light 5W
5- 21/5 W 7443
light 2- Dome light (rear) (if so
8W
Rear turn sig- equipped)
6- 21 W 7440
nal light Dome light (front)/
3- 8W
Rear side- Reading light
7- 5W W5W
marker light


2. Turn the cap (B) counterclockwise to
remove it.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.
Headlights (high beam, except *- Front of the vehicle
for vehicles with high intensity
CAUTION 3. Turn the bulb (C) counterclockwise to 9
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
discharge headlights)
N00943100885
remove it.
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a 1. When replacing the bulb on the front pas-
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter. senger’s side, remove the bolt (A) holding
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare down the washer tank spout and move the
hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your spout toward the rear of the vehicle.
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlights are used.
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
alcohol and let it dry completely before
installing the bulb.
*- Front of the vehicle
4. While holding down the tab (D), pull out

the bulb (E).
Adjustment of headlight aim

N00943200121
The alignment of the headlights should be

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Front side-marker lights/park-

ing lights (Type 2, except for
vehicles with high intensity dis-
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal charge head lights) (if so equipped)
steps in reverse.
Headlights (low/high beam, for N00917301708
1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to

vehicles with high intensity dis-
9 CAUTION remove it.
charge lights)
N00943100625
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a Do not attempt to disassemble or repair head-
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter. lights, and do not attempt to replace their
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare bulbs.
hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
to break the next time the headlights are
WARNING
used.  A high voltage is present in the power cir-
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with cuit and in the bulbs and bulb terminals.
alcohol and let it dry completely before To avoid the risk of an electric shock, con-
installing the bulb. tact an authorized Mitsubishi dealer *- Front of the vehicle
whenever repair or replacement is neces-
sary.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

3. To install the bulb, perform the removal 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse. steps in reverse.
Front side-marker lights (for 3. Turn the socket (D) counterclockwise to Front turn signal lights 9
vehicles with high intensity dis- remove it. N00943401436
1. Remove the clips (A) and clips (B), then

charge headlights) remove the duct (C) and the upper cover
N00917301711
(D).
1. To create enough work space, turn the
steering wheel all the way in the direction
opposite to the side you wish to replace.
2. Remove the clips (A), and screws (B) or
bolts (B) to turn up the cover (C).
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.


2. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
driver with a cloth over its tip into the
light cover (A) and pry gently to remove
it.
Type 1

steps in reverse.
9 2. Remove the entire socket and bulb assem- Front fog lights (if so equipped)
bly (E) by turning it counterclockwise. N00943601858 Type 2
1. On vehicles with the parking lights on
bumper/daytime running lights on bum-
per, pull the light cover (A) out in the
direction of the arrow shown in the illus-
tration to disconnect the hooks (B).
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.


3. Remove the screws (C) and remove the 4. While holding down the tab (E), pull out 6. To install the bulb, perform the removal
light unit. the socket (F). steps in reverse.
CAUTION
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the fog lights are used.
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
alcohol and let it dry completely before
5. Turn the bulb (G) counterclockwise to installing the bulb.
NOTE
 When unfastening the screws, be careful not
remove it. 9
to move the beam position adjustment screw
(D).

Rear combination lights Tail and stop light and Rear side-marker
N00943701602 Rear turn signal light light
Tail and stop lights, rear turn sig-

nal lights and rear side-marker
lights
1. Remove the screws (A) from the light
unit.
3. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal
by turning them counterclockwise. steps in reverse.
9 NOTE
 When mounting the light unit, align the pins
(E) on the light unit with the holes in the
body.
2. Remove the light unit in the rear direc-

tion.
B- Tail and stop light

C- Rear turn signal light
D- Rear side-marker light
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it out. Tail lights and back-up lights
1. Open the trunk lid.


Remove the clips (A) and remove the
Back-up light Tail light
cover (B).
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal 3. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
steps in reverse.
2. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies
by turning them counterclockwise.
License plate light 9
N00944000331
1. Remove the screws (A) from the license

plate light lens (B). Then, remove the lens
and gasket (C), and withdraw the bulb.

steps in reverse.
C- Tail light
D- Back-up light
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly

together by turning it counterclockwise.

2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
Dome light (front)/Reading the bulb. steps in reverse.
lights
N00944501287 NOTE
1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the  Before replacing the bulb, put the dome light
light assembly. Gently pry to remove the (front)/reading lights switch into the “OFF”
lens. position.
 When mounting the lens, align the tab (B)
with the hole on the vehicle body.
NOTE
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.

Vehicle care precautions

2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out
Dome light (rear) (if so equipped)
the bulb.
Trunk area light
N00944100260 N00944800094
1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the 1. Pull both clips (A) away from the center
light assembly and pry gently to remove as shown and remove the light unit. Then
the lens. remove the bulb by pulling out.

steps in reverse. 9
NOTE 2. To install the bulb, perform the removal
NOTE  Before replacing the bulb, put the dome light
steps in reverse.
(rear) switch into the “OFF” position.
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.  When mounting the lens, align the tab (B)
with the hole on the vehicle body. Vehicle care precautions
N00945100153
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,

perform regular maintenance using the proper
materials and procedures. Be sure to use only
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula-
tions. Choose the materials you will use care-
fully, to be sure that they do not contain
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help
in choosing these materials.

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle
CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some  Do not use organic substances (solvents,  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
are poisonous. Others are highly flammable. benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or tectants containing silicones or wax.
Some are dangerous if you breathe their alkaline or acidic solutions. Such products, when applied to the instru-
fumes in a closed space. When you use any- These chemicals can cause discoloring, ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be staining or cracking of the surface. tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
sure to follow the instructions. Always open If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make Also, if such products get on the switches of
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re sure their ingredients do not include the sub- the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
cleaning the inside. Never use the following stances mentioned above. ure of these accessories.
chemicals to clean your vehicle:
• Gasoline
• Carbon Tetrachloride NOTE Upholstery
• Benzine  Always read the instructions on the cleaner N00945500131
• Kerosene label. 1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-
• Naphtha
9 • Acetone
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
keep the interior clean.
• Turpentine Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
• Paint Thinner
• Lacquer Thinner
flocked parts the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
N00945300171
leather should be cleaned with an appro-
• Nail Polish Remover priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
soaked in a 3 % solution of gentle soap cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a
These can all be dangerous, and they all can and water. 3 % solution of gentle soap in lukewarm
damage your vehicle. 2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out water.
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter- 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum
gent thoroughly. cleaner and remove any stains with carpet
Cleaning the inside of your cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by
vehicle lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth
N00945200079 and spot remover.
After washing the inside of your vehicle with
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
lated area.

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
NOTE NOTE Washing

 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat  The genuine leather surface may harden and N00945900526
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
over the surface in one direction. for long hours. When your vehicle is parked,
picked up from air, rain, snow or road sur-
place it in the shade as much as possible.
faces can damage the paint and body of your
 When the temperature of the vehicle interior
vehicle if left on.
Genuine leather (if so equipped) rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and Frequent washing and waxing is the best way
N00945600161
stick to the seat. to protect your vehicle from this damage.
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
soft cloth soaked in a 5 % solution of gen- Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with
tle soap and water. Cleaning the outside of your water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, vehicle clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,
wring it out well, and wipe off all the N00945700061 wash the vehicle from top to bottom.
soap. Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- 9
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur- ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
face. carefully clean the joints and flanges of the
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to
Foreign material remain.
NOTE N00945800046
 If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, CAUTION
may grow. tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other  When washing the underside of your vehicle
 The genuine leather surface can be damaged foreign matters can damage the finish on your or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-
if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber vehicle. tect your hands.
brush. Generally, the longer any foreign material  If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place
 Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, stays on the finish, the worse the damage. the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position
alcohol, gasoline, acid or alkaline solvents Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when- to deactivate the rain sensor before washing
can discolor the genuine leather surface and ever the finish gets soiled. the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will oper-
should not be used. ate in the presence of water spray on the
 Genuine leather seats can mildew if not kept windshield and may get damaged as a result.
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.

CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 Never spray or splash water on the electrical • Put down (except for vehicles with SIRIUS  When the door is frozen, opening it by force
parts in the engine compartment. This may satellite radio antenna) or remove the may tear off or crack the rubber gasket
damage them. Be careful also when washing antenna. installed around the door. Pour warm water
the underbody. Do not spray water into the • If your vehicle is equipped with rear to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe
engine compartment. spoiler, check with the car wash operator off the water after opening the door. To pre-
 Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat- before using the car wash. vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the • If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-
paint surface and make it dull. the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” posi- cant.
Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- tion to deactivate the rain sensor.
ored vehicles.
 Some hot water washing equipment uses
During cold weather Waxing
high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.
N00946000188
This heated water may damage your vehi-
cle’s resin parts. It can flood the interior of Salt and other chemicals spread on winter Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or
9 the vehicle. Therefore, be sure of the follow- roads in some geographical areas can have a when water does not bead up on the paint.
ing: detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody. Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax
• Keep the washing nozzle at least 20 inches You should flush the underbody with a high on the painted surfaces. After the wax has
(50 cm) away from the vehicle body. pressure hose every time you wash the out- dried, polish with a dry soft cloth.
• When washing around the door glass, hold side of your vehicle. Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
the nozzle at a distance of more than 20 You should wax when the painted surfaces
Take special care to remove mud or other
inches (50 cm) and at right angles to the are cool.
debris which could trap and hold salt and
glass surface.
moisture.
 When using high-pressure water to wash a
vehicle equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key sys- After washing your vehicle, wipe off all CAUTION
tem, keep the water from spraying on the waterdrops from the rubber parts around the  Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
open button on the trunk. This could cause doors to prevent the doors from freezing. should not be used. These waxes remove rust
the trunk to open and flood the inside of the and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
trunk. are harmful to the finish on the paint and the
 Make sure to do the following when using an plate, because they also remove clearcoat.
automatic car wash, with help from either They are also harmful to other glossy sur-
this manual or the car wash operator, to faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.
avoid damaging your vehicle:
• Fold the outside mirrors.

CAUTION Damaged paint CAUTION

 Do not use gasoline, kerosene, benzine or N00946200063  Do not let the plastic parts get soiled with
paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat gasoline, oil, brake fluids, engine oils,
from the vehicle surface. greases, paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (bat-
should be touched up as soon as possible with
 Do not put wax on the areas having black tery electrolyte). These fluids, etc., may
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
matte coating because it can cause uneven crack, stain or discolor the plastic parts.
Check body areas facing the road or the tires If any of these get on the plastic parts, wipe
discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
wax on them, wipe the wax off right away carefully for damage to the paint caused by them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a
with a soft cloth and warm water. flying stones, etc. The paint code number for mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse
 On vehicles with sunroof, be careful not to your vehicle can be found on the vehicle them immediately with water.
apply any wax on the weatherstrip (black information code plate in the engine compart-
rubber) when waxing the area around the ment.
sunroof opening.
Chrome parts
N00946400065
If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot
maintain a weatherproof seal with the sun- Cleaning plastic parts To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome
roof. N00946300178
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and 9
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the
If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a
Polishing
rough surface of the bumper, molding or commercially available chrome polish.
N00946100059
lights, the surface may appear white in color.
If painted surfaces have been severely dam- In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
aged and lost their original luster and color and a soft cloth or chamois.
Aluminum wheels (if so
tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine equipped)
polishing compound. Avoid limiting your
polishing to the damaged surface only; polish CAUTION 1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge.
N00946500196
a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing  Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can-
scrubber as these may damage the plastic
cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush not be removed easily with water.
surface.
the compound from the surface and apply a Rinse off the detergent after washing the
 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster. wheel.
ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
tic surface. 3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois
leather or a soft cloth.

CAUTION Cleaning the sunroof (if so

 Do not use a brush or other hard implement equipped)
on the wheels.
N00946800072
Doing so could scratch the wheels.
 Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra- Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft
sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away
so could cause the coating on the wheels to with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral deter-
peel or become discolored or stained.
gent solution. Wipe away the solution with a
 Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
sponge dipped in fresh water.
cleaner or by any other means.
 Contact with seawater or road salt used for
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such NOTE
substances as soon as possible.  The surface treatment on the inside of the
glass may be removed if a hard cloth or
organic solvent is used.
9 Window glass
N00946600067
The window glass can usually be cleaned Engine compartment

N00947000042
using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead Never spray or splash water on the electrical
insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it components in the engine compartment, as
dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. this may cause damage.
Do not allow any nearby parts (such as plastic
parts) come into contact with sulphuric acid
Wiper blades (battery electrolyte), which may crack, stain,
N00946700097
or discolour them.
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove If this occurs, wipe the parts with a soft cloth
grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper saturated with a mild detergent and water
blades. solution.
Replace the wiper blades when they no longer Then immediately rinse the affected parts
clean the windshield and rear window prop- with plenty of water.
erly.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047100100 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C Grades B and A represent higher levels of
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects. the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201485
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or Mit- ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
subishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition Caribbean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
You can also obtain other informa-
Transport Canada SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
tion about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov. 330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to: Pacific Marketing, Inc. Key information to discuss with
P.O. Box 698 your insurance company
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. PAGO PAGO,
P.O. Box 6066 AMERICAN SAMOA AS,  Understand your repair estimate before
TAMUNING 96799 approving repairs.
GUAM 96931  Choosing the repair shop and the brands
of parts that they use on your vehicle is
your decision.
Important facts to know in  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
For vehicles sold in Saipan Many times, to save money, your insur-
case of an accident
ance company will recommend imitation
N01047300229
To contact Triple J Motors parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
call (670)234-7133 or write to: accident, but there is always that potential or workmanship.
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
Triple J Motors drive safely.
10 P.O. Box 500487 Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 In the event of an accident tection
 Remain calm. The strength and integrity built into your Mit-
For vehicles sold in American  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to subishi vehicle is the result of a specific
the police, and, if necessary, call for an design referred to as “Energy Management”.
Samoa ambulance. Individual body parts are designed to act as
 Record all the details of the accident. This one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. will provide you with accurate records of waves are absorbed by protective panels or
call 684(699)9140 or write to: the accident for discussions with your are channeled around the passenger compart-
insurance company and other persons ment. This important feature is possible
who may be acting on your behalf. because high tensile steel is used in Mitsubi-
shi Motors panels and structural parts, some-
thing that cannot be guaranteed by the
manufacturers of imitation parts. All Genuine
Mitsubishi Motors body panels and support
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects


brackets are designed and constructed as you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
important protection features in the event of replacements parts are your guarantee that
an accident. By replacing body parts with your vehicle will have all the technological
imitations, your vehicle may no longer meet advantages and maintain the style and protec-
original equipment specifications. tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Motors parts.
Consumer rights (For vehicles
sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg- 10
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-4
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-4
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-5
Battery ............................................................................................11-5
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Refill capacities .............................................................................11-6
11
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling 2 - Vehicle identification num- Chassis number

N01147401840 ber plate
Keep a record of the chassis number and The chassis number is stamped on the floor
vehicle identification number. Such informa- The vehicle identification number is stamped under the front passenger seat. It is visible by
tion will assist the police if your vehicle is on the plate riveted to the left front corner of pulling back the carpet flap as shown in the
stolen. the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of illustration.
the vehicle through the windshield.
3 - Air conditioning label
The air conditioning label is affixed on the

inside panel of the engine compartment.
11
1 - Vehicle emission control Engine model/serial number
information label
The engine model and serial number are
The vehicle emission control information stamped on the engine cylinder block as
shown in the illustration.
label is affixed on the inside panel of the
engine hood.
4 - Vehicle information code
plate
The vehicle information code plate is located

on the front passenger door sill.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle labeling
Type 1
Certification label
N01148200196
The certification label (A) is located on the

driver’s door sill.
Type 2
Tire and loading information
placard
N01148100528
The tire and loading information placard is

located on the driver’s door sill. 11
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
N01147501607
Item Vehicles with 16 inch tire Vehicles with 18 inch tire

Overall length 182.1 in (4,625 mm)
Overall width 69.4 in (1,760 mm)
Overall height 58.3 in (1,480 mm) 58.7 in (1,490 mm)
Wheel base 103.7 in (2,635 mm)
Vehicle weights
N01147601956
2.4 liter
2.0 liter
Item Front-wheel drive vehicles All-wheel drive vehicles
Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 3,969 lb (1,800 kg) 4,079 lb (1,850 kg) 4,190 lb (1,900 kg)
11 Gross axle weight rating Front 2,227 lb (1,010 kg) 2,227 lb (1,010 kg) 2,227 lb (1,010 kg)
(GAWR) Rear 2,007 lb (910 kg) 2,007 lb (910 kg) 2,117 lb (960 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
NOTE
 Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10.
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the number of maximum occupants
11-4 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
N01147701582
Item 2.0 liter 2.4 liter

Engine model 4B11 4B12
Engine displacement 121.9 CID (1,998 cm³) 144.0 CID (2,360 cm³)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement 4 in-line
Bore 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.46 in (88.0 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.82 in (97.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0 10.5
Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C) 189 °F (87 °C)
Spark plugs NGK DIFR6C11 DIFR5C11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm) .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
11
Battery 16 x 6 1/2J, NOTE
Size 18 x 7J
16 x 6 1/2JJ  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
N01147800182
Wh PC dealer for details on the combination used on
75D23L 4.5 in (114.3 mm) your vehicle.
eel D
 These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions
Off-
Battery is a 12 volt type. 1.81 in (46 mm) described in this owner’s manual.
set
Tires and wheels PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation

N01147901799 holes)
P205/60R16 P215/45R18
Tire Size
91H 89V
Specifications 11-5
Refill capacities
Refill capacities
N01148002231
Item Capacity Lubricants

Fuel (approxi- Front-wheel drive vehicles 15.5 gal (59.0 L)
Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2.
mate) All-wheel drive vehicles 14.5 gal (55.0 L)
Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L)
2.0 liter Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark
Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L) (“starbust” symbol) on the container.
Engine oil
Oil pan 4.5 qt (4.3 L) If these oils are not available, an API classification SN
2.4 liter or higher can be used.
Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
Power steering As required Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Power Steering Fluid
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL
Manual transaxle 2.6 qt (2.5 L)
API classification GL-3 SAE 75W-80
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.3 qt (6.9 L)
fluid” on page 9-10.
11 Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
Transfer oil .53 qt (0.5 L)
classification GL-5 SAE 80
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
Rear differential oil .42 qt (0.4 L)
classification GL-5 SAE 80
Brake/Clutch (if so equipped) As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Manual trans-
Engine coolant 7.4 qt (7.0 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant
axle
{Includes .63 qt (0.65 L) in reserve tank} Premium or an equivalent*
CVT 7.4 qt (7.0 L)
Washer fluid 4.3 qt (4.0 L) —
11-6 Specifications
Refill capacities
Item Capacity Lubricants
Refer to the “Air
conditioning label”
Refrigerant (air conditioning) HFC-134a
on page
11-2.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
11
Specifications 11-7
Alphabetical index
A B C
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-5 Back-up lights California Perchlorate Materials
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-76 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Requirements ..................................... 3-6
ASC OFF display or ASC indicator .. 5-78 Replacement .................................. 9-38 Capacities .......................................... 11-6
ASC operation display .................... 5-78 Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive Card holder ............................ 5-163, 5-167
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8 shaft boots ....................................... 9-23
Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Air conditioning Battery .............................................. 9-12
Catalytic converter ................................ 9-2
Automatic air conditioning ......... 7-4, 7-9 Charging system warning light ....... 5-125
Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-12 CD player........................................... 7-15
Important air conditioning operating tips..
7-14 Disconnection and connection ......... 9-13 Center console box............................ 5-167
During cold weather ....................... 9-12 Certification label ............................... 11-3
Air purifier......................................... 7-15
Specification.................................. 11-5
All-wheel driving operation ................. 5-70 Charging system warning light ........... 5-125
Bluetooth 2.0 interface....................... 5-139
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-45 Chassis number................................... 11-2
Bottle holder ..................................... 5-168
AM/FM radio ..................................... 7-15 Checking battery electrolyte level......... 9-12
Brake
Antenna Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-74 Child restraint..................................... 4-13
Roof antenna .................................. 7-51 Braking ........................................... 6-5 Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-38
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-74 Fluid ..................................... 9-11, 11-6 Cleaning 12
Warning light / display ........... 5-74, 5-75 Hose ............................................. 9-23 Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-42
Arm rest............................................... 4-6 Parking brake................................. 5-48 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-43
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-21
Assist grip ........................................ 5-168 Clock................................................. 7-52
Pedal............................................. 5-72
Audio Pedal free play ............................... 9-21 Clutch
AM/FM radio ................................. 7-15 Power brakes ................................. 5-73 Fluid..................................... 9-11, 11-6
CD player ...................................... 7-15 Service brake ................................. 5-72 Pedal free play................................ 9-20
Troubleshooting ............................. 7-49 Brake assist........................................ 5-73 Coat hooks ....................................... 5-169
Automatic air conditioning ............. 7-4, 7-9 Break-in recommendations.................... 5-3 Combination headlights and dimmer switch .
5-127
Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-30
Coming home light ........................... 5-131
12-1
Alphabetical index
Consumer information ........................ 10-2 Switch.......................................... 5-164 Specifications................................. 11-5
Continuously variable transmission (CVT).... Doors Engine coolant temperature display ...... 5-99
5-59 Lock .............................................. 5-34 EPS ................................................... 5-79
Fluid .................................... 9-10, 11-6 Power door locks ............................ 5-37
Exhaust system................................... 9-23
Selector lever operation................... 5-59 Drive mode indicator ........................... 5-69
Sports mode ................................... 5-64
Drive mode-selector ............................ 5-68
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-6 F
Driving during cold weather.................. 6-4
Cruise control..................................... 5-80 Filling the fuel tank............................... 3-3
Driving, alcohol and drugs .................... 6-2
Cup holder ....................................... 5-168 Floor console box ............................. 5-167
Floor mat ............................................. 6-2
E
D Fluid.................................................. 11-6
Electric power steering system (EPS) .... 5-79 Brake fluid............................ 9-11, 11-6
Daytime running lights
Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-138 Clutch fluid........................... 9-11, 11-6
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-138 fluid ................................... 9-10, 11-6
system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-27
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door Engine coolant ........................ 9-7, 11-6
Electronic power steering system warning
windows) .................................. 7-8, 7-13 Power steering fluid ............... 9-12, 11-6
display ............................................. 5-79
Digital clock Washer fluid ......................... 9-10, 11-6
Electronically controlled 4WD system .. 5-68
12 Time Setting ......................... 7-47, 7-52
Drive mode indicator....................... 5-69
Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-6
Dimensions ........................................ 11-4 Drive mode-selector ........................ 5-68 Free-hand advanced security transmitter
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-130 (F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-12
Emergency key ................................... 5-22
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-23 Front fog lights
Emission-control system maintenance ... 9-22
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Dome light Engine Indicator ...................................... 5-123
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Compartment................................... 9-5 Replacement .................................. 9-36
Replacement .................................. 9-41 Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-6 Switch ......................................... 5-134
Switch ......................................... 5-165 Hood............................................... 9-3
Front seats............................................ 4-3
Dome light/Reading lights Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-6
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Overheating..................................... 8-4 Front side-marker and parking lights
Replacement .................................. 9-40 Serial number ................................. 11-2 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Replacement ......................... 9-34, 9-35
12-2
Alphabetical index
Front turn signal lights Dimmer........................................ 5-130 Storage ............................................ 8-5
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Headlight flasher ........................... 5-131 Jump-starting the engine........................ 8-2
Replacement .................................. 9-35 Leveling switch............................. 5-132
Fuel Replacement .................................. 9-32
Fuel economy................................... 6-2 Switch.......................................... 5-127 K
Fuel hoses ...................................... 9-22 High beam indicator .......................... 5-123 Key reminder buzzer ........................... 5-36
Modification/alterations to the electrical or High-mounted stop light ..................... 9-30 Keyless entry system............................. 5-7
fuel systems ................................... 3-6 Keys .................................................... 5-3
Hood lock release mechanism and safety
Tank capacity .......................... 3-4, 11-6
catch ............................................... 9-24
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-15
Horn switch ...................................... 5-139 L
Fuel selection ....................................... 3-2
HPS .................................................. 5-79 Labeling............................................. 11-2
Fuses ................................................. 9-25
Hydraulic power steering system (HPS) 5-79 License plate light
Fusible links....................................... 9-24 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
I Replacement................................... 9-39
G Link System ..................................... 5-139
If the vehicle breaks down..................... 8-2
General maintenance ........................... 9-23 Loading information.............................. 6-6
Ignition switch ........................... 5-16, 5-52
General vehicle data............................ 11-4 Lubricants .......................................... 11-6
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6 10-4 12
Glove compartment........................... 5-166 Indicators ......................................... 5-123 M
Information screen display ................. 5-125 Malfunction indicator ........................ 5-124
H Inside day/night rearview mirror .......... 5-50 Manual transaxle................................. 5-57
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-133 Oil.......................................... 9-9, 11-6
Inside emergency trunk lid release ....... 5-40
Shift points (recommended speed).... 5-57
Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-123 Instrument cluster............................... 5-90
Mirror
Head restraints...................................... 4-6 Interior lights .................................... 5-164 Inside day/night rearview mirror ...... 5-50
Headlight leveling switch .................. 5-132 Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-51
Headlights J Modifications to and racing of your vehicle..
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 3-5
Jack .................................................... 8-5
12-3
Alphabetical index
Multi-information display.................... 5-91 Puncture (Tire changing)....................... 8-6
S
O R Safe driving techniques ......................... 6-4
Octane requirement............................... 3-2 Radiator cap ........................................ 9-8 Seat ..................................................... 4-2
Arm rest .......................................... 4-6
Oil Radio
Front seats ....................................... 4-3
Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-6 General information about your radio 7-53
Heated seats ..................................... 4-4
Manual transaxle oil ................ 9-9, 11-6 Rain sensor....................................... 5-135 Rear seats ........................................ 4-5
Rear axle oil................................... 9-10
Rear axle oil ....................................... 9-10 Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2
Rear differential oil......................... 11-6
Transfer oil ........................... 9-10, 11-6 Rear seats ............................................ 4-5 Seat belt............................................... 4-8
Rear side-marker lights Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor. 4-11
Operation under adverse driving conditions...
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-30 Child restraint ................................ 4-13
8-14
Replacement................................... 9-38 Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning.. 4-10
Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-51 Force limiter .................................. 4-13
Rear turn signal lights Front passenger seat belt warning light .....
Overheating ......................................... 8-4
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-30 4-11
Replacement................................... 9-38 Maintenance and inspection............. 4-20
P Rear window defogger switch ............ 5-138 Pre-tensioner .................................. 4-12
Parking ................................................ 6-5 Rear-view camera ............................... 5-88 Seat belt extender ........................... 4-12
12 Parking brake ................................. 5-48
Rearview mirror
Seat belt instructions ......................... 4-8
Parking brake break-in .................... 9-21 Seat belt use during pregnancy......... 4-12
Inside............................................. 5-50
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-21 Service brake...................................... 5-72
Outside .......................................... 5-51
Polishing............................................ 9-45 Service precautions ............................... 9-2
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ............... 11-6
Power brakes...................................... 5-73 Snow tires .......................................... 9-20
Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-29
Power door locks ................................ 5-37 Spark plugs ............................... 9-22, 11-5
Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-18
Power outlet ..................................... 5-163 Steering
Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2
Power steering Power steering fluid ............... 9-12, 11-6
Roof antenna ...................................... 7-51
Fluid .................................... 9-12, 11-6 Tilt lock lever................................. 5-49
System .......................................... 5-79 Wheel lock............................ 5-20, 5-54
Power windows .................................. 5-43 Storage spaces .................................. 5-166
12-4
Alphabetical index
Sun visors ........................................ 5-163 Towing.............................................. 8-12
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-21 Trailer towing .................................... 6-11 W
How the Supplement Restraint System Transfer oil ................................ 9-10, 11-6 Warning lights .................................. 5-124
works .......................................... 4-23 Washer
Trunk area light
Servicing ....................................... 4-35 Fluid..................................... 9-10, 11-6
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Warning light/display...................... 4-26 Switch ......................................... 5-137
Replacement .................................. 9-41
Windshield washer........................ 5-137
Trunk lid ........................................... 5-39
T Waxing .............................................. 9-44
Turn signal lights
Tank capacity .............................. 3-4, 11-6 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Weights ............................................. 11-4
Theft-alarm system Indicators ..................................... 5-123 Welcome light .................................. 5-131
System........................................... 5-41 Lever ........................................... 5-133 Wheel
Time Setting.............................. 7-47, 7-52 Replacement .......................... 9-35, 9-38 Covers ........................................... 8-11
Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-84 Specification .................................. 11-5
Warning light/display...................... 5-84 U Wiper
Tires .................................................. 9-14 USB input terminal............................ 5-160 Rain sensor .................................. 5-135
How to change a tire ......................... 8-6 How to connect an iPod ................. 5-161 Windshield................................... 5-134
Inflation pressure ............................ 9-17 Wiper blades .................................. 9-21
USB input terminal device
Maintenance................................... 9-19
Quality grading............................... 10-2
How to connect a USB memory...... 5-160 12
Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-18
Rotation ......................................... 9-19 V
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5 Vanity mirror .................................... 5-163
Snow tires ...................................... 9-20 Vehicle care precautions ..................... 9-41
Tire and loading information placard . 6-7,
11-3 Vehicle dimensions ............................ 11-4
Tire chains ..................................... 9-20 Vehicle labeling ................................. 11-2
Tread wear indicators ...................... 9-19 Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-3
Tissue holder .................................... 5-167 Vehicle weights.................................. 11-4
Tools ................................................... 8-5 Vents .................................................. 7-2
Storage ............................................ 8-5
12-5
How to calculate your gasoline mileage

2017 M Lancer

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

2017 M Lancer

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Lancer

/ 2017 OWNER’S MANUAL

© Copyright 2016 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.

Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

1 Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

Instrument cluster P.5-90 Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter

Combination headlights and dimmer

Fuses P.9-25 Steering wheel tilt lock lever

Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag

Instruments and controls

Instruments and controls 1

Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front

Parking brake lever Center console box P.5-167

Heated seat switch (if so equipped) P.4-4

Audio (if so equipped) P.7-15

Hazard warning flasher switch Front passenger seat belt warn-

Electric rear window

Electric remote-con- Dome light (Front)/Reading lights P.5-164,

Power door lock switch

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor Inside rearview mirror

Sun visors P.5-163

Bottle holder (for front seat) P.5-168

Front seats P.4-3

Supplemental restraint system - side airbag

Coat hook (if so equipped) P.5-169

Assist grip P.5-168

Rear seat P.4-5

Tether anchors for child restraint system

Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-6

Outside rearview mirrors P.5-51

Side turn signal lights (if so equipped)

Front turn signal lights Headlights, low beam

Antenna P.7-51 Tire inflation pressure P.9-17

Trunk lid P.5-39

Trunk lid OPEN switch

License plate lights

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning light Do this Ref. page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

SRS warning light

2-2 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”.

(When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start

The F.A.S.T.-key does not operate.

Quick index 2-3

If this problem occurs...

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position. P.

The engine does not start.

2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

The engine is overheated.

Quick index 2-5

If this problem occurs...

The CVT makes no engine speed to

2-6 Quick index

A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-

Filling the fuel tank

Filling the fuel tank